2014 volvo v60 Owner's Manual

03 Instruments and controls. Instruments and controls, left-hand drive car - overview........................................... 53.

OWNER'S MANUAL

Google Docs
Google Drive
Download [pdf]

File Info : application/pdf, 442 Pages, 11.74MB

2014 volvo v60

WEB EDITION
OWNER'S MANUAL

DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements.

In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.

Table of contents

01 Introduction
Owner information.................................... 13 Reading the owner's manual.................... 13 Recording data......................................... 16
01Accessories and extra equipment............ 17
Change of ownership for cars with Volvo On Call*..................................................... 17 Information on the Internet....................... 18 Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy..... 19 The owner's manual and the environment.......................................................... 21 Laminated glass........................................ 21

02 Safety
General information on seatbelts.............. 23 Seatbelt - putting on................................. 24 Seat belt - loosening................................. 25
02Seatbelt - pregnancy................................ 25
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 26 Seatbelt tensioner..................................... 26 Safety - warning symbol........................... 27 Airbag system........................................... 28 Driver airbag.............................................. 28 Passenger airbag...................................... 29 Passenger airbag - activating/deactivating*............................................................ 30 Side airbag (SIPS)..................................... 31 Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster cushion..................................................... 32 Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 33 General information on WHIPS (whiplash protection)................................................. 33 WHIPS - child seats.................................. 34 WHIPS - seating position.......................... 35 When the systems deploy......................... 36 General information on safety mode......... 37 Safety mode - attempting to start the car............................................................. 38 Safety mode - moving the car.................. 38

General information on child safety.......... 39 Child seats................................................ 40 Child seats - location................................ 44
02Child seat - two-stage booster seat*........ 44
Two-stage booster seat* - raising............. 45 Two-stage booster seat* - lowering.......... 46 Child seat - ISOFIX................................... 47 ISOFIX - size classes................................ 48 ISOFIX - types of child seat...................... 49 Child seats - upper mounting points........ 51

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Table of contents

03 Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls, left-hand drive car - overview........................................... 53 Instruments and controls, right-hand drive car - overview................................... 56
03Combined instrument panel...................... 59
Analogue combined instrument panel overview.................................................... 59 Digital combined instrument panel overview.................................................... 60 Eco guide & Power guide*........................ 63 Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols...................................... 64 Combined instrument cluster - meaning of warning symbols................................... 65 Outside temperature gauge...................... 67 Trip meter.................................................. 68 Clock......................................................... 68 Volvo Sensus............................................ 68 Key positions............................................ 70 Key positions - functions at different levels.............................................................. 70 Seats, front................................................ 72 Seats, front - electrically operated............ 73 Key memory* in remote control key.......... 74 Seats, rear................................................. 74

Steering wheel.......................................... 76 Heating* of the steering wheel.................. 77 Light switches........................................... 78
03Position/parking lamps............................. 80
Daytime running lights.............................. 80 Tunnel detection*...................................... 81 Main/dipped beam.................................... 81 Active high beam*..................................... 82 Active Xenon headlamps*......................... 84 Rear fog lamp........................................... 85 Brake lights............................................... 86 Hazard warning flashers........................... 86 Direction indicators................................... 87 Interior lighting.......................................... 88 Home safe light duration........................... 89 Approach light duration............................ 89 Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern............................................................ 90 Wipers and washing.................................. 90 Power windows......................................... 92 Door mirrors.............................................. 94 Windows and rearview and door mirrors - heating.................................................... 96 Rearview mirror - interior.......................... 96

Compass*................................................. 97 Sunroof*.................................................... 98 Menu navigation - combined instrument panel....................................................... 100
03Menu overview - combined instrument
panel....................................................... 101 Messages................................................ 101 Messages - handling............................... 102 MY CAR.................................................. 103 Trip computer......................................... 104 Trip computer - combined instrument panel "Analog"........................................ 105 Trip computer - combined instrument panel "Digital"......................................... 109 Trip computer - supplementary information.......................................................... 112 Trip computer - trip statistics*................ 113

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Table of contents

04 Climate control
General information on climate control... 115 Actual temperature................................. 116 Sensors - climate control........................ 116
04Air cleaning............................................. 116
Air cleaning - passenger compartment filter............................................................ 117 Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*.............................................. 117 Air cleaning - IAQS*................................ 118 Air cleaning - material............................. 118 Menu settings - climate control.............. 118 Air distribution in the passenger compartment.................................................. 119 Electronic climate control - ECC............. 121 Heated front seats*................................. 122 Heated rear seat*.................................... 122 Fan.......................................................... 123 Auto-regulation....................................... 123 Temperature control in the passenger compartment.......................................... 124 Air conditioning....................................... 124 Demisting and defrosting the windscreen..................................................... 125 Air distribution - recirculation.................. 126 Air distribution - table............................. 127

Engine and passenger compartment heater*..................................................... 129 Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - direct start/immediate
04stop......................................................... 130
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer.......................... 130 Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages................. 132 Additional heater*.................................... 134 Fuel-driven additional heater*................. 134 Electric additional heater*....................... 135

05 Loading and storage
Storage spaces....................................... 137 Jacket holder.......................................... 139 Tunnel console........................................ 139
05Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
ashtray*................................................... 139 Glovebox................................................. 140 Inlay mats*.............................................. 140 Vanity mirror............................................ 140 Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets............... 141 Loading................................................... 142 Loading - long load................................. 143 Roof load................................................. 143 Load retaining eyelets............................. 143 Loading - bag holder.............................. 144 12 V electrical socket - cargo area*........ 144 Safety net*............................................... 145 Safety net* combined with cargo cover.. 146 Safety grille............................................. 146 Cargo cover............................................ 147

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Table of contents

06 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade......... 149 Remote control key - losing ................... 149 Key memory*........................................... 149
06Indication locking/unlocking - adjusting. 150
Lock indicator......................................... 150 Immobiliser.............................................. 150 Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system....................................... 151 Remote control key - functions............... 151 Remote control key - range.................... 153 PCC* - unique functions......................... 153 PCC* - range........................................... 154 Detachable key blade............................. 155 Detachable key blade - detaching/ attaching................................................. 155 Detachable key blade - unlocking doors 156 Privacy locking*....................................... 156 Remote control key/PCC - replacing the battery..................................................... 158 Keyless drive*.......................................... 159 Keyless drive* - PCC range.................... 159 Keyless drive* - handling the PCC safely 160 Keyless drive* - interference to PCC function................................................... 160 Keyless drive* - locking........................... 161

Keyless drive* - unlocking....................... 161 Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key blade ...................................................... 162 Keyless drive* - key memory.................. 162
06Keyless drive* - lock settings.................. 163
Keyless drive* - antenna location........... 163 Locking/unlocking - from the outside..... 164 Manual locking of the door..................... 165 Locking/unlocking - from the inside....... 165 Total airing function................................ 166 Locking/unlocking - glovebox................. 167 Locking/unlocking - tailgate.................... 167 Deadlocks*.............................................. 168 Child safety locks - manual activation.... 169 Child safety locks - electrical activation* 170 Alarm....................................................... 171 Alarm indicator........................................ 172 Alarm - automatic re-arming................... 172 Alarm - remote control key not working. 172 Alarm signals........................................... 173 Reduced alarm level............................... 173

07 Driver support
Active chassis - Four C*.......................... 175 Stability and traction control system (DSTC)..................................................... 175 Stability and traction control system
07(DSTC) - operation.................................. 176
Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - symbols and messages........... 178 Road Sign Information (RSI)*.................. 179 Road sign information (RSI)* - operation 179 Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations 181 Speed limiter*.......................................... 182 Speed limiter* - getting started............... 182 Speed limiter* - changing speed............. 183 Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation and standby mode.................................. 183 Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded.......................................................... 184 Speed limiter* - deactivation................... 184 Cruise control*........................................ 185 Cruise control* - managing speed.......... 186 Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode.................................. 186 Cruise control* - resume set speed........ 187 Cruise control* - deactivate.................... 187 Adaptive cruise control - ACC*............... 188

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Table of contents

Adaptive cruise control* - function......... 189 Adaptive cruise control* - overview........ 190 Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed...................................................... 191
07Adaptive cruise control* - set time inter-
val............................................................ 192 Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode............ 193 Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle........................................ 194 Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate...... 194 Adaptive Cruise Control* - Queue Assist 195 Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality................................ 196 Radar sensor........................................... 197 Radar sensor - limitations....................... 197 Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action............................................... 199 Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages................................................ 200 Distance Warning*.................................. 202 Distance Warning* - limitations............... 203 Distance Warning* - symbols and messages....................................................... 204 City SafetyTM........................................... 205 City SafetyTM - function........................... 205

City SafetyTM - operation........................ 206 City SafetyTM - limitations....................... 207 City SafetyTM - laser sensor.................... 209
07City SafetyTM - symbols and messages.. 211
Collision warning system*....................... 212 Collision warning system* - function...... 213 Collision warning system* - cyclist detection.......................................................... 214 Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians............................................. 216 Collision warning system* - operation.... 217 Collision warning system* - general limitations..................................................... 218 Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations.......................................... 220 Collision warning system* - symbols and messages................................................ 222 Driver Alert System*................................ 224 Driver Alert Control (DAC)*...................... 224 Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation... 225 Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages................................................ 227 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*............. 229 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function.......................................................... 230

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation.......................................................... 230 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations........................................................ 231
07Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - sym-
bols and messages................................. 232 Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)*......................... 234 Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - function.......... 235 Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - operation....... 236 Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - limitations...... 237 Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - symbols and messages................................................ 238 Park Assist*............................................. 240 Park assist syst* - function..................... 240 Park assist syst* - backward.................. 241 Park assist syst* - forward...................... 242 Park assist syst* - fault indication........... 243 Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors. 243 Park assist camera.................................. 244 Park assist camera - settings................. 246 Park assist camera - limitations.............. 247 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)*........................... 247 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function.......... 248 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation........ 249 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations....... 251

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Table of contents

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - symbols and messages................................................ 252 BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System)... 253 BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) -
07operation................................................. 254
CTA (Cross Traffic Alert)*........................ 255 BLIS - symbols and messages............... 257 Adjustable steering force*....................... 257

08 Starting and driving
Alcolock*................................................. 259 Alcolock* - functions and operation........ 259 Alcolock* - storage.................................. 260
08Alcolock* - before starting the engine.... 260
Alcolock* - to bear in mind..................... 261 Alcolock* - symbols and text messages. 263 Starting the engine.................................. 264 Switching off the engine......................... 265 Steering lock........................................... 265 Remote start (ERS)*................................ 266 Remote start (ERS) - operation............... 266 Remote start (ERS) - symbols and messages....................................................... 268 Starting the engine Flexifuel................. 269 Jump starting with battery...................... 270 Gearboxes............................................... 271 Manual gearbox...................................... 271 Gear shift indicator*................................ 272 Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*........... 273 Automatic gearbox -- Powershift*.......... 276 Gear selector inhibitor............................. 278 Hill start assist (HSA)*............................. 279 Start/Stop*.............................................. 279 Start/Stop* - function and operation....... 280

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop... 282 Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts........ 283 Start/Stop* - the engine does not autostart......................................................... 284
08Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stop-
page manual gearbox............................. 284 Start/Stop* - settings.............................. 285 Start/Stop* - symbols and messages..... 286 ECO*....................................................... 288 All Wheel Drive - AWD*........................... 290 Foot brake............................................... 290 Foot brake - anti-lock braking system.... 291 Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers......... 291 Foot brake - emergency brake assistance....................................................... 292 Parking brake.......................................... 293 Fording.................................................... 297 Overheating............................................. 297 Driving with open tailgate....................... 298 Overload - starter battery........................ 298 Before a long journey.............................. 299 Winter driving.......................................... 299 Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing............. 300 Fuel filler flap - manual opening.............. 300

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Table of contents

Filling up with fuel................................... 300 Fuel - handling........................................ 301 Fuel - petrol............................................. 302
08Fuel - diesel............................................. 302
Catalytic converters................................ 303 Fuel - bioethanol E85.............................. 304 Diesel particle filter (DPF)........................ 305 Economical driving.................................. 305 Driving with a trailer................................ 306 Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox... 308 Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox 308 Towing bracket/Towbar.......................... 309 Detachable towbar - storage.................. 309 Detachable towbar - specifications........ 309 Detachable towbar - attachment/ removal................................................... 310 Trailer stabiliser - TSA............................. 312 Towing.................................................... 313 Towing eye.............................................. 315 Recovery................................................. 316

09 Wheels and tyres
Tyres - direction of rotation.................... 318 Tyres - maintenance............................... 318 Tyres - tread wear indicators.................. 320
09Wheel bolts............................................. 320
Tools....................................................... 320 Jack*....................................................... 321 Winter tyres............................................. 321 Wheel and wheel rim dimensions........... 322 Tyres - dimensions.................................. 322 Tyres - load index................................... 323 Tyres - speed ratings.............................. 323 Changing wheels - removing wheels...... 324 Changing wheels - fitting........................ 327 Tyres - air pressure................................. 328 Warning triangle...................................... 329 First aid kit*............................................. 329 Tyre pressure monitoring*....................... 330 Tyre pressure monitoring* - adjust (recalibration).................................................... 330 Tyre pressure monitoring* - rectifying low tyre pressure........................................... 331 Tyre pressure monitoring* - activate/ deactivate............................................... 331 Tyre pressure monitoring* - recommendations.................................................... 332

Tyre pressure monitoring - driveable punctured tyres*...................................... 332 Emergency puncture repair.................... 333 Emergency puncture repair kit - location 333
09Emergency puncture repair kit - over-
view......................................................... 334 Emergency puncture repair - operation.. 335 Emergency puncture repair - rechecking 336 Emergency puncture repair kit - inflating the tyres.................................................. 337 Emergency puncture repair kit - sealant. 338

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Table of contents

10 Maintenance and service
Volvo service programme....................... 340 Raising the car........................................ 341 Bonnet - opening and closing................. 343
10Engine compartment - overview............. 343
Engine compartment - checking............. 344 Engine oil - general................................. 345 Engine oil - checking and filling.............. 346 Coolant - level......................................... 349 Brake and clutch fluid - level.................. 350 Power steering fluid - level...................... 351 Climate control system - fault tracing and repair....................................................... 352 Lamp replacement.................................. 352 Lamp replacement - headlamps............. 353 Lamp replacement - cover for main/ dipped beam bulbs................................. 354 Lamp replacement - dipped beam......... 355 Lamp replacement - main beam............. 355 Lamp replacement - extra main beam.... 355 Lamp replacement - direction indicators front......................................................... 356 Lamp replacement - rear lamp............... 356 Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps...................................................... 357

Lamp replacement - number plate lighting........................................................... 357 Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area......................................................... 357
10Lamp replacement - vanity mirror light-
ing........................................................... 358 Lamps - specifications ........................... 358 Wiper blades........................................... 359 Washer fluid - filling................................ 361 Battery..................................................... 361 Battery - symbols.................................... 362 Starter battery - replacement.................. 363 Battery - Start/Stop................................. 365 Fuses - general....................................... 367 Fuses - in engine compartment.............. 368 Fuses - under glovebox.......................... 372 Fuses - in the control module under the glovebox................................................. 374 Fuses - in cargo area.............................. 376 Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone................................................ 377 Car washing............................................ 379 Polishing and waxing.............................. 380 Water and dirt-repellent coating............. 381 Rustproofing........................................... 381

Cleaning the interior................................ 381 Paint damage.......................................... 383
10

Table of contents

11 Specifications
Type designations................................... 386 Dimensions............................................. 389 Weights................................................... 390
11Towing capacity and towball load.......... 391
Engine specifications.............................. 393 Engine oil - adverse driving conditions... 395 Engine oil - grade and volume................ 396 Coolant - grade and volume................... 398 Transmission fluid - grade and volume... 399 Brake fluid - grade and volume............... 401 Power steering fluid - grade.................... 401 Washer fluid - quality and volume.......... 401 Fuel tank - volume.................................. 402 Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions... 403 Tyres - approved tyre pressures............. 407 Electrical system..................................... 410 Starter battery - specification................. 411 Type approval - remote control key system.......................................................... 412 Type approval - tyre pressure monitoring 412 Type approval - radar system................. 413
Type approval - Bluetooth®.................... 414 Licenses.................................................. 422 Symbols in the display............................ 425

12 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 428
12

Table of contents
11

INTRODUCTION

01 Introduction

Owner information

Reading the owner's manual

· Favourites - Quick access to favourite-

Your car is equipped with a display screen*

A good way of getting to know your new car

bookmarked articles.

where you can find information on how your

is to read the owner's manual, ideally before

· Quick Guide - A selection of articles for

car works. This owner's manual is a supple-

your first journey. This will give you the oppor-

common functions.

ment to the information and contains important text, the latest updates, as well as instructions that can be useful when you, for practical reasons, cannot read the on-screen information. Changing the display language may mean that some information does not correspond to national or local laws and regulations.

tunity to familiarise yourself with new functions, to see how best to handle the car in different situations, and to make the best use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the manual. The specifications, design features and illustrations in this owner's manual are not bind-

NOTE
The owner's manual is not available while driving.
Owner's Manual in mobile devices

ing. We reserve the right to make modifica-

IMPORTANT

tions without prior notice.

The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that applicable laws and regulations are followed. It is also important that the car is maintained and handled in accordance with Volvo's recommendations in the owner's information. If there should be a difference between the information on the screen and in the printed manual then it is always the printed information that applies.

© Volvo Car Corporation
Digital owner's manual in the car1 When the printed manual refers to the digital owner's manual it means the one shown on the screen in the car. Open the digital owner's manual - press the MY CAR button in the centre console, press OK/MENU and select Owner's manual. There are four options for finding information in the owner's manual:
· Search - Search function for finding an
article.

NOTE
The owner's manual is available for download as a mobile application (applies for certain car models and mobile devices), see www.volvocars.com.

· Categories - All articles sorted into cate-
gories.

The mobile application also includes video and searchable content and easy navigation between different sections.

1 Applies to certain car models.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

01 Introduction

Options/accessories

Footnote

Warning for personal injury

All types of option/accessory are marked with an asterisk*. In addition to standard equipment, the owner's manual also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).

There is footnote information in the owner's manual that is located at the bottom of the page. This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral.

The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations. In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer. Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of injury.

Message texts There are displays in the car that show text messages. These text messages are highlighted in the owner's manual by means of the text being slightly larger and printed in grey. Examples of this are in menu texts and message texts on the information display (e.g. Audio settings).
Decals The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/ information.

G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality.

IMPORTANT

"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of damage.

NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of e.g. features and functions.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

01 Introduction

G031592 G031593

Risk of property damage

Information

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property.

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car.
Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual.

When there is a series of illustrations for

step-by-step instructions each step is

numbered in the same way as the corres-

ponding illustration.

There are numbered lists with letters adjacent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered and are used to illustrate a movement.

Arrows with letters are used to clarify a movement when the reciprocal order is of no relevance.

If there is no series of illustrations for step-bystep instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers.

Position lists Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different components are pointed out. The number recurs in the position list featured in connection with the illustration that describes the item.

Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual.
Example:
· Coolant · Engine oil

}} 15

01 Introduction

Related information

Recording data

for a certain length of time, but also as a

Related information refers to other sections containing related information. Images

Certain information about the vehicle's operation and functionality, and any incidents, are recorded in the car.

result of a collision or incident. This information may be stored by Volvo as long as it can help to further develop and further enhance safety and quality and as long as there are

The manual's images are sometimes sche-

Your vehicle contains a number of computers

legal requirements and other regulations that

matic and may deviate from the car's appear- whose function is to continuously check and

Volvo needs to consider.

ance depending on equipment level and market.
To be continued }} This symbol is located furthest down to the right when an article continues on the following page.
Continued from previous page || This symbol is located furthest up to the left when an article continues from the previous page.

monitor the vehicle's operation and functionality. Some of the computers can record information during normal driving if they detect an error. In addition, information is recorded in the event of a collision or incident. Parts of the recorded information are required so that technicians can diagnose and rectify faults in the vehicle during servicing and maintenance and so that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements and other regulations. In addition to this, the information is used for research purposes by Volvo in order to con-

Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent. However, due to national legislation and regulations Volvo may be required to disclose such information to authorities such as police authorities, or others who may assert a legal right to have access to it. To be able to read and interpret the information recorded by the computers in the vehicle requires special technical equipment that

Related information
· The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 21)
· Information on the Internet (p. 18)

tinually develop quality and safety, as the information can contribute to a better understanding of the factors that cause accidents and injuries. The information includes details of the status and functionality of various sys-

Volvo, and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo is responsible that the information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance, is stored and handled in a

tems and modules in the vehicle with regard

secure manner and that the handling com-

to engine, throttle, steering and brake sys-

plies with applicable legal requirements. For

tems, amongst other things. This information

further information - contact a Volvo dealer.

may include details regarding the way the

driver drives the vehicle, such as vehicle

speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,

steering wheel movement and whether or not

the driver and passengers have used their

seatbelts. For the reasons given this informa-

tion may be stored in the vehicle's computers

01 Introduction

Accessories and extra equipment

The windscreen is equipped with a heat-

Change of ownership for cars with

The incorrect connection and installation of accessories and extra equipment can nega-

reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat radiation into the passenger compartment.

Volvo On Call* If the car is equipped with Volvo On Call, VOC

tively affect the car's electronic system.

The positioning of electronic equipment, such it is important to change the owner of the

Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system. Volvo therefore recommends

as a transponder, behind a glass surface with heat-reflecting film may affect its function and performance.

service. VOC is a supplemental service that consists of safety, security and comfort services. In

that you always contact an authorised Volvo

For the optimal function of electronic equip-

the event of change of ownership it is impor-

workshop before installing accessories or

ment, it should be positioned on the part of

tant to change the owner of the service.

extra equipment which are connected to or affect the electrical system.

the windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see the highlighted area in the above illustra-

Closing the VOC service

Heat-reflecting windscreen*

tion).

Contact a Volvo dealer in the event of change of ownership in order to close the VOC serv-

ice.

In the event of change of ownership it is important to reset personal settings in the car to the original factory settings2, see Change of ownership.

Areas where IR film is not applied.
Dimensions

Starting the VOC service It is very important that the VOC service changes owner so that the previous owner's ability to use services in the car is stopped. Contact a Volvo dealer in the event of a change of ownership.
Related information
· Information on the Internet (p. 18)

A 40 mm

B 80 mm

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

01 Introduction
01 Information on the Internet At www.volvocars.com there is further information concerning your car. With a personal Volvo ID it is possible to log in to My Volvo which is a personal web page for you and your car.
QR code A QR code reader is required to read the QR code, which is available as a supplemental program (app) for several mobile phones. The QR code reader can be downloaded from e.g. App Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
2 Only applies to cars that can be connected to the Internet.
18

Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy Your Volvo complies with strict international environmental standards and is also manufac-

tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-efficient plants in the world.

01 Introduction
01

G000000

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corporation's core values which influence all operations. We also believe that our customers share our consideration for the environment. Your Volvo complies with strict international environmental standards and is also manufactured in one of the cleanest and most resource-efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corporation has global ISO certification, which includes the environmental standard ISO 14001 covering all factories and several of our other units. We also set requirements

for our partners so that they work systematically with environmental issues.
Fuel consumption Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide. It is possible for the driver to influence fuel consumption. For more information read under the heading, Reducing environmental impact.

Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment A passenger compartment filter prevents dust and pollen from entering the passenger compartment via the air intake.

}} 19

01 Introduction

A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS*

required to guarantee good environmental

Following this advice can save money, the

(Interior Air Quality System) ensures that the

care.

planet's resources are saved, and the car's

incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside. The system consists of an electronic sensor and a carbon filter. The incoming air is monitored continuously and if there is an increase in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example. The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon filter.

Reducing environmental impact You can easily help reduce environmental impact - here are a few tips:
· Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off
the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regulations.
· Drive economically - think ahead. · Perform service and maintenance in
accordance with the owner's manual's instructions - follow the intervals recommended in the Service and Warranty

durability is extended. For more information and further advice, see Eco guide (p. 63), Economical driving (p. 305) and Fuel consumption (p. 403).
Recycling As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is important that the car is recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a dealer for referral to a certified/approved recycling facility.

Interior The interior of a Volvo is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with

Booklet.
· If the car is equipped with an engine
block heater*, use it before starting from

Related information
· The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 21)

contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.

cold - it improves starting capacity and

Extreme attention has been given to choosing

reduces wear in cold weather and the

environmentally-compatible materials.

engine reaches normal operating tem-

Volvo workshops and the environment

perature more quickly, which lowers consumption and reduces emissions.

Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's work-

· High speed increases consumption con-
siderably due to increased wind resistance - a doubling of speed increases wind resistance 4 times.

shops are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of our system. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which our workshops are designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. Our workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools

· Always dispose of environmentally hazar-
dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The owner's manual and the environment The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from FSC® certified forests or other controlled sources.
The Forest Stewardship Council® symbol shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from FSC® certified forests or other controlled sources.

Laminated glass
Laminated glass The glass is reinforced which provides better protection against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compart-
ment. The windscreen and other windows* have laminated glass.

01 Introduction
01

Related information
· Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy (p.
19)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

SAFETY

02 Safety

General information on seatbelts

· The hip strap must be positioned low

Related information

Heavy braking can have serious consequen-

down (not over the abdomen).

· Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 25)

ces if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that

· Tension the hip strap over the lap by pull-

· Seat belt - loosening (p. 25)

all passengers are using their seatbelts during the journey.

ing the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder.

· Seatbelt tensioner (p. 26)

WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.

It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position. Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten (p. 24) their seatbelt by means of an audio and visual reminder (p. 26).
Remember
· Do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly.
· The seatbelt must not be twisted or
caught on anything.

WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop. If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the protective characteristics of the seatbelt may have been lost, even if it appears to be undamaged. In addition, replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The new seatbelt must be typeapproved and intended for installation in the same position as the replaced seatbelt.

02 Safety

Seatbelt - putting on Put on the seatbelt (p. 23) before setting off.

Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by

pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt

buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt

has locked.

Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on the shoulder.

Remember The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
· if it is pulled out too quickly · during braking and acceleration · if the car leans heavily.
Related information
· Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 25) · Seat belt - loosening (p. 25) · Seatbelt tensioner (p. 26) · Seatbelt reminder (p. 26)

Correctly fitted seatbelt.

1 Certain markets.
24

Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button and move the belt vertically. Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against your throat.
The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear seat1.

02 Safety

Seat belt - loosening Loosen the seatbelt (p. 23) when the car is stationary.
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose.
Related information
· Seatbelt - putting on (p. 24) · Seatbelt reminder (p. 26)

Seatbelt - pregnancy Seatbelt (p. 23) must always be worn during pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the correct way.

The aim should be to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between abdomen and steering wheel.

Related information
· Seatbelt - putting on (p. 24)

· Seat belt - loosening (p. 25)

G020998

The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen. The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt. As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers must adjust the seat (p. 72) and steering wheel (p. 76) such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel).
25

02 Safety

Seatbelt reminder

matically after driving for approximately

Seatbelt tensioner

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their (p. 24) seatbelt by means of an audio

30 seconds or after pressing the indicator stalk (p. 100) OK button.

All the seatbelts (p. 23) are equipped with belt tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt ten-

and visual reminder.

· Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- sioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a

belts is unfastened during travel. This

sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then

warning takes the form of a message in

provides more effective restraint for the occu-

the combined instrument panel along with pants.

the audio/visual signal. The warning stops

when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can

WARNING

also be acknowledged manually by pressing the OK button. The message in the combined instrument panel showing which seatbelts are in use is

Never insert the tongue of the passenger's seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side. Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. Do

always shown. Press the OK button to see

not make any damages on seatbelts nor

stored messages.

insert any foreign objects into a buckle.

G017726

The seatbelts and buckles would then

Certain markets

possibly not function as intended in the

The audio reminder is speed dependent, and in some cases time dependent. The visual reminder is located in the roof console and in the combined instrument panel (p. 59).

An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind the driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one. At low speed, the audible reminder will sound for the first 6 seconds.

event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.

Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt

reminder system.

Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions:
· Provides information on which seatbelts
(p. 23) are being used in the rear seat. A message appears in the combined instrument panel when the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear doors has been opened. The message is cleared auto-

Safety - warning symbol The warning symbol is shown if a fault is detected during fault tracing or if a system has been activated. Where required, the warning symbol is shown together with a message in the combined instrument panel (p. 59) information display.

02 Safety

Service required or SRS airbag Service

urgent appears in the display. Volvo recom-

mends that you contact an authorised Volvo

workshop immediately.

Related information

· General information on safety mode (p.

37)

Warning triangle and warning symbol for the airbag system (p. 28) in the analogue combined instrument panel.

Warning triangle and warning symbol for the airbag system in the digital combined instrument panel. The warning symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates when the remote control key is in key position II (p. 70). The symbol is extinguished after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault-free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indicates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner system, SIPS, the IC system or some other fault in the system. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates and SRS airbag

02 Safety

Airbag system In the event of a frontal collision the airbag system helps to protect the driver and passenger from injuries to head, face and chest.
02
Airbag system, left-hand drive car.
Airbag system, right-hand drive car.

G018666

G018665

The system consists of airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated and become hot. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when compressed. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending on the nature of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt positions. It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The detectors sense the force of the collision on the vehicle and the action is adapted accordingly so that one or more airbags are deployed.
Related information
· Driver airbag (p. 28) · Passenger airbag (p. 29) · Safety - warning symbol (p. 27)

Driver airbag To supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt (p. 23) the car is equipped on the driver's side with an airbag (p. 28). This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.
Related information
· Passenger airbag (p. 29)

02 Safety

Passenger airbag To supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt (p. 23) on the passenger side, the car is equipped with an airbag (p. 28).
The airbag is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a

booster cushion in the front seat if the air-

bag is activated. Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front

of the front passenger seat.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.

Location of the front passenger airbag in a righthand drive car.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
Switch - PACOS* The front passenger airbag can be deactivated (p. 30) if the car is equipped with a switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).
WARNING

Location of the front passenger airbag in a lefthand drive car.

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.

If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag, but does not have a PACOS switch (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the airbag will always be activated.

WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.

Related information
· Driver airbag (p. 28) · Child seats (p. 40)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G017800

02 Safety

Passenger airbag - activating/ deactivating*

Front passenger airbag (p. 29) can be deacti-

vated if the car is equipped with a switch,

PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).

Switch - PACOS The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open.
Check that the switch is in the required position. The remote control key's key blade (p. 155) should be used to change position.

Location of airbag label plus switch. The airbag is activated. With the switch in this position, persons taller than 140 cm can sit in the front passenger seat, but

never children in a child seat or on a booster cushion. The airbag is deactivated. With the switch in this position, children in a child seat or on a booster cushion can sit in the front passenger seat, but never persons taller than 140 cm.
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat): Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm. Deactivated airbag (passenger seat): No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.
NOTE
When the remote control key is in key position II (p. 70) the warning symbol (p. 27) for the airbag is shown in the combined instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds. Following which, the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag.

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated. A warning symbol in the roof console indicates that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated (see preceding illustration).

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a

booster cushion in the front seat if the air-

bag is activated and the symbol

the roof console is illuminated. Failure to

follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G017724 G032949

WARNING

Failure to follow the advice given above

can endanger the lives of passengers in

the car.

Related information
· Child seats (p. 40)

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated. A text message and a symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front passenger seat if the message in the roof console indicates that the airbag is deactivated, and if the warning symbol(p. 27) for the airbag system is also displayed on the combined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Visit a workshop as soon as possible. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

02 Safety

Side airbag (SIPS)

In a side impact collision a large proportion of

the collision force is transferred by the SIPS

(Side Impact Protection System) to beams,

pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural

parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-

er's and front passenger seats protect the

chest area and the hip and are an important

part of the SIPS.

The SIPS bag system consists of two main components, side airbag and sensors. The side airbags are located in the front seat backrests. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.
31

02 Safety
|| 02
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.

WARNING · Volvo recommends that repairs are
only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Defective work in the SIPSbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
· Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.
· Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.
· Side airbags are a supplement the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Related information
· Driver airbag (p. 28) · Passenger airbag (p. 29) · Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster
cushion (p. 32)
· Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 33)

Side airbag (SIPS) - child seat/booster cushion The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag (p. 31).
Child seat/booster cushion (p. 40) can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an activated airbag (p. 30) on the front passenger side.
Related information
· Passenger airbag (p. 29) · General information on child safety (p.
39)

02 Safety

Inflatable Curtain (IC) The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision.
Inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is part of the SIPS system (p. 31) and the airbag system (p. 28). It is fitted in the headlining along both sides of the roof and protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.

WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example). Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Related information
· General information on seatbelts (p. 23)

General information on WHIPS (whiplash protection)

WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) is a pro-

tection against whiplash injuries. The system

consists of energy absorbing backrests and

specially designed head restraints in the front

seats.

02 Safety
||
02

WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward to alter the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
· WHIPS - child seats (p. 34) · WHIPS - seating position (p. 35) · General information on seatbelts (p. 23)

WHIPS - child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system (p. 33).
Child seat/booster cushion (p. 40) can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an activated airbag (p. 30) on the front passenger side.
Related information
· General information on child safety (p.
39)

The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the collision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence. 34

WHIPS - seating position For optimum protection from the WHIPS system (p. 33) the driver and passenger must have the correct seating position and make sure that the system's function is not obstructed.
Seating position Set the correct seating position in the front seat (p. 72) before driving starts. Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint.
Function

WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat backrest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.

Do not place objects on the rear seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.

02 Safety

WARNING

If a seat has been subjected to extreme

forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,

the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo recommends that it is checked by

an authorised Volvo workshop.

Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged.

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked even after a minor rearend collision.

02 Safety

When the systems deploy

In the event of a collision Volvo's different

personal safety systems work together in

order to minimise injury.

System

Triggered

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 26) front seat

In the event of a frontal collision, and/or side-impact collision, and/or rearend collision and/or overturning

Seatbelt tensioner, rear seat

In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or overturning

Airbags (Steering wheel(p. 28) and passenger airbag (p. 29))

In a frontal collisionA

Side airbags (SIPS) (p. 31)

In a side-impact accidentA

System

Triggered

Inflatable Curtain IC (p. 33)

In the event of a side impact and/or overturning and/or some frontal collisionsA

Whiplash protec- In a rear-end collition WHIPS (p. 33) sion

A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.

If the airbags (p. 28) have deployed, the following is recommended:
· Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.
· Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems.
· Always contact a doctor.

NOTE
The airbags and belt tensioner system are deployed only once during a collision.

WARNING
The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.

General information on safety mode Safety mode is a protective state that is enforced when the collision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions such as, for example, the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety systems, or the brake system.

02 Safety
Related information
· Safety mode - attempting to start the car
(p. 38)
· Safety mode - moving the car (p. 38)
02

Warning triangle in the analogue combined instrument panel.

Warning triangle in the digital combined instrument panel. If the car is involved in a collision, the text Safety mode See manual may appear in the combined instrument panel (p. 59) information display. This means that the car has reduced functionality.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See manual has been displayed.

02 Safety

Safety mode - attempting to start the car

If the car is set in safety mode (p. 37) then an

attempt to start the car can be made if every-

thing seems normal and the absence of fuel

leakage has been checked.

WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See manual message is displayed. Leave the car at once.

First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. There must be no smell of fuel either. If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the car. Remove the remote control key and open the driver's door. If a message is now shown to the effect that the ignition is on, press the start button. Then close the door and reinsert the remote control key. The car's electronics will now try to reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to start the car.

WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
· Safety mode - moving the car (p. 38)

If the message Safety mode See manual is still shown on the display then the car must not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery service (p. 316) used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once moving.

Safety mode - moving the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode See manual has been reset after attempting to start the car (p. 38) , the car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous position.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
Related information
· General information on safety mode (p.
37)

General information on child safety Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger. Volvo recommends that children travel in rear-facing child seats until as late an age as possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then front-facing booster cushions/child seats until up to 10 years of age. The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child's weight and size; see Child seats (p. 40).
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, booster cushions & attachment devices) which is designed for your particular car. Using Volvo's child safety equipment provides you with optimum conditions for your child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety equipment fits and is easy to use.

NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.
Child safety locks The rear doors and rear door windows* can be blocked manually (p. 169) or electronically (p. 170)* from opening from the inside. Related information
· Child seats - location (p. 44) · Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 47) · Child seats - upper mounting points (p.
51)

02 Safety
02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

02 Safety
Child seats Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make sure that the child seat is being used correctly.
02
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.

G020739

NOTE
When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instructions included.
WARNING
Do not secure the straps of the child seat to the seat's horizontal adjustment bar, springs or the rails and beams under the seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting.

02 Safety

Recommended child seats2 Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat

Centre rear seat

Group 0 max 10 kg
Group 0+ max 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing

child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(L)

Group 0 max 10 kg
Group 0+ max 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt. Type approval: E1 04301146 (U)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt. Type approval: E1 04301146 (U)

Group 0 Child seats which are universally approved. Child seats which are universally approved.

max 10 kg (U)

(U)

Group 0+ max 13 kg

Child seats which are universally approved. (U)

Group 1 9-18 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Type approval: E5 04192 (L)

2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
}}
41

02 Safety

|| Weight

Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat

Group 1 Child seats which are universally approved. Child seats which are universally approved.

9-18 kg

(U)

Group 2 15-25 kg
Group 2 15-25 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Type approval: E5 04192 (L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt. Type approval: E5 04191 (U)

Group 2/3 15-36 kg

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest). Type approval: E1 04301169 (UF)

Group 2/3 15-36 kg

Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest). Type approval: E5 04216 (UF)

Centre rear seat Child seats which are universally approved. (U)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt. Type approval: E5 04191 (U) Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest). Type approval: E1 04301169 (UF) Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest). Type approval: E5 04216 (UF)

02 Safety

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag) Outer rear seat

Centre rear seat

Group 2/3 15-36 kg

Integrated booster cushion (Integrated Booster

Cushion) - available as a factory fitted option.

Type approval: E5 04189

(B)

L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories. U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class. UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class. B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.

Related information
· Child seats - location (p. 44) · Child seats - upper mounting points (p.
51)
· Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 47) · General information on child safety (p. 39)

02 Safety

Child seats - location

Always fit child seats/booster cushions (p. 40)

in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is acti-

vated (p. 30). If a child is sitting on the front

passenger seat then he/she could suffer seri-

ous injury if the airbag deploys.

WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally. Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.

Child seat - two-stage booster seat* The integrated booster seats in the rear seat allow children to sit comfortably and safely.
The booster cushions are specially designed to provide optimum safety. In combination with the seatbelt (p. 23) they are approved for children who weigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are at least 95 cm in height.

The label for the airbag becomes visible when the passenger door is opened, see illustration (p. 30). You may place:
· a child seat/booster cushion on the front
passenger seat provided there is no activated airbag on the front passenger side.
· one or more child seats/booster cushions
in the rear seat.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated. No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

Related information
· General information on child safety (p. 39) · Child seats - upper mounting points (p.
51)
· Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 47)

Correct position, the seatbelt should be positioned in on the shoulder.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

02 Safety

Incorrect position, the head restraint must be adjusted as high as the head and the seatbelt must not be below the shoulder.
Check before driving that:
· the integrated two-stage booster seat is
correctly set in accordance with the table (p. 45) and in locked position
· the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted
· the seatbelt does not lie across the
child's throat or below the shoulder (see preceding illustrations)
· the lap section of the seatbelt is posi-
tioned low over the pelvis to provide optimal protection.
Adjusting the booster seat's two levels is performed by raising (p. 45) and lowering (p. 46).

WARNING
Volvo recommends that repair or replacement is only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the booster cushion. If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire booster cushion must be replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of protection. The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.
WARNING
If the instructions for the two-stage booster seat are not followed then the child could sustain serious injury in the event of an accident.

Two-stage booster seat* - raising

The integrated booster seat (p. 44) in the rear

seat can be folded up into two stages. How

many stages the cushion should be folded up

depends on the child's weight.

Weight

Stage 1 22-36 kg

Stage 2 15-25 kg

Stage 13

Pull the handle forward and up in order to release the booster cushion.

3 Lower stage.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

02 Safety
||
02

Two-stage booster seat* - lowering The integrated booster seat (p. 44) in the rear seat can be folded down from the upper or lower stage to fully lowered position in the seat cushion. However, it is not possible to adjust the booster cushion from the upper stage to the lower stage.

Press the booster cushion backwards to lock.
Stage 24

Lift the booster cushion up at the front edge and press it back against the backrest to lock.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the booster seat from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be reset by being fully folded down (p. 46) into the seat cushion.

Pull the handle forwards to release the cushion.

Start from the lower stage. Press the button.

4 Upper stage.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

02 Safety

Child seat - ISOFIX

· General information on child safety (p. 39)

ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats (p. 40) that is based on an international standard.
02

Press down with your hand in the centre of the cushion in order to lock it.
IMPORTANT
Check that there are no loose objects (e.g. toys) left behind in the space under the cushion before lowering.
NOTE
When folding the rear backrest the booster seat must first be lowered.
Related information
· Two-stage booster seat* - raising (p. 45)

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are concealed behind the lower section of the rear seat backrest, in the outer seats. The location of the mounting points is indicated by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see preceding illustration). Press the seat cushion down to access the mounting points. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points.
Related information
· ISOFIX - size classes (p. 48) · ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 49)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

02 Safety

ISOFIX - size classes

There is a size classification for child seats

using the ISOFIX (p. 47) fixture system in

order to assist users in choosing the correct

type of child seat (p. 49).

Size class
A
B
B1
C D
E F
G

Description
Full size, front-facing child seat Reduced size (alt. 1), frontfacing child seat Reduced size (alt.2), front-facing child seat Full size, rear-facing child seat Reduced size, rear-facing child seat Rear-facing infant seat Transverse infant seat, lefthand Transverse infant seat, righthand

WARNING
Never place the child in the passenger seat if the car is fitted with an activated airbag.
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classification, the car model must be included on the vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer for recommendations about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.

02 Safety

ISOFIX - types of child seat Child seats are in different sizes cars are in different sizes. This means that not all child

seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.

Type of child seat

Weight

Size class

Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat

Outer rear seat

Infant seat transverse

max 10 kg

Infant seat, rear-facing

max 10 kg

(IL)

Infant seat, rear-facing

max 13 kg

(IL)

Child seat, rear-facing

9-18 kg

(IL)

}} 49

02 Safety

|| Type of child seat

Weight

Size class

Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat

Outer rear seat

Front-facing child seat

9-18 kg

OKA (IUF)

X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class. IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories. IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.

A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

Make sure you select the right size class (p. 48) of child seat with ISOFIX (p. 47) fixture system.

Child seats - upper mounting points The car is equipped with upper mounting points for certain front-facing child seats (p. 40). These mounting points are located on the rear of the seat.
The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats. Volvo recommends that small children should sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age as possible.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars with folding head restraints on the outer seats.

NOTE
In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage compartment, this must be removed before child seats can be attached to the securing points.
For detailed information on how the child seat should be tensioned in the upper mounting points, see the seat manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be drawn through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the attachment point.
Related information
· General information on child safety (p. 39) · Child seats - location (p. 44) · Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 47)

02 Safety
02
51

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instruments and controls, left-hand drive car - overview The overview shows where the car's displays and controls are located.

03 Instruments and controls
03

}} 53

03 Instruments and controls
|| Overview, left-hand drive car 03
54

Function

See

Menus and messages, direction indicators, main/ dipped beam, trip computer Manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox* Cruise control*
Horn, airbags
Combined instrument panel Menu navigation, audio control, phone control*
START/STOP ENGINE button Ignition switch

(p. 100), (p. 102), (p. 87), (p. 81) and (p. 112). (p. 273).
(p. 185) and (p. 188). (p. 76) and (p. 28). (p. 59). (p. 103) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement. (p. 264). (p. 70).

Screen for infotainment system and display of menus

(p. 103) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

03 Instruments and controls

Function

See

Function

See

Door handle

Seat adjustment*

(p. 73).

Control panel

(p. 165), (p. 170), (p. 92) and (p. 94).

Headlamp control, opener for fuel filler flap and tailgate

(p. 78), (p. 300) and (p. 167).

Hazard warning flashers

(p. 86).

Related information
· Outside temperature gauge (p. 67)

Control panel for

(p. 103) and

· Trip meter (p. 68)

infotainment system the Sensus and menu naviga- Infotainment

· Clock (p. 68)

tion

supplement.

Control panel for cli- (p. 121). mate control

Gear selector

(p. 271), (p. 273) or (p. 276).

Controls for active chassis (Four-C)*

(p. 175).

Wipers and washing (p. 90).

Steering wheel adjustment Bonnet opener

(p. 76). (p. 343).

Parking brake

(p. 293).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls
Instruments and controls, right-hand drive car - overview The overview shows where the car's displays and controls are located.
03
56

Overview, right-hand drive cars

03 Instruments and controls
03

}} 57

03 Instruments and controls

Function

See

Screen for infotainment system and display of menus Ignition switch

(p. 103) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement. (p. 70).

START/STOP

(p. 264).

ENGINE button

Manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox*

(p. 273).

Cruise control*

(p. 185) and (p. 188).

Combined instrument panel

(p. 59).

Horn, airbags

(p. 76) and (p. 28).

Menu navigation, audio control, phone control*

(p. 103) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

Wipers and washing (p. 90).

Door handle

Function

See

Control panel
Headlamp control, opener for fuel filler flap and tailgate Seat adjustment*

(p. 165), (p. 170), (p. 92) and (p. 94). (p. 78), (p. 300) and (p. 167). (p. 73).

Parking brake

(p. 293).

Steering wheel adjustment

(p. 76).

Menus and messages, direction indicators, main/ dipped beam, trip computer

(p. 100), (p. 102), (p. 87), (p. 81) and (p. 112).

Gear selector

(p. 271), (p. 273) or (p. 276).

Controls for active chassis (Four-C)*

(p. 175).

Control panel for cli- (p. 121). mate control

Function

See

Control panel for infotainment system and menu navigation

(p. 103) and the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

Hazard warning flashers

(p. 86).

Bonnet opener

(p. 343).

Related information
· Outside temperature gauge (p. 67) · Trip meter (p. 68) · Clock (p. 68)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Combined instrument panel The combined instrument panel's information

Analogue combined instrument panel - overview

Gauges and indicators

display shows information on some of the car's functions, as well as messages.

The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the

· Analogue combined instrument panel -
overview (p. 59)
· Digital combined instrument panel - over-

car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as well as messages. The information is shown with symbols and text.

view (p. 60)
· Combined instrument panel - meaning of

Information display

indicator symbols (p. 64)

· Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 65)

Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to

only one white marking1, the yellow indi-

cator symbol for low level in the fuel tank

is illuminated. See also Trip computer -

supplementary information (p. 112) and

Filling up with fuel (p. 300).

Information display, analogue instrument panel. The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as well as messages. The information is shown with symbols and text. There are further descriptions under the functions that use the display.

Eco meter The meter provides an indication of how economically the car is being driven. The higher the reading on the scale, the more economical it is. Speedometer

1 When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red. 59

03 Instruments and controls

Tachometer. The meter indicates engine

Functionality check

Digital combined instrument panel -

speed in thousands of revolutions per

All indicator and warning symbols, apart from

overview

minute (rpm).

symbols in the centre of the information dis-

The combined instrument panel's information

Gear shift indicator2/Gear position indicator3 See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 272), Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 273) or Automatic gearbox -Powershift* (p. 276).
Indicator and warning symbols

play, illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged. If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position II

display shows information on some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as well as messages. The information is shown with symbols and text. Information display

then all symbols go out within a few seconds

except the symbol for faults in the car's emis-

sions system and the symbol for low oil pres-

sure.

Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instrument panel.
Indicator symbols Indicator and warning symbols
warning symbols4

Related information
· Combined instrument panel (p. 59) · Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 64)
· Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 65)

Information display, digital instrument panel*. The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as well as messages. The information is shown with symbols and text. There are further descriptions under the functions that use the display.

2 Manual gearbox 3 Automatic gearbox 4 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text; see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 346).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Gauges and indicators, digital instrument panel Alternative themes can be selected for the digital combined instrument panel. Possible themes are "Elegance", "Eco" and "Performance". The setting for the theme can be stored in the remote control key's memory when locking the car; see pages Remote control key with key blade (p. 149) and MY CAR (p. 103).
A theme can only be selected when the engine is running.
To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk switch's OK button and then select the Themes menu option by turning the thumbwheel on the lever. Confirm your choice by pressing the OK button. For more information on menus, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 100).
The appearance of the centre console's screen follows the combined instrument panel's theme setting on certain model variants.

Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance". Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking5, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer supplementary information (p. 112) and Filling up with fuel (p. 300). Temperature gauge for engine coolant
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indicator7 See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 272), Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*

5 When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
6 Manual gearbox 7 Automatic gearbox

(p. 273) or Automatic gearbox -Powershift* (p. 276).
Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco". Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking5, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer supplementary information (p. 112) and Filling up with fuel (p. 300). Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 63). Speedometer Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indicator7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03
}} 61

03 Instruments and controls

|| 272), Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 273) or Automatic gearbox -Powershift* (p. 276).
03

Power guide. See also Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 63). Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indicator7. See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 272), Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 273) or Automatic gearbox -Powershift* (p. 276).
Indicator and warning symbols

Functionality check All indicator and warning symbols, apart from symbols in the centre of the information display, illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position II then all symbols go out within a few seconds except the symbol for faults in the car's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure.

Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance". Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to only one white marking5, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer supplementary information (p. 112) and Filling up with fuel (p. 300). Temperature gauge for engine coolant
Speedometer
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument panel.
Indicator symbols Indicator and warning symbols
warning symbols8

Related information
· Combined instrument panel (p. 59) · Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 64)
· Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 65)

5 When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
6 Manual gearbox 7 Automatic gearbox 8 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text; see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 346).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Eco guide & Power guide*

Instantaneous value

Eco guide and Power guide are two com-

The instantaneous value is shown here - the

bined instrument panel (p. 59) instruments

higher the reading on the scale, the better.

which help the driver to drive the car with optimum driving economy.

The instantaneous value is calculated based on speed, engine speed, engine power uti-

The car also stores statistics of journeys

lised plus use of the foot brake.

made, which can be viewed in the form of a block diagram; see Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 113).

Optimum speed (50-80 km/h) and low engine speeds are encouraged. The pointers fall during acceleration and braking.

Eco guide This instrument provides an indication of how economically the car is being driven.

Very low instantaneous values illuminate the red zone on the meter (with a short delay), which means poor driving economy and

Available engine power

To view this function, select the theme "Eco"; see Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 60).

hence should be avoided. Average value The average value slowly follows the instanta-

Engine power utilised Available engine power

neous value and describes how the car has

The smaller, upper pointer shows the availa-

been driven most recently. The higher the

ble engine power9. The higher the reading on

pointers on the scale, the better the economy the scale, the more power is available in the

achieved by the driver.

current gear.

Power guide This instrument shows the relationship between how much power (Power) is being taken from the engine and how much power is available.

Engine power utilised
The larger, lower pointer shows the engine power utilised9. The higher the reading on the scale, the more power is being taken from the engine.

Instantaneous value

To view this function, select the theme "Performance"; see Digital combined instrument panel - overview (p. 60).

A large gap between the two pointers indicates a large power reserve.

Average value

9 Power is dependent on engine speed.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Combined instrument panel meaning of indicator symbols The indicator symbols alert the driver that a function is activated, that the system is operating, or that an error or failure has occurred.

Indicator symbols

Symbol Specification

ABL fault

Emissions system

ABS fault

Rear fog lamp on

Stability system

Stability system, sport mode

Engine preheater (diesel)

Low level in fuel tank

Information, read display text

Main beam On

Left-hand direction indicator

Symbol Specification Right-hand direction indicator
Eco-function on, see ECO* (p. 288) Start/Stop, the engine autostopped; see Start/Stop* function and operation (p. 280) Tyre pressure system*, see Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 330)
ABL fault The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in the ABL function (Active Bending Lights). Emissions system If the symbol illuminates after the engine has been started then it may be due to a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop. ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS function. 1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off
the engine.

2. Restart the engine. 3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to
a workshop to have the ABS system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Rear fog lamp on This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on.
Stability system A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating. If the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in the system.
Stability system, sport mode Sport mode allows for a more active driving experience. The system then detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding of the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
Engine preheater (diesel) This symbol illuminates during engine preheating. Preheating mostly takes place due to low temperature.
Low level in fuel tank When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Information, read display text

Tyre pressure system

Combined instrument cluster -

When one of the car's systems does not

The symbol illuminates in the event of low

meaning of warning symbols

behave as intended, this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the information display. The message text is cleared with the OK button, see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 100), or it disap-

tyre pressure, or if a fault arises in the tyre pressure system. Related information
· Combined instrument panel (p. 59)

The warning symbols alert the driver that an important function is activated, or that a serious error or a serious failure has occurred. Warning symbols

pears automatically after a time (time depending on which function is indicated). The information symbol can also illuminate in

· Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 65)
· Digital combined instrument panel - over-

Symbol Specification Low oil pressureA

conjunction with other symbols.

view (p. 60)

NOTE

Parking brake applied, digital instrument

When a service message is shown, the symbol and message are cleared using the OK button, or disappear automatically after a time.

Parking brake applied, analogue instrument Airbags SRS

Main beam On The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash.
Left/right-hand direction indicator Both direction indicator symbols flash when the hazard warning flashers are used.

Seatbelt reminder Alternator not charging Fault in brake system

Eco function on The symbol illuminates when the Eco function is activated.
Start/Stop The symbol shines when the engine is autostopped.

Warning
A For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text; see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 346).
Low oil pressure If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the

03 Instruments and controls

engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Alternator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Parking brake applied

Fault in brake system

This symbol illuminates with a constant glow

when the parking brake is applied. The sym-

If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place

bol flashes during application, and then

and check the level in the brake fluid reser-

changes over to a constant glow.

voir; see Brake and clutch fluid - level (p.

A flashing symbol in any other situation

350).

means that a fault has arisen. Read the mes-

If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at

sage on the information display.

the same time, there may be a fault in the

WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. The loss of brake fluid must be investigated by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.

For more information, see Parking brake (p.

brake force distribution system.

Warning

293).

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off

The red warning symbol illuminates when a

Airbags SRS If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means a fault has been detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop to have the system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.

the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
· If both symbols extinguish, continue
driving.
· If the symbols remain illuminated,
check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 350). If the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are still illuminated, the car can be driven, with great care, to a workshop to have the brake system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the information display at the same time. The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the OK button; see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 100). The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols. Action: 1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car
further.

03 Instruments and controls

2. Read the information on the information display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display. Clear the message using the OK button.

Related information
· Combined instrument panel (p. 59) · Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 64)

Outside temperature gauge The display for the outside temperature gauge appears in the combined instrument panel.

Reminder doors not closed If one of the doors is not closed properly then

· Digital combined instrument panel - over-
view (p. 60)

the information or warning symbol illuminates

together with an explanatory image in the

information display. Stop the car in a safe

place as soon as possible and close the door

that is open.

If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 7 km/h then the information symbol illuminates.

If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 7 km/h then the warning symbol illuminates. If the bonnet10 is not closed properly then the warning symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the bonnet. If the tailgate is not closed properly then the information symbol illuminates together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the tailgate.

Display for outside temperature gauge, digital instrument panel Display for outside temperature gauge, analogue instrument panel When the temperature lies between +2 °C to -5 °C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the display. This warns of icy roads. If the car has been stationary then the gauge may show a reading that is too high.
Related information
· Combined instrument panel (p. 59)

10 Only cars with alarm*.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Trip meter The trip meter display appears in the combined instrument panel.

Clock The clock display appears in the combined instrument panel.

Volvo Sensus Volvo Sensus is the heart of your personal Volvo experience. It is Sensus that provides information, entertainment and functions to simplify your ownership.

Trip meter, digital instrument. Display for trip meter11
The two trip meters T1 and T2 are used for measuring short distances. The distance is shown in the display. Turn the left stalk switch thumbwheel to show the required meter. A long press (until the change occurs) on the left-hand stalk switch's RESET button resets the trip meter shown. For more information, see Trip computer - supplementary information (p. 112).
Related information
· Combined instrument panel (p. 59)

Clock, digital instrument panel. Display for showing the time12
Set the clock The clock can be adjusted in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 103).
Related information
· Combined instrument panel (p. 59)

11 Display appearance may differ depending on instrument variant.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

When you are sitting in your car you want control, and in today's interconnected world, this includes information, communication and entertainment when it is most suitable for you. Sensus covers all our solutions that enable connection* to the outside world, at the same time providing you with intuitive control over all the car's capabilities. Volvo Sensus combines and presents many functions in several of the car's systems on the centre console's display screen. With Volvo Sensus the car can be personalised by means of an intuitive user interface. Settings can be made in Car settings, Audio and media, Climate control, etc.

03 Instruments and controls

With the centre console buttons and controls or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad* functions can be activated or deactivated and many different settings can be made.

Overview

Related information
· Licenses (p. 422)

With a press on MY CAR all settings related to the driving and control of the car are presented, such as City Safety, locks and alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the clock, etc.

With a press on the respective function

RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, *, NAV* and CAM* other sources, systems and functions can be activated, e.g. AM, FM, CD, DVD*, TV*, Bluetooth*, navigation* and park assist camera*.
For more information about all functions/ systems, see the relevant section in the owner's manual or its supplement.

Centre console control panel. The figure is schematic - the number of functions and layout of the buttons both vary, depending on the equipment selected and the market.
Navigation* - NAV, see separate supplement.

Audio and media - RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, see separate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).

Car settings - MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 103).

Internet-connected car - *, see separate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).
Climate control system (p. 115).

Park assist camera (p. 244) CAM*.

12 The time is shown in the centre of an analogue instrument panel.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Key positions The remote control key can be used to set the vehicle's electrical system in different modes/ levels so that different functions are available; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 70).

the remote control key in the ignition switch. 2. Then press the remote control key in the lock up to its end position.
IMPORTANT

Foreign objects in the ignition switch can

impair the function or destroy the lock.

Do not press in the remote control key

incorrectly turned - hold the end with the

detachable key blade, see Detachable key

blade - detaching/attaching (p. 155).

Key positions - functions at different levels In order to enable the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off, the car's electrical system can be set in 3 different levels (key positions) - 0, I and II - with the remote control key. Throughout this owner's manual these levels are described using the denomination "key positions".
The following table shows the functions available in each key position/level.

Remove the remote control key Push the remote control key, allow it to eject, then pull it out from the ignition switch.

Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/inserted.
NOTE
For cars with the Keyless* function the remote control key does not need to be inserted into the ignition switch but can be stored in e.g. a pocket. For more information on Keyless functions, see Keyless drive* (p. 159).
Insert the remote control key 1. Hold the end of the remote control key
with the detachable key blade and insert

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Level Functions

· Odometer, clock and tem-

Choosing key position/level
· Key position 0 - Unlock the car - This
means that the car's electrical system is

Towing For important information about the remote control key during towing, see Towing (p.

perature gauge are illumi-

at level 0.

313).

nated.
· Power seats can be adjusted. · The audio system can be

· Key position I - With the remote control
key fully inserted into the ignition switch13 - Briefly press START/STOP ENGINE.

Related information
· Key positions (p. 70)

used for a limited time - see

the Sensus Infotainment sup-

NOTE

plement.

To reach level I or II without starting the

· Sunroof, power windows, 12V

socket in the passenger com-

partment, navigation, phone,

engine - do not depress the brake/clutch pedal when these key positions are due to be selected.

ventilation fan and windscreen wipers can be used.

· Key position II - With the remote control

II · The headlamps come on.

key fully inserted into the ignition switch13 - Give a long14 press on START/STOP

· Warning/indicator lamps illu-

ENGINE.

minate for 5 seconds.

· Back to key position 0 - To return to key

· Several other systems are
activated. However, heating in

position 0 from position II and I - Briefly press on START/STOP ENGINE.

seat cushions and the rear window can only be activated after the engine has been started. This key position consumes a

Audio system For information on audio system functions with remote control key removed, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

lot of current from the battery

Starting and stopping the engine

and should therefore be avoided!

For information about starting/stopping the engine, see Starting the engine (p. 264).

13 Not necessary for cars with the Keyless* function. 14 Approx. 2 seconds.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Seats, front The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort.
03

WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.
Lowering the front seat backrest*16

4. Push the seat forward so that the head restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is properly locked after being folded up in order to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

Lumbar support adjustment, turn the wheel15. Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after changing position. Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion, pump up/down. Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Control panel for power seat*.

Related information
· Seats, front - electrically operated (p.
73)
· Seats, rear (p. 74)
The passenger seat backrest can be folded forward to make room for long loads.
Move the seat as far back/down as possible. Adjust the backrest to an upright position. Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest and fold it forward.

15 Also applies to power seat. 16 The sport seat backrest cannot be folded.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Seats, front - electrically operated

Preparations

2. Hold the button depressed to store set-

The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort. The power seat can be moved forward/backward and up/down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be raised/lowered. The backrest angle can be changed.

The seats can be adjusted for a certain time after unlocking the door with the remote control key without the key in the ignition switch. Seat adjustment is normally made in key position I and can always be made when the engine is running.

tings while depressing one of the memory buttons.
Using a stored setting Hold one of the memory buttons depressed until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you release the button then the movement of the

Power seat*

Seat with memory function*

seat will stop.

Heated seats

For heated seats, see Heated front seats* (p.

122) and Heated rear seat* (p. 122).

Related information
· Seats, front (p. 72) · Seats, rear (p. 74)

Front edge of seat cushion up/down Seat forward/backward and up/down Backrest rake The power front seats have overload protection which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this happens, go to key position I or 0 and wait a short time before adjusting the seat again. Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) can be made at a time.

The memory function stores settings for the seat and the door mirrors. Store setting
Memory button Memory button Memory button Button for storing settings 1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Key memory* in remote control key17
All remote control keys can be used by different drivers to store the settings for the driver's seat and door mirrors18.

remote control key's memory (if the seat has been moved since you locked the car). The key memory can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).

Seats, rear The rear seat backrest and the outer seat head restraints can be folded. The centre seat head restraint can be adjusted to suit the height of the passenger.
Head restraint, centre seat, rear

Emergency stop

If the seat accidentally begins to move, press

one of the setting buttons for the seat or

memory buttons in order to stop the seat.

Restarting to reach the seat position stored in the key memory is performed by pressing the unlock button on the remote control key. The driver's door must then be open.

Proceed as follows in order to store the settings and use the key memory:
· Adjust the seat as you want it. · Lock the car by pressing the lock button
on the remote control key that you normally use. This stores the positions of the seat and door mirrors in the remote control key's memory19.
· Unlock the car (by pressing the unlock
button on the same remote control key) and open the driver's door. The driver's seat and door mirrors will automatically adopt the positions that are stored in the

WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Ensure that none of the rear seat passengers is in danger of becoming trapped.
Related information
· Remote control key - functions (p. 151)

Adjust the head restraint according to passenger height so that the whole of the back of the head is covered if possible. Slide it up as required. To lower the head restraint again, the button (located in the centre between the backrest and head restraint, see illustration) must be pressed in while the head restraint is pressed down carefully.

17 For key memory for Keyless function, see Keyless drive* - key memory (p. 162). 18 Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors. 19 This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Manual lowering of the outer head restraints, rear seat
Pull the locking handle closest to the head restraint to fold the head restraint forward. The head restraint is moved back manually until a "click" can be heard.
WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked position after being raised. Lowering the rear seat backrest
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down. The seat belts must not be connected either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery.

The triple-section backrest can be folded in different ways.

NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be folded forward fully.
· The left-hand section can be folded sepa-
rately.
· The centre section can be folded sepa-
rately.
· The right-hand section can only be folded
together with the centre section.
· If the entire backrest is to be folded then
the different sections should be folded separately.

03 If the centre backrest is being lowered release and adjust the head restraint for the centre backrest, see the earlier section "Head restraint, centre seat, rear".
The outer head restraints are lowered automatically when the outer backrests are lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking handle while folding the backrest forward at the same time. A red indicator on the lock catch shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place.

NOTE
When the backrests have been lowered the head restraints must be moved forward slightly so as not to make contact with the seat cushion.

Raising takes place in reverse order.

}} 75

03 Instruments and controls

|| NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.

WARNING

Check that the backrests and head

restraints in the rear seat are locked prop-

erly after being folded up.

Electrical lowering of the rear seat's outer head restraints*

WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are any passengers using of the outer seats.
Move the head restraint back manually until a click is heard.
WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked position after being raised.
Related information
· Seats, front (p. 72) · Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 73)

Steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted in different positions and has controls for horn and cruise control, as well as menu, audio and phone control.
Adjusting

G021138

1. The remote control key must be in key position II.
2. Press the button to lower the rear outer head restraints to improve rearward visibility.

Adjusting the steering wheel. Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Possible steering wheel positions The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and depth: 1. Pull the lever towards you to release the
steering wheel. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

3. Push back the lever to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever back.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before driving away.

Paddle for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox, see Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 273) Audio and phone control, see separate Sensus Infotainment supplement.
Horn

Heating* of the steering wheel The steering wheel can be heated with electric heating.
Function

With speed related power steering* the level of steering force can be adjusted, see Adjustable steering force* (p. 257).

Keypads* and paddles*

Keypads and paddles in the steering wheel. Cruise control* (p. 185)
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 188)

Horn. Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
Related information
· Heating* of the steering wheel (p. 77)

Button position may vary depending on equipment selected and market. Repeatedly press the button to switch between the following functions:

Function Switched off Heating

Indicator Button lamp extinguished Button lamp illuminated

Automatic steering wheel heating With activated automatic start of steering wheel heating, the heating of the steering wheel starts when the engine is started. Automatic start takes place when the car is cold and the ambient temperature is below

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

approx. 10 °C. Activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR (p. 103). 03

Light switches The headlamp control activates and adjusts the external lighting. It is also used to adjust the display, instrument and passenger compartment lighting.
Overview, light switches

Knob positions
NOTE
The same lamps are used for daytime running lights and position/parking lamps front. The brightness is higher when the lamps are used as daytime running lights.

Overview, light switches. Thumbwheel for adjusting display and instrument lighting as well as ambient lighting* Button for rear fog lamp
Knob for daytime running lights and parking lamps Thumbwheel20 for headlamp levelling

Position

Specification
Daytime running lightsA when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running. Main beam flash can be used. Daytime running lights, side marker lamps front and position/parking lamps/side marker lamps rear when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running. Automatic switching to position/parking lamps/side marker lamps when the car is parked. Main beam flash can be used.

20 Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Position

Specification
Daytime running lights, side marker lamps front and position/parking lamps/side marker lamps rear during the day when the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running. Automatic switching to dipped beam and position/parking lamps/side marker lamps in poor light conditions or when the windscreen wipers or rear fog lamps are activated. The tunnel detection (p. 81)* function is activated. The active high beam (p. 82)* function can be used. Main beam can be activated when dipped beam is switched on. Main beam flash can be used.

Position

Specification Dipped beam and position/ parking lamps/side marker lamps.

1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's electrical system in key position I.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/ lower beam alignment.

Main beam can be activated.

Main beam flash can be used.

A Fitted in or under the front bumper.

Volvo recommends that

mode is used

when the car is being driven, as long as traffic

situations or weather conditions are unfavour-

able for the active high beam function*.

Instrument lighting Different display and instrument lighting is switched on depending on key position; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 70).
The display lighting is automatically subdued in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the thumbwheel.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is adjusted with the thumbwheel.

Headlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical alignment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden.

Thumbwheel positions for different load cases. Only driver
Driver and passenger in the front passenger seat Occupants in all seats
Occupants in all seats and maximum load in the cargo area The driver and maximum load in the cargo area Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have automatic headlamp levelling and are therefore not equipped with the thumbwheel.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Position/parking lamps Position/parking lamps are switched on with the headlamp control's knob.

Related information
· Light switches (p. 78)

Knob for headlamp control in the position for position/parking lamps.

Turn the knob to the position for

(num-

ber plate lighting is switched on at the same

time).

If the car's electrical system is in key position II or the engine is running then the daytime running lights switch on instead of the front position/parking lamps.

When it is dark outside and the tailgate is opened the rear position/parking lamps illuminate to alert traffic behind. This takes place irrespective of what position the knob is in or what key position the car's electrical system is in.

Daytime running lights

With the knob for headlamp control in posi-

tion

and the car's electrical system in

key position II or the engine running, the day-

time running lights are activated automatically

in good light conditions.

Daytime running lights during the day. DRL

Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.
With the knob for headlamp control in position the daytime running lights (Daytime Running Lights - DRL) are activated automatically when the car is driven during the day. A light sensor on the top of the instrument panel changes from daytime running lights to dipped beam at twilight or when daylight becomes too weak. Switching to dipped beam also takes place if the windscreen wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.

03 Instruments and controls

WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain. The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with its lights in a correct state and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.

Tunnel detection* In markets without automatic dipped beam, tunnel detection activates dipped beam when driving into a tunnel. Dipped beam is deactivated approx. 20 seconds after the car has been driven out of the tunnel.

Main/dipped beam

With the knob for headlamp control in posi-

tion

and the car's electrical system in

key position II or the engine running, the

dipped beam is activated automatically in

poor light conditions.

The tunnel detection function is available in

With the knob for headlamp control in posi-

cars with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting

tion

dipped beam is always switched on

when the engine is running or when key posi-

from daytime running lights to dipped beam. Approx. 20 seconds after the car has left the

tion II is active.

tunnel, the lighting returns to daytime running

lights. If the car is driven into another tunnel

within this time period then dipped beam is

kept switched on. This avoids repeated

changes to the car's light settings.

Note that the headlamp control's knob must

remain in to work.

position for tunnel detection

Related information
· Main/dipped beam (p. 81) · Light switches (p. 78)

Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control. Position for main beam flash

Position for main beam

Dipped beam

With the knob in

position, dipped beam

is activated automatically at twilight or when

daylight becomes too weak. Dipped beam is

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

also activated automatically if the windscreen Related information

Active high beam*

wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.

· Active Xenon headlamps* (p. 84)

The Active High Beam function detects the

With the knob in position

dipped beam

is always switched on when the engine is run-

ning or when key position II is active.

Main beam flash Move the stalk switch gently towards the

· Active high beam* (p. 82) · Light switches (p. 78) · Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern
(p. 90)
· Tunnel detection* (p. 81)

headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and switches the lighting from main beam to dipped beam. Xenon headlamps only dim the portion of the light beam that points directly to the vehicle. The lighting returns to main beam when the

steering wheel to the position for main beam

incoming light has stopped.

flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released.

Active high beam - AHB Active high beam (Active High Beam - AHB) is

Main beam

Main beam can be activated when the knob

is in position

21 or

. Activate/deac-

tivate main beam by moving the stalk switch

towards the steering wheel to the end posi-

tion and then releasing. Alternatively, the

main beam can be deactivated by a light

a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and then switches from main beam to dipped beam. The function can also take streetlights into account.

press of the stalk switch toward the steering

Car with halogen headlamps

wheel.

The lighting returns to main beam about a

When main beam has been activated the

second after the camera sensor no longer

symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel.

detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.

Auxiliary lamps*
If the car has auxiliary lamps, the driver can use the MY CAR menu system to choose whether they should be deactivated or switched on/off simultaneously with the main beam22, see MY CAR (p. 103).

Car with Xenon headlamps Unlike what happens during conventional dimming, the light beam continues with main beam on both sides of oncoming traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the light

21 When dipped beam is switched on. 22 Auxiliary lamps must be connected to the electrical system by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

beam that points directly to the vehicle is dimmed.

Dipped beam directly toward oncoming vehicles, but continued main beam on both sides of the vehicle. The lighting returns to full main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.

Activating/deactivating

AHB can be activated when the headlamp

control's knob is in position

(provided

that the function has not been deactivated in

the menu system MY CAR), see MY CAR (p.

103).

Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in AUTO position. The function can start while driving in the dark when the car's speed is 20 km/h or higher. Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the lefthand stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and then releasing. Deactivation when main beam is on means that the lights are reset directly to dipped beam. Car with analogue combined instrument panel

When AHB is activated the

symbol illu-

minates in the instrument's information dis-

play.

When main beam is switched on the symbol also illuminates in the combined instrument panel. This also applies for Xenon headlamps if the main beam is partially

dimmed, i.e. as soon as the light beam shines with slightly more than dipped beam. Car with digital combined instrument panel

When AHB is activated the

symbol

turns white in the instrument's information

display.

When main beam is activated, the symbol

shines blue. This also applies for Xenon head-

lamps if the main beam is partially dimmed,

i.e. as soon as the light beam shines with

slightly more than dipped beam.

Manual operation

NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and dirt. Do not stick or attach anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the camera to stop working.

If the message Active main beam Temporary unavailable Switch manually is

shown in the combined instrument panel's

information display then you have to switch

manually between main and dipped beam.

However, the knob for headlamp control can

still remain in position

. The same

applies if the message Windscreen sensors

}} 83

03 Instruments and controls

blocked See manual and the

symbol

are shown. The

symbol goes out when

these messages are shown.

AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When

AHB becomes available again, or the wind-

screen sensors are no longer blocked, the

message extinguishes and the illuminates.

symbol

WARNING
AHB is an aid for using optimum light composition when conditions are favourable. The driver always bears responsibility for manually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather conditions so require.

IMPORTANT
Examples of when manual switching between main and dipped beam may be required:
· In heavy rain or dense fog · In freezing rain · In snow flurries or slush · In moonlight · When driving in poorly lit built-up
areas
· When the traffic ahead has weak light-
ing
· If there are pedestrians on or beside
the road
· If there are highly reflective objects
such as signs in the vicinity of the road
· When the lighting from oncoming traf-
fic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
· When there is traffic on connecting
roads
· On the brow of a hill or in a hollow · In sharp bends.

Active Xenon headlamps* Active Xenon headlamps are designed to provide maximum illumination in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety. Active Xenon headlamps ABL
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively. If the car is equipped with active Xenon headlamps (Active Bending Lights ABL) the light from the headlamps follows the steering wheel movement in order to provide maximum lighting in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety.

For more information on the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 220). Related information
· Main/dipped beam (p. 81) · Light switches (p. 78)

The function is activated automatically when the car is started (provided that it has not been deactivated in the menu system MY CAR), see MY CAR (p. 103). In the event

of a fault in the function the

symbol illu-

minates in the combined instrument panel at

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

the same time as the information display

The function is activated when main beam or

Rear fog lamp

shows an explanatory text and a further illuminated symbol.

dipped beam is used and the car's speed is lower than approx. 30 km/h.

When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog lamp can be used so that other road users

Symbol Display Specification

In addition, both cornering lights are switched on as a supplement to the reversing lamp

shall notice vehicles in front at an early stage.

Headlamp The system is

during reversing.

system

disengaged. Visit

Related information

malfunction Service required

a workshop if the message remains. Volvo recommends

· Main/dipped beam (p. 81) · Active high beam* (p. 82) · Light switches (p. 78)

that you contact

an authorised

Volvo workshop.

The function is only active in twilight or darkness and only when the car is moving. The function23 can be deactivated/activated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 103). For headlamp pattern adjustment, see Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern (p. 90).
Cornering lights Active Xenon headlamps are equipped with cornering lights that temporarily illuminate the area diagonally in front of the car in the direction the steering wheel is turned in a sharp bend, or in the direction for which the direction indicators are used.

Button for rear fog lamp.

The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when key position II is active or the engine is running and the headlamp control's knob is in

position

Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog

lamp's indicator symbol

in the com-

bined instrument panel and the light in the button both illuminate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when the engine is switched off or when

23 Activated on delivery from the factory.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

the headlamp control's knob is turned to

position

NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary from country to country.

Related information
· Light switches (p. 78)

Brake lights The brake light automatically comes on during braking.
The brake light is switched on when the brake pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched on when one of driving support systems Adaptive cruise control (p. 188), City Safety (p. 205) or Collision warning system (p. 212) brakes the car. For information on emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers, see Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 291).

Hazard warning flashers The hazard warning flashers warn other road users by means of all of the car's direction indicator lamps flashing simultaneously when this function is activated.
When the hazard warning flashers are activated both direction indicator symbols flash in the combined instrument panel.

Button for hazard warning flashers. Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in the combined instrument panel flash when the hazard warning flashers are used. The hazard warning flashers are activated automatically when the car has been braked so suddenly that the emergency brake lights have been activated at a speed below 10 km/h. The hazard warning flashers remain on when the car has stopped and are deactivated automatically when the car is driven off
86

03 Instruments and controls

again or the button is depressed. For more information on emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers, see Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 291). Related information
· Direction indicators (p. 87)

Direction indicators The car's direction indicators are operated with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator lamps flash three times or continuously, depending on how far up or down the stalk switch is moved.

The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually, or automatically by the steering wheel movement.

Direction indicator symbols For direction indicator symbols, see Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols (p. 64).

Related information

· Hazard warning flashers (p. 86)

Direction indicators. Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release. The direction indicator lamps flash three times. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 103). Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the outer position.
87

03 Instruments and controls

Interior lighting The passenger compartment lighting is activated/deactivated with the buttons in the controls above the front seats and the rear seat.

Front roof lighting The front reading lamps are switched on or off by pressing the relevant button in the roof console.

Lighting in the cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and off respectively when the tailgate is opened or closed.

Rear roof lighting

Automatic lighting

The switch for passenger compartment light-

ing has three positions for the lighting in the

passenger compartment:

· Off right-hand side pressed in, auto-

matic lighting deactivated.

· Neutral position automatic lighting
activated.

· On left-hand side pressed in, passenger
compartment lighting switched on.

G021149 G021150

Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Interior lighting
All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually within 30 minutes from when:
· the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0
· the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.

Rear roof lighting. The lamps are switched on or off by pressing each respective button.
Courtesy lighting Courtesy lighting (and passenger compartment lighting) is switched on and off respectively when a side door is opened or closed.
Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror lighting The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 140) is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed.

Neutral position When the button is in neutral position the passenger compartment lighting is switched on and off automatically in accordance with the following.
The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
· the car is unlocked with the remote con-
trol key or key blade, see Remote control key - functions (p. 151) or Detachable key blade - unlocking doors (p. 156)
· the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0.

03 Instruments and controls

Passenger compartment lighting is switched

Home safe light duration

Approach light duration

off when:

Home safe lighting consists of dipped beam,

Approach light duration consists of parking

· the engine is started · the car is locked.
The passenger compartment lighting comes

parking lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate lighting, interior roof lighting as well as courtesy lighting.

lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate lighting, interior roof lighting as well as courtesy lighting.

on and remains on for two minutes if one of

Some of the exterior lighting can be kept

Approach lighting is switched on with the

the doors is open.

switched on to work as home safe lighting

remote control key, see Remote control key -

If any lighting is switched on manually and the car is locked then it will be switched off

after the car has been locked. 1. Remove the remote control key from the

functions (p. 151), and is used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.

automatically after two minutes.

ignition switch.

When the function is activated with the

Mood lights When the normal passenger compartment lighting is switched off and the engine is running, a number of LEDs illuminate, including one in the ceiling lighting, in order to provide a low-light and enhance the mood while driv-

2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to the end position and release it. The function can be activated in the same way as with main beam flash; see Main/dipped beam (p. 81).
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

remote control, the parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on. The length of time for which the approach lighting should be kept on can be set in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 103).

ing. This lighting goes out for a little while after the normal passenger compartment lighting when the car is locked. The brightness is controlled using the thumbwheel on the headlamp control (p. 78).

When the function is activated, dipped beam, parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on.

Related information
· Home safe light duration (p. 89)

The length of time for which the home safe

lighting should be kept on can be set in the

menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 103).

Related information
· Approach light duration (p. 89)

03 Instruments and controls

Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern If the car is equipped with active Xenon headlamps and has the Active High Beam function then the headlamp pattern must be reset when changing from right to left-hand traffic, and vice versa.

Wipers and washing Wipers and washers clean the windscreen and rear window. The headlamps are cleaned with high-pressure washing.
Windscreen wipers24

Intermittent wiping Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when intermittent wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping The wipers sweep at normal speed.

Active Xenon headlamps* No headlamp pattern adjustment is required

The wipers sweep at high speed.

for cars with the function Active High Beam*.

The headlamp pattern is designed in such a way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.

IMPORTANT

Headlamp pattern adjustment is required for cars with Active High Beam. The car must be stationary with the engine running when the headlamp pattern is shifted between right and

Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen is scraped away.

left-hand traffic. The headlamp pattern is changed in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 103).
Halogen headlamps No headlamp pattern adjustment needs to be made. The headlamp pattern is designed in such a way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers. Rain sensor, on/off
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Windscreen wipers off Move the stalk switch to position 0 to switch off the windscreen wipers.

IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.
Service position wiper blade For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades

Single sweep Raise the stalk switch and release to

and replacement of wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 359) and Car washing (p. 379).

make one sweep.

Rain sensor*

The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-

screen wipers based on how much water it

24 For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 359). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 361).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumbwheel.

When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in the button illuminates and the rain sensor

symbol

is shown in the combined

instrument panel.

Activating and setting the sensitivity When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or the remote control key in position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep.

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but-

ton

. The windscreen wipers make one

sweep.

Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make an extra sweep.

Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward.)

Deactivate

Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the

button

or move the stalk switch down

to another wiper program.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the remote control key is removed from

the ignition switch or five minutes after the engine has been switched off.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Switch off the rain sensor while the car is in motion or when the remote control key is in position I or II. The symbol in the combined instrument panel and the lamp in the button go out.
Washing the headlamps and windows

Heated washer nozzles* The washer nozzles are heated automatically in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid freezing solid.

High-pressure headlamp washing*

High-pressure headlamp washing consumes

a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid,

the headlamps are washed automatically at

every fifth windscreen wash cycle.

Reduced washing If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in the reservoir and the message that you should fill the washer fluid is shown in the combined instrument panel, then the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility through it.

Washing function.

Washing the windscreen Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers.
The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps and the headlamps are washed once the stalk switch has been released.
}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

|| Wiping and washing the rear window

Wiper reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window wiping25. The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged.
If the rear window wiper is already on at continuous speed, no change is made.

Power windows All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver's door - the control panels for the other doors operate their respective power window.

NOTE

On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is activated during reversing if the sensor is activated and it is raining.

Rear window wiper intermittent wiping Rear window wiper continuous speed Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow in the illustration above) to initiate rear window washing and wiping.

Related information
· Washer fluid - filling (p. 361) · Washer fluid - quality and volume (p.
401)

NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with overheating protection which means that the motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear window wiper works again after a cooling period (30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat in the motor and the outside temperature).

Driver's door control panel. Switch for electric child safety locks* and disengaging rear power window buttons; see Child safety locks - electrical activation* (p. 170). Rear window controls
Front window controls

25 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

WARNING
Check that no rear seat passengers are trapped when the windows are closed from the driver's door.
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers are not trapped if the windows are closed, even when the remote control key is used.
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by selecting key position 0 and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. For information on key positions - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 70).

Operating
Operating the power windows. Operating without auto Operating with auto
All power windows can be operated using the control panel for the driver's door - the control panels for the other doors can only each operate their respective power window. Only one control panel can be operated at a time. In order for the power windows to be used, the key position must be at least I - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 70). The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the engine has been switched off and after the remote control key has been removed - although not after a door has been opened. Closing of the windows is stopped and the window is opened if anything prevents its

movement. It is possible to override the pinch protection when closing has been interrupted, e.g. if there is ice forming. After two successive closing interruptions the pinch protection will be forced and the automatic function deactivated for a short while, now it is possible to close by continually holding the button pulled up.

NOTE

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.

Operating without auto Move one of the controls up/down gently. The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position.
Operating with auto Move one of the controls up/down to the end position and release it. The window runs automatically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key and central locking To remotely operate the power windows from the outside with the remote control key or from inside with central locking, see Remote control key with key blade (p. 149) and Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 165).

}} 93

03 Instruments and controls

|| Resetting If the battery is disconnected then the function for automatic opening must be reset so that it can work correctly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button to raise the window to its end position and hold it there for one second.

Door mirrors The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door controls.
Door mirrors

2. Release the button briefly.

3. Raise the front section of the button again

for one second.

WARNING
A reset must take place for pinch protection to work.

Door mirror controls.

WARNING
The mirror on the driver's side is the wideangle type to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear further away than they actually are.
Storing the position26 The mirror positions are stored in the key memory when the car has been locked with the remote control key. When the car is unlocked with the same remote control key the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions when the driver's door is opened. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 103).

Adjusting 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be illuminated.

Angling the door mirror when parking26 The door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when parking for example.
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror automatically returns to its original position after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the button labelled L or R respectively.

26 Only in combination with power seat with memory; see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 73).
94

03 Instruments and controls

Automatic angling of the door mirror

3. Repeat the above procedure as neces-

Related information

when parking26

sary.

· Rearview mirror - interior (p. 96)

When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is automatically angled down so that the driver can see the side of the road when

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position. Automatic dimming*

· Windows and rearview and door mirrors -
heating (p. 96)

parking for example. When reverse gear is

For the door mirrors to be fitted with this

disengaged the mirror automatically returns

function requires that the interior rearview

to its original position after a short time.

mirror also has automatic dimming, see Rear-

The function can be activated/deactivated in

view mirror - interior (p. 96).

the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 103).

Retractable power door mirrors* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driv-

Automatic retraction when locking26

ing in narrow spaces:

When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are auto-

1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously (key position must be at least I).

matically retracted/extended.

2. Release them after

The function can be activated/deactivated in

approximately 1 second. The mirrors

the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p.

automatically stop in the fully retracted

103).

position.

Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting/ extending to work correctly:
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
2. Fold them out again with the L and R buttons.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended position.
Home safe and approach lighting The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates when approach lighting (p. 89) or home safe lighting (p. 89) is selected.

26 Only in combination with power seat with memory; see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 73).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Windows and rearview and door mirrors - heating

See also Demisting and defrosting the windscreen (p. 125).

Rearview mirror - interior The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed

The defroster is used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen, rear window and door mirrors.

The door mirrors and rear window are demisted/defrosted automatically if the car is started in an outside temperature lower than

with a control in the mirror's lower edge. Alternatively, the rearview mirror dims automatically.

Heated windscreen*, rear window and door mirrors

+7 °C. Automatic defrosting can be selected in the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 103).

Interior rearview mirror

Heating, windscreen Heating, rear window and door mirrors The function is used to remove ice and misting from the windscreen, rear window and door mirrors. One press of the respective button starts the heating. The light in the button indicates that the function is active. Switch off the heating as soon as the ice/misting is cleared in order not to load the battery unnecessarily. However, the function is switched off automatically after a certain time.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Control for dimming
Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dimming with the dimming control when lights from behind are distracting: 1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment. 2. Return to normal position by moving the
control towards the windscreen.

03 Instruments and controls

Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control for manual dimming is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming. The rearview mirror contains two sensors one forward facing and one rearward facing that work together to identify and eliminate dazzling light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind.
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in the seats or in the cargo area in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sensors, then the dimming function of the interior rearview and door mirrors is reduced.
The compass (p. 97) can only be specified for a rearview mirror with automatic dimming. Related information
· Door mirrors (p. 94)

Compass* The rearview mirror contains an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing. Operation
Rearview mirror with compass. The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing. Eight different directions are shown with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

side of the mirror using a paper clip for example.

Calibration The compass may need calibrating to show the correct compass direction.

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.

The compass should be calibrated if the car

is moved across several magnetic zones.

Proceed as follows to perform calibration:

1. Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high-voltage power lines.

2. Start the car and switch off all electrical equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and ensure that all doors are closed.

NOTE
Calibration may fail or not start at all if electrical equipment is not switched off.

3. Hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed approx. 3 seconds. The number of the current magnetic zone is shown.

The compass is activated automatically when the car is started or when key position II is active, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 70). To deactivate/activate the compass - press in the button on the under-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the character C is shown in the display when the heated windscreen is activated, perform the calibration in accordance with point 6 above with the heated windscreen activated, see Demisting and defrosting the windscreen (p. 125).

Sunroof* The sunroof can be operated with a control in the roof panel. The sunroof's inner sunscreen is closed manually. The sunroof has a wind deflector.

8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.

Magnetic zones. 4. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (115) is shown. See the map of magnetic zones for the compass. 5. Wait until the display returns to showing the character C, or hold the button on the bottom of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 6 seconds (use e.g. a paper clip) until the character C is shown. 6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km/h until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating that calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.

G030295 G017823

The sunroof controls are located in the roof panel. The sunroof can be opened vertically at the rear edge and horizontally. Key position I or II is required for the sunroof to be opened. Horizontal opening
Horizontal opening, backward/forward. Opening, automatic

Opening, manual

Closing, manual

Closing, automatic

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Opening For maximum sunroof opening, move the control back to the position for automatic opening and release. Open manually by pulling the control backwards to the point of resistance for manual opening. The sunroof moves to maximum open position as long as the button is kept depressed. Closing Close manually by pushing the control forwards to the point of resistance for manual closing. The sunroof moves to closed position as long as the button is kept depressed.
WARNING
Risk of crushing when the sunroof is closed. The sunroof's pinch-protection function only operates during automatic closing, not manual.
Close automatically by pressing the control to the position for automatic closing and then release it. The power supply to the sunroof is switched off by selecting key position 0 and removing the remote control key from the ignition switch.

WARNING
If there are children in the car: Remember to always switch off the power supply to the sunroof by selecting key position 0 and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. For information on key positions - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 70). Vertical opening
Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge. Open by pressing the rear edge of the control upward. Close by pulling the rear edge of the control down.

G028900 G021345

Closing using the remote control key or central locking button
03
One long press on the lock button closes the sunroof and all the windows, see Remote control key - functions (p. 151) and Locking/ unlocking - from the inside (p. 165). The doors and the tailgate are locked. To interrupt closing, press the lock button again.
WARNING
If the sunroof is closed with the remote control key, check that no one risks being trapped. Sunscreen The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back automatically when the sunroof is opened. Grip the handle and slide the screen forward to close it.
}} 99

03 Instruments and controls

|| Pinch protection The sunroof's pinch protection function is triggered if it is blocked by an object during automatic closing. If blocked, the sunroof will stop and automatically open to the previous position.
Wind deflector

Menu navigation - combined instrument panel The left-hand stalk controls the menus (p. 101) shown on the information display in the combined instrument panel (p. 59). Which menus are shown depends on the key position (p. 70).

The sunroof has a wind deflector that is folded up when the sunroof is in the open position.

Display (analogue combined instrument panel) and controls for menu navigation.

Display (digital combined instrument panel) and controls for menu navigation.
OK access to message list and message confirmation. Thumbwheel browse between menu options. RESET reset the active function. Used in certain cases to select/activate a function, see the explanation under each respective function. If there is a message (p. 101) then it must be acknowledged with OK in order that the menus shall be shown.
Related information
· Messages - handling (p. 102)

100

03 Instruments and controls

Menu overview - combined instrument panel Which menus are shown in the combined instrument panel's information display depends on the key position (p. 70). Some of the following menu options require the function and hardware to be installed in the car. Analogue combined instrument panel Digital speed Parking heater* Additional heater* TC options Service status Oil level27 Messages (##)28
Digital combined instrument panel Settings* Themes Contrast mode/Colour mode Service status Messages28 Oil level27
27 Certain engines. 28 The number of messages is indicated in brackets.

Parking heater*

Messages

Trip computer reset Related information
· Analogue combined instrument panel -
overview (p. 59)

When a warning, information or indicator symbol illuminates, a corresponding message appears on the information display.

Message

Specification

· Digital combined instrument panel - over-

Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the

view (p. 60)
· Menu navigation - combined instrument

engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a work-

panel (p. 100)

shopB.

Stop engineA

Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a workshopB.

Service urgentA

Contact a workshopB to check the car immediately.

Service requiredA

Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.

See manualA Read the owner's manual.

Book time for maintenance

Time to book regular service - contact a workshopB.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101

03 Instruments and controls

|| Message

Specification

Time for reg- Time for regular service -

ular mainte- contact a workshopB. The

nance

timing is determined by

the number of kilometres

driven, number of months

since the last service,

engine running time and oil grade.

Maintenance overdue

If the service intervals are not followed then the warranty does not cover any damaged parts contact a workshopB.

Transmission Oil change needed

Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.

Transmission Reduced performance

The gearbox cannot handle full capacity. Drive carefully until the message clearsC.
If shown repeatedly contact a workshopB.

Transmission hot Reduce speed

Drive more smoothly or stop the car in a safe manner. Disengage the gear and run the engine at idling speed until the message clearsC.

Message

Specification

Transmission hot Stop safely Wait for cooling

Critical fault. Stop the car immediately in a safe manner and contact a workshopB.

Temporarily offA

A function has been temporarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again.

Low battery charge Power save mode

The audio system is switched off to save energy. Charge the battery.

A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.
B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. C For more information regarding the automatic gearbox, see
Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 273).
Related information
· Messages - handling (p. 102) · Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 100)

Messages - handling Use the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge and browse among messages (p. 101) that are shown in the information display of the combined instrument panel. When a warning, information or indicator symbol illuminates, a corresponding message appears in the display at the same time. An error message is stored in a memory list until the fault has been rectified. Press OK on the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge a message. Scroll through messages with the thumbwheel (p. 100).
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read (press OK) before the previous activity can be resumed.
Related information
· Menu overview - combined instrument
panel (p. 101)

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

MY CAR MY CAR is a menu source that handles many of the car's functions, e.g. City Safety, locks and alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the clock, etc.
Certain functions are standard, others are optional - the range also varies depending on the market.
Operation Navigation in the menus is carried out using buttons in the centre console or with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.

03 Instruments and controls

lighted menu option or store the selected function in the memory. TUNE - turn the knob in the centre console or the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to scroll up/down through the menu options. EXIT

EXIT functions

Depending on the function the cursor is on

when EXIT is pressed, and on the menu level,

one of the following may occur:

· phone call is rejected · current function is interrupted · input characters are deleted · most recent selections are undone · leads up in the menu system.
Short and long press may produce varying results.

A long press leads to the highest menu level (main source view), from where all of the car's functions/menu sources can be accessed.

MY CAR - opens the menu system MY CAR. OK/MENU - press the button in the centre console or the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to select/tick in the high-

Menu options and search paths For a description of the menu options and search paths in MY CAR, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement.

103

03 Instruments and controls

Trip computer

Group menus

The car's trip computer can record, calculate and show information while driving.

The trip computer has two different group menus:

Trip computer content and appearance varies depending on whether the combined instru-

· Functions · Heading in combined instrument panel

ment panel is the "Analog" type or "Digital":

The trip computer's functions or headings

· Trip computer - combined instrument

are each listed in an infinite loop.

panel "Analogue" (p. 105)
· Trip computer - combined instrument
panel "Digital" (p. 109)
Checking and settings can be made immedi-

Related information
· Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 113) · Trip computer - supplementary informa-
tion (p. 112)

ately after the combined instrument panel is

automatically illuminated in connection with

unlocking. If none of the trip computer's con-

trols are actuated within approx. 30 seconds

after the driver's door has been opened then

the instrument extinguishes, after which

either key position II (p. 70) or engine starting

is required in order to operate the trip com-

puter.

NOTE
If a warning message appears when the trip computer is used then the message must first be acknowledged before the trip computer can be reactivated.
· Acknowledge the message by briefly
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Trip computer - combined instrument Functions

panel "Analog"

Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust

The car's trip computer can record, calculate

functions:

and show information while driving.

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle

The trip computer's menu is in a variable loop. One of the alternatives is that the trip

of a sequence - "Reset" them first with 2 presses on RESET.

computer's display extinguishes - this also

2. Press OK - loop with all functions opens.

marks the start/end of the loop.

3. Browse through the functions with the

thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.

4. Finish by pressing RESET twice after completed checking/ adjustment.

The different functions of the trip computer are listed in the following table:

Information display and controls. OK - Opens the loop with the trip computer's functions + Activates the selected option. Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the trip computer's headings + Scrolls through the options. RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of a function after making a selection.
}} 105

03 Instruments and controls

|| Functions

Information

Digital speed
· km/h · mph · No display

Shows the car's speed digitally in the centre of the combined instrument panel:
· Open with OK, select with the thumbwheel, confirm with OK and back out with ENTER.

Parking heater*

· DIRECT START

For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer (p. 130).

· - Timer 1 - leads to the menu for select-
ing time.

· - Timer 2 - leads to the menu for select-
ing time.

Additional heater*
· Auto On · Off

For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 134).

TC options
· Distance to empty tank · Fuel consumption · Average speed · Trip meter T1 and total dist. · Trip meter T2 and total dist.

Here you can select/activate the options that you want to be available as selectable headings in the trip computer. The symbols for the items already selected are WHITE with a "tick" - others are GREY and have no "tick":
1. Open the function with OK, scroll through the symbols for the options with the thumbwheel and select/stop on the desired symbol.
2. Confirm with OK - the symbol changes colour from GREY to WHITE and is marked with a "tick".
3. Continue to select the function symbols with the thumbwheel or finish with RESET.

Service status

Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.

106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Functions Oil levelA

Information For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 346).

Messages (##)

For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 102).

A Certain engines.

Headings One of the headings in the following table can

2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable headings for the trip computer are shown in a

be selected for constant display in the com-

loop.

bined instrument panel. Proceed as follows to determine which:

3. Stop on desired heading.

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - "Reset" them first with 2 presses on RESET.

Trip computer heading in combined instrument panel Trip meter T1 and total dist. Trip meter T2 and total dist. Distance to empty Fuel consumption Average speed No trip computer information.

Information
· Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1. · Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
For more information - see the section "Range - distance to empty tank" (p. 112). Current consumption.
· Long press on RESET resets Average speed.
This option shows a blank display - it also marks the beginning/end of the loop.

The combined instrument panel's trip computer can be changed to another option at

any time during the journey. Proceed as follows:

Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the desired heading.

}}

107

03 Instruments and controls
|| Related information
· Trip computer - supplementary informa-
tion (p. 112)
· Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 113)
03
108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Trip computer - combined instrument Functions

panel "Digital"

Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust

The car's trip computer can record, calculate

functions:

and show information while driving.

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle

The trip computer's menu is in a variable loop. One of the alternatives is that the trip

of a sequence - "Reset" them first with 2 presses on RESET.

computer's three displays extinguish - this

2. Press OK - loop with all functions opens.

also marks the start/end of the loop.

3. Browse through the functions with the

thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.

4. Finish by pressing RESET twice after completed checking/ adjustment.

The different functions of the trip computer are listed in the following table:

Information displays and stalk switch controls. OK - Opens the loop with the trip computer's functions + Activates the selected option. Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the trip computer's headings + Scrolls through the options. RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of a function after making a selection.
}} 109

03 Instruments and controls

|| Functions
Trip computer reset
· Average · Average speed
Messages

Information Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2 - see the table under the next section "Headings" or the section "Resetting with 'Digital'" (p. 112) for information on the process.
For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 102).

Themes

The appearance of the combined instrument panel (p. 59) is selected here.

Settings* Contrast mode/Colour mode

Select Auto On or Off. For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 134). Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.

Parking heater*
· Direct start · - Symbol Timer 1 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
· - Symbol Timer 2 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
Service status

For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer (p. 130). Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.

Oil levelA

For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 346).

A Certain engines.
Headings Three trip computer headings can be displayed simultaneously - one in each "window" (see previous figure).

One of the heading combinations in the following table can be selected for constant dis-

play in the combined instrument panel. Proceed as follows to determine which:

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

1. To ensure that no control is in the middle of a sequence - "Reset" them first with 2 presses on RESET.

2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable heading combinations are shown in a loop.

3. Stop on desired heading combination.

Heading combinations

Information

Average

Trip meter T1 + Meter reading

Average speed

· Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.

Instantaneous Trip meter T2 + Meter reading Distance to empty · Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.

tank

Instantaneous

Meter reading

kmh<>mph

kmh<>mph - see section "Digital speed display" (p. 112).

No trip computer information.

This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays - it also marks the beginning/end of the loop.

The combined instrument panel's heading combination for the trip computer can be changed to another option at any time during the journey. Proceed as follows: Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the
desired heading.
Related information
· Trip computer - supplementary informa-
tion (p. 112)
· Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 113)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111

03 Instruments and controls

Trip computer - supplementary information The car's trip computer can record, calculate and show information while driving. Supplementary information of several functions follows below.

Range - distance to empty tank The trip computer shows the approximate distance that can be driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the tank.
No guaranteed range remains when the heading Distance to empty shows "----".

Resetting with "Analog" With current trip computer heading - Trip meter T1, Trip meter T2 or Average speed shown in the combined instrument panel:
Give a long press on RESET - selected heading is zeroed.

Average

In which case, refuel as soon as possible. Each heading must be zeroed individually.

Average fuel consumption is calculated from the last resetting.

NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if

The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km and the remaining driveable fuel quantity.
NOTE

Resetting with "Digital" Trip meter:
1. Turn with the thumbwheel to the heading combination containing the trip meter to

a fuel-driven heater* has been used.

There may be a slight error in the reading if

be reset.

Average speed The average speed is calculated for the driving distance driven since the last reset to zero.
Instantaneous The information for current fuel consumption is updated continuously - approximately once per second. When the car is driven at low speed the consumption is shown per time unit - at a higher speed it is shown related to mileage.
Different units (km/miles) can be selected for

the driving style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance. For more information on how fuel consumption can be influenced, see Volvo Car Corporation 's Environmental Philosophy (p. 19). Digital speed display29 The speed is shown in the opposite unit (kmh/mph) in relation to the main instrument. If it is calibrated in mph then the trip computer shows the corresponding speed in km/h and vice versa.

2. Give a long press on RESET - selected trip meter is zeroed.
Average speed & Average consumption: 1. Select function Trip computer reset and
activate with OK. 2. Select one of the following options with
the thumbwheel and activate with OK:
· l/100 km · km/h · Reset both
3. Finish with RESET.

the display - see the section "Change unit" (p.

112).

29 Only for combined instrument panel "Digital".
112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

03 Instruments and controls

Change unit You can change unit (km/miles) for distance and speed in the menu system My Car, see MY CAR (p. 103).
NOTE
In addition to in the trip computer, these units are also changed in Volvo's navigation system*.
Related information
· Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 113)

Trip computer - trip statistics* Information is stored about completed trips containing average fuel consumption and average speed, which can be viewed in the centre console's screen as a bar chart.
Function

Operation Different settings can be made in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103)

· Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete
all previous statistics, go back out of the menu by selecting EXIT.

· Reset for every driving cycle - check

the box by selecting ENTER and go back

out of the menu by selecting EXIT.

With the "Reset for every driving cycle" option checked, all statistics are deleted automatically once driving is complete and the car has been stopped for 4 hours. Trip statistics start again from zero the next time the engine is started.

Trip statistics30. Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven distance, depending on the scale selected the bar at the far right shows the value for the current kilometre or 10 km. Using the TUNE control, the scale for the bars can be changed between 1 km and 10 km - the cursor on the far right changes position between up and down in relation to the scale selected.

If a new driving cycle is started before 4 hours have elapsed then the current period must first be deleted manually using the "Start new trip" option. See also information on Eco guide (p. 63). Related information
· Trip computer - supplementary informa-
tion (p. 112)

30 The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 113

CLIMATE CONTROL

04 Climate control

General information on climate control

temporary increase in temperature in the passenger compartment.

· Air distribution in the passenger compart-
ment (p. 119)

The car is equipped with electronic climate control (p. 121). The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment.

· Remove misting on the insides of the win-
dows primarily by using the defroster function (p. 125). To reduce the risk of misting, keep the windows clean and use window cleaner.

· Air cleaning (p. 116)

NOTE

Cars with Start/Stop*

Air conditioning (AC) (p. 124) can be

With an auto-stopped (p. 279) engine certain

switched off, but to ensure the best possible climate comfort in the passenger compartment, and to prevent the windows from misting, it should always be switched

equipment may have its function temporarily reduced, e.g. climate control fan speed (p. 123).

on.

Cars with ECO*

To bear in mind
· To ensure that the air conditioning works
optimally, the side windows and sunroof* should be closed.

Certain equipment may have its function temporarily reduced or deactivated when the ECO (p. 288) function is activated, e.g. the air conditioning (p. 124).

· Total airing function (p. 166) opens/
closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather.
· Remove ice and snow from the climate
control system air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the windscreen).
· In warm weather, condensation from the
air conditioning may drip under the car. This is normal.
· When the engine requires full power, e.g.
for full acceleration or driving uphill with a

trailer, the air conditioning can be temporarily switched off. There may then be a

· Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 121)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115

04 Climate control

Actual temperature

Sensors - climate control

Air cleaning

The temperature you select in the passenger

The climate control system has a number of

The interior in a passenger compartment is

compartment corresponds to the physical

sensors to help control the temperature (p.

designed to be pleasant and comfortable,

experience with reference to factors such as

116) in the car.

even for people with contact allergies and for

air speed, humidity and solar radiation etc. in and around the car.

· The sun sensor is located on the top side
of the dashboard.

asthma sufferers.
· Passenger compartment filter (p. 117)

The system includes a sun sensor (p. 116) which detects on which side the sun is shin-

· The temperature sensor for the passen-
ger compartment is located below the cli-

· Material in the passenger compart-
ment (p. 118)

ing into the passenger compartment. This

means that the temperature can differ

between the right and left-hand air vents

despite the controls being set for the same

temperature on both sides.

mate control panel.
· The outside temperature sensor is
located in the door mirror.
· The humidity sensor* is located by the
interior rearview mirror.

· Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) (p.
117)*
· Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) (p.
118)*

Related information
· General information on climate control (p.
115)
· Temperature control in the passenger

NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.

Related information
· General information on climate control (p.
115)

compartment (p. 124)

Related information
· General information on climate control (p.
115)

116 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Climate control

Air cleaning - passenger compartment filter

Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*

For more information on CZIP, see the brochure included with the purchase of the car.

All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter. The filter must be replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for

CZIP comprises a series of modifications that keep the passenger compartment even clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing substances.

Related information
· General information on climate control (p.
115)
· Air cleaning (p. 116)

the recommended replacement intervals. If

The following is included:

the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often.

· An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is opened with the remote control key. The fan fills the

NOTE

passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is

There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.

disengaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened.

· The air quality system IAQS (p. 118) is a

Related information
· Air cleaning (p. 116)

fully automatic system that cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocar-

bons, nitrous oxides and ground-level

ozone.

NOTE
To keep the CZIP standard in cars with CZIP the IAQS filter must be changed after 15 000 km or once per year depending on whichever occurs first. However, up to 75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without CZIP and where the customer does not want to keep the CZIP standard the IAQS filter must be changed at a regular service.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117

04 Climate control

Air cleaning - IAQS*

Air cleaning - material

Menu settings - climate control

The air quality system IAQS separates gases

Tested materials have been developed in

It is possible to activate/deactivate or change

and particles to reduce the levels of odours

order to minimise the quantity of dust in the

the default settings for six of the climate con-

and pollution in the passenger compartment.

passenger compartment and to contribute to

trol system's functions via the centre console.

If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated.

making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean.

· Fan level during automatic climate control
(p. 123).

It is possible to activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).

The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo to clean the interior (p. 381).

NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be ena-

Related information
· Air cleaning (p. 116)

bled to ensure the best air in the passen-

ger compartment.

In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as to prevent misting.

· Recirculation timer (p. 126). · Automatic start of rear window defroster
(p. 96).
· Interior air quality system (p. 118)*. · Automatic start of seat heating driver (p.
122).
· Automatic start of steering wheel heating
(p. 77).
More information is available in the description of the menu system (p. 103).

In the event of misting, the air quality sensor should be disengaged, and the defroster functions for the windscreen and side windows, as well as the rear window,

The climate control system's functions can be reset to default settings in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).

should be used.

Related information

Related information
· General information on climate control (p.

· General information on climate control (p.
115)

115)

· Air cleaning (p. 116)

· Air cleaning - Clean Zone Interior Pack-
age (CZIP)* (p. 117)

118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Air distribution in the passenger compartment The incoming air is divided between a number of different vents in the passenger compartment.

Air vents in the dashboard

04 Climate control
Air vents in the door pillars

Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode. If necessary it can be controlled manually; see the air distribution table (p. 127).

Open Closed Lateral airflow Vertical airflow Aim the outer vents at the side windows to remove misting.

Closed

Open

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the vents at the windows to remove misting in cold weather. Aim the vents into the passenger compartment to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear seat in hot weather.

NOTE
Remember that small children may be sensitive to air flows and draughts.

}} 119

04 Climate control
|| Air distribution

The selected air distribution is shown in the cen-

Air distribution - defroster windscreen

tre console display screen.

Air distribution - air vent instrument panel

Related information
· General information on climate control (p.

Air distribution - ventilation floor The figure consists of three buttons. When pressing the buttons the corresponding figure

115)
· Auto-regulation (p. 123) · Air distribution - recirculation (p. 126)

is illuminated in the display screen (see fol-

lowing figure) and an arrow in front of each

part of the figure shows the air distribution

that is selected. For more information, see the

air distribution table (p. 127).

120

04 Climate control

Electronic climate control - ECC ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains the temperature selected in the passenger

compartment and can be set separately for the driver's side and passenger side.

The auto function is used to automatically control temperature, air conditioning, fan speed, recirculation and air distribution.

Temperature control (p. 124), left-hand side Electrically heated front seat (p. 122), left side Max. defroster (p. 125) Fan (p. 123) Air distribution (p. 119) - ventilation floor Air distribution - air vent instrument panel Air distribution - defroster windscreen Rear window and door mirror defrosters (p. 96)

Electrically heated front seat (p. 122), right side Temperature control (p. 124), right-hand side Recirculation (p. 126)
AUTO - Automatic climate control (p. 123) AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 124)

04
121

04 Climate control

Heated front seats* The front seat heating has three positions for increasing the comfort for driver and passenger when it is cold.

· Lowest heat level - one orange field illu-
minates in the screen.
· Switch off the heat - no field illuminates.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.

Heated rear seat* The heating for the rear seat's1 outer positions has three positions for increasing the comfort for passengers when it is cold.

Automatic start of driver's seat heating With the automatic start of the driver's seat

heating activated, the driver's seat will have

the highest heat level when the engine is

Current heat level is shown in the centre console display screen.

started. Automatic start takes place when the car is

Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's lamps.

cold and the ambient temperature is lower than approx. +7 °C.

Press the button repeatedly in order to activate the function:

Press the button repeatedly in order to activate the function:
· Highest heat level - three orange fields
illuminate in the centre console's screen (see figure above).

It is possible to activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
Related information
· General information on climate control (p.
115)
· Heated rear seat* (p. 122)

· Highest heat level - three lamps illumi-
nate.
· Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate. · Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates. · Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.

· Lower heat level - two orange fields illu-
minate in the screen.

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Climate control

WARNING

Fan

Auto-regulation

Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating

The fan should always be activated in order to avoid misting on the windows.
NOTE

The auto function automatically regulates temperature (p. 124), air conditioning (p. 124), fan speed (p. 123), recirculation (p. 126) and air distribution (p. 119).

the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.
Related information
· General information on climate control (p.
115)
· Heated front seats* (p. 122)

If the fan is fully switched off then the air conditioning is not engaged - which can cause a risk of misting on the windows.

Fan knob

Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed. If AUTO

If you select one or more manual functions, the other functions continue to be controlled automatically. All manual settings are disengaged when AUTO is pressed. The display screen

is selected, then the fan

shows AUTO CLIMATE.

speed is regulated automatically (p. 123) - the fan speed previously set is disengaged.

Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).

Related information
· General information on climate control (p.
115)
· Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 121)

Related information
· General information on climate control (p.
115)

1 Heated rear seat is not specified with the option for integrated two-stage booster seat (p. 44).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123

04 Climate control

Temperature control in the passenger Related information

Air conditioning

compartment When the car is started, the most recent tem-

· General information on climate control (p.
115)

The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies incoming air as required.

perature setting is resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.

· Actual temperature (p. 116) · Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 121)

When the lamp in the AC button illuminates, the air conditioning is controlled by the system's automatic function.

When the lamp in the AC

button is switched off the air conditioning is

disconnected. Other functions are still con-

trolled automatically. When the max. defroster function (p. 125) is activated, the air

conditioning is switched on automatically so

that the air is dehumidified at the maximum

setting.

Current temperature for each side is shown in the centre console's display screen.
The temperature can be adjusted with the knob separately for the driver's side and the passenger side.

124

04 Climate control

Demisting and defrosting the windscreen Heated windscreen* and max. defroster are used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side windows.

For cars without heated windscreen:
· Air flows to the windows - symbol (2) illu-
minates in the screen.
· Switch off the function - no symbol illumi-
nates.

NOTE
Electrically heated windscreen is not available when the engine is auto-stopped (p. 279).

For cars with heated windscreen:

The following also takes place in order to pro-

· Start the heating for the windscreen2 -
symbol (1) illuminates in the screen.
· Start the heating for the windscreen2 and
air flow to the windows - symbols (1) and (2) illuminate in the screen.

vide maximum dehumidification in the passenger compartment:
· the air conditioning is automatically
engaged
· recirculation and the air quality system

· Switch off the function - no symbol illumi-

are automatically disengaged.

nates.

NOTE

The selected setting is shown in the centre console's screen.
Electric heating*

NOTE
Heated windscreen and IR window (p. 17) may have an impact on the performance of transponders and other communication equipment.

The noise level increases as the fan is operating at max. When the defroster is switched off the climate control returns to the previous settings.

Max. defroster The light in the defroster button illuminates when the function is active. Press the button repeatedly in order to activate the function.

NOTE
A triangular area at the end of each side of the windscreen is not electrically heated, where de-icing may take longer.

Related information
· General information on climate control (p.
115)

2 If the character C is shown in the rearview mirror when the heated windscreen is activated then the compass (p. 97)* must be recalibrated.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125

04 Climate control

Air distribution - recirculation Select recirculation to shut out bad air, exhaust gases etc. from the passenger compartment, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when this function is activated.
When recirculation is engaged the orange lamp in the button illuminates.

Related information
· General information on climate control (p.
115)
· Air distribution in the passenger compart-
ment (p. 119)
· Air distribution - table (p. 127)

IMPORTANT

If the air in the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.

Timer With the timer function activated the system will exit manually activated recirculation mode according to a time that depends on the outside temperature. This reduces the risk of ice, misting and bad air. It is possible to activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
NOTE
When max. defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.

126

04 Climate control

Air distribution - table Three buttons are used to select the distribution (p. 119) of the air.
Air distribution Air to windows. Some air flows from the air vents. The air is not recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged.

Use to remove ice and misting quickly.

Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some air flows from the air vents.

to prevent misting and icing in a cold and humid climate, (not at too low fan speed to enable this).

Airflow to the windows and from the dashboard air vents.

to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.

Airflow to the head and chest from dashboard air vents.

to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.

}} 127

04 Climate control

Air distribution

Use

Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dashboard air to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in

vents.

cold or humid weather.

Air to floor and from dashboard air vents.

in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.

Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows.

to direct heat or cold to the floor.

Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor.

to provide cooler air along the floor or warmer air higher up in cold weather or hot, dry weather.

Related information
· General information on climate control (p.
115)
· Air distribution - recirculation (p. 126)
128

04 Climate control

Engine and passenger compartment heater* Preconditioning prepares the car's heater,

Refuelling

appears on the information display. Acknowledge the message by pressing the indicator stalk (p. 100) OK button once.

engine and passenger compartment before departure so that both wear and energy

IMPORTANT

needs during the journey are reduced. The heater can be started directly (p. 130) or with a timer (p. 130).

Repeated use of the heater combined with short journeys leads to the battery discharging and consequential starting problems.

The heater cannot start if the outside temperature exceeds 15 °C. At 5 °C or lower the maximum running time of the heater is 50 minutes.
WARNING
Do not use the fuel-driven heater indoors. Exhaust gases are secreted.
NOTE
When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from the righthand wheel housing, which is perfectly normal.

Warning label on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater before starting to refuel. Check in the combined instrument panel that the heater is switched off. The heat symbol is shown when it is operating.
Parking on a hill

The car should be driven for the same time

as the heater is used to ensure that the

car's battery is recharged adequately to

replace the energy consumed by the

heater when it is used on a regular basis.

The heater is used for a maximum of 50

minutes each time.

Related information
· Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - messages (p. 132)
· Additional heater* (p. 134)

If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of

the car should point downhill to ensure that

there is a supply of fuel to the fuel-driven

heater.

Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel level is too low, the heater will be switched off automatically and a message

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129

04 Climate control

Engine block heater and passenger

6. Briefly press OK to move to the flashing

compartment heater* - direct start/

compartment heater* - timer

minutes setting.

immediate stop

The timer of the engine block and passenger

7. Select the required minute using the

Upon direct start of the engine block and pas- compartment heater (p. 129) is connected to

thumbwheel.

senger compartment heater (p. 129), it will run for 50 minutes. Heating of the passenger compartment will begin as soon as the engine coolant has

the car's clock. Two different times can be selected using the timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car is heated and ready. The car's electronic

8. Press OK4 to confirm the setting. 9. Go back in the menu structure using
RESET.

reached the correct temperature.

system calculates when heating should be

10. Select the other time (continue from step

NOTE

started based on the outside temperature.

2) or exit the menu with RESET.

The car can be started and driven while

the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is running.

1. Press OK to access the menu.

NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the car's clock is reset.

Starting 1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK.
3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct start/Stop in order to activate/deactivate the heater and select with OK.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
Related information
· Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - timer (p. 130)

Adjusting3 1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Use the thumbwheel (p. 100) to scroll to one of the timers Parking heater and select with OK.
3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
4. Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours setting.

3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and activate with OK.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
Switching off A timer-started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed. Proceed as follows: 1. Press OK to access the menu.

· Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - messages (p. 132)

5. Select the required hour using the thumbwheel.

3 Setting the timer is only possible with the engine switched off. 4 Press OK again to activate the timer.
130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking heater and select with OK. > If a timer is set but not activated then a clock icon is shown beside the set time.
3. Select one of the two timers using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
4. Deactivate the timer as follows:
· long press on OK or · short press on OK to continue in the
menu. Then select to stop the timer and confirm with OK. 5. Exit the menu with RESET. A timer-started heater can be switched off directly (p. 130).
Related information
· Engine block heater and passenger com-
partment heater* - messages (p. 132)

04 Climate control
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131

04 Climate control

Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages Symbols and display messages regarding the engine block and passenger compartment heater (p. 129) differ depending on whether the combined instrument panel (p. 59) is analogue or digital.
When the heater has been activated the heat symbol illuminates in the information display.

When one of the timers has been activated, the symbol for activated timer illuminates in the display at the same time as the set time is shown next to the symbol.
Symbol for activated timer in analogue combined instrument panel.

Symbol for activated timer in digital combined instrument panel. The table shows symbols and display texts that appear.

Symbol Display

Specification The heater is switched on and running.

Fuel operated heater stopped Battery saving mode

The heater has been stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine.

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

04 Climate control

Symbol Display Fuel operated heater stopped Low fuel level

Specification Starting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low - this is in order to facilitate starting the engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.

Fuel operated heater Service required

Heater not working. Contact a workshop for repair. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

A display text clears automatically after a time or after one press on the indicator stalk (p.

100) OK button.

133

04 Climate control

Additional heater*

Fuel-driven additional heater*

3. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional

In cold climate zones5 an additional heater may be required to obtain the correct operating temperature in the engine and to obtain sufficient heating in the passenger compartment. A fuel-driven additional heater (p. 134) is fitted in cars with diesel engines.

The car is equipped with either an electric (p. 135) or a fuel-driven additional heater (p. 134). The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running. The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off.

heater7 or Settings8 and select with OK. 4. Select one of the options ON or OFF
using the thumbwheel and confirm with OK. 5. Exit the menu with RESET.
NOTE

In a semi-cold5 climate zone diesel-driven cars have an electric additional heater (p. 135) instead of a fuel-driven version.

Cars with certain petrol engines6 have an

electric additional heater integrated into the

car's climate control system.

Related information
· Engine and passenger compartment
heater* (p. 129)

NOTE
When the additional heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel housing, which is perfectly normal.
Auto mode or shutdown The additional heater's automatic start sequence can be switched off if required.

The menu options are only visible in key position I - any adjustments must therefore be made before starting the engine.
Passenger compartment heater* If the additional heater is supplemented with a timer function then it can be used as a passenger compartment heater (p. 129).

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the fuel-driven additional heater should be switched off for short distances.

1. Before starting the engine: Select key position I (p. 70).
2. Press OK to access the menu.

5 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned. 6 An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned. 7 Analogue combined instrument panel. 8 Digital combined instrument panel.
134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Electric additional heater* The car is equipped with either a fuel-driven (p. 134) or an electric additional heater (p. 134).
The heater cannot be controlled manually, but is instead activated automatically after the engine has been started in outside temperatures below 14 °C and is switched off after the set passenger compartment temperature has been reached.
Related information
· Engine and passenger compartment
heater* (p. 129)

04 Climate control
04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 135

LOADING AND STORAGE

Storage spaces Overview of storage spaces in the passenger compartment.

05 Loading and storage
05
}} 137

05 Loading and storage

|| Storage compartment in door panel
Storage pocket* on front edge of front seat cushions Ticket clip
Glovebox (p. 140)
Storage compartment
Jacket holder (p. 139)
Storage compartment, cup holder (p. 139) Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat
Storage pocket

WARNING

Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision.

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

05 Loading and storage

Jacket holder The coat hanger is located on the left-hand side of the passenger seat's head restraint.
The jacket holder is only designed for light clothing.
Related information
· Storage spaces (p. 137)

Tunnel console The tunnel console is located between the front seats.

Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and ashtray* A detachable ashtray is fitted in the cup holder under the armrest. The cigarette lighter is fitted in the 12 V socket (p. 141) for the front seat.

The ashtray in the tunnel console (p. 139) is detached by lifting the tray straight up. Activate the lighter by pushing in the button. The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils.

Related information
· Storage spaces (p. 137)

Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and

USB*/AUX input under the armrest.

Includes cup holder for driver and passenger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter (p. 139) are specified, then there is a cigarette lighter in the 12 V socket (p. 141) for the front seat, and a detachable ashtray in the cup holder.)

Related information
· Storage spaces (p. 137)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139

05 Loading and storage

Glovebox The glovebox is located on the passenger side.

Inlay mats* Inlay mats collect e.g. rubbish and slush. Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay mats.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the bosses in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
Related information
· Cleaning the interior (p. 381)

The owner's manual and maps can be kept in

here for example. There are also holders for

pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox

can be locked (p. 167)* using the key blade

(p. 155).

Related information
· Storage spaces (p. 137)

Vanity mirror The vanity mirror is located on the rear of the sun visor.
Vanity mirror with lighting. The light illuminates automatically when the cover is lifted. Related information
· Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 358)

140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

05 Loading and storage

Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets
The electrical sockets (12 V) are located next to the cup holder1 and rear of the tunnel console.

The electrical socket can be used for various accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. display screens, music players and mobile phones. For the socket to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least key position I (p. 70).
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.

IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is used at a time. If both sockets in the tunnel console are used simultaneously, 7.5 A (90 W) per socket is applicable. If the compressor for emergency puncture repair is connected to one of the two sockets, no other current consumer must be connected to the other one.

12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.

NOTE

The compressor for emergency puncture

Optional equipment and accessories - e.g. display screens, music players and mobile

repair (p. 333) has been tested and approved by Volvo.

phones - which are connected to one of

the passenger compartment's 12V electrical sockets, could be activated by the climate control system, even when the remote control key has been removed or

Related information
· Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and
ashtray* (p. 139)

when the car is locked, for example, when

· 12 V electrical socket - cargo area* (p.

the parking heater is activated at a preset

144)

time.

For this reason remove the plugs from the electrical sockets for optional equipment or accessories when not in use because the battery could be drained in the event of such an occurrence!

12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
1 If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is no cup holder and adjacent 12 V socket.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141

05 Loading and storage

Loading Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.

· Secure all loads to the load retaining eye-
lets with straps or web lashings.

· Loading - long load (p. 143) · Roof load (p. 143)

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more detailed information on weights, see Weights (p. 390).

WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.

The tailgate is opened via a button

on the lighting panel or the remote control key, see Locking/unlocking -

WARNING

tailgate (p. 167).

The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compro-

WARNING
The car's driving properties change

mised or eliminated by high loads.
· Never load cargo above the backrest.

depending on the weight and positioning

of the load.

WARNING

To bear in mind when loading
· Position the load firmly against the rear

Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants.

seat's backrest.

Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with

Note that objects must not prevent the func-

something soft.

tion of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the rear seat's backrests is folded down, seeWHIPS - seating position (p. 35).

Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long items. Otherwise you may accidentally

· Centre the load. · Heavy objects should be placed as low

knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position - and the car could then move off.

as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on

lowered backrests.
· Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.

Related information
· Load retaining eyelets (p. 143) · Safety net* (p. 145)

142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

05 Loading and storage

Loading - long load

Roof load

Load retaining eyelets

To simplify loading (p. 142) in the cargo area, the rear seat backrest can be folded down. The passenger seat backrest can also be folded for an extra long load2.
Lowering the rear seat backrest To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear seat backrest can be folded down, see Seats, rear (p. 74).

The load carriers recommended for roof loads are the ones developed by Volvo. This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety during a journey.
Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers.
· Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.

The folding load retaining eyelets are used to fasten straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area.

· Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.

· The size of the area exposed to the wind,

and therefore fuel consumption, increase

with the size of the load.
· Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,

WARNING

heavy braking and hard cornering.

Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which

protrude may cause injury under violent

WARNING

braking.

The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads. For

Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

information about the maximum allowable

load on the roof, including load carriers

Related information

and any space box, Weights (p. 390).

· Loading (p. 142)

Related information
· Loading (p. 142)

2 Only applies to comfort seats.

143

05 Loading and storage

Loading - bag holder The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place and prevents them from overturning and spreading their contents across the cargo area.

12 V electrical socket - cargo area* The electrical socket can be used for various accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. display screens, music players and mobile phones.

NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo. For information on the use of Volvo's recommended temporary emergency puncture repair (TMK), Emergency puncture repair (p. 333).
Related information
· Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 141)

05 Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor. 1. Fold up the holder, which is part of the floor hatch. 2. Fasten the bags with strap and secure the carrying handle in the hooks.
Related information
· Loading (p. 142)

Lower the cover to access the electrical socket.
· The socket also provides voltage when
the remote control key is not in the ignition switch.
IMPORTANT
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W).
NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket with the engine switched off involves the risk of discharging the car's battery.

144 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Safety net* A safety net prevents loads from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking.

05 Loading and storage
Using the safety net

The two-part safety net cassette is secured on the rear of the backrest. The narrowest cassette is secured on the left-hand side (seen from the tailgate).

Pull the net up from the cassettes. The net is self-locking after about 1 minute if the rear seat's backrests are raised.

Storage space, safety net cassettes. A rollable safety net comprising two cassettes

1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward, see Seats, rear (p. 74).

Pull up the right-hand section of the net

using its strap.

has a storage space under the cargo area floor hatch.

2. Align the cassette's anchor rails in front of the backrest attachment lugs .

Insert the rod in the mounting on the right-hand side and then press it forward

Securing the net cassettes

3. Slide the cassette into the attachment

the rod locks in with a click.

A rollable safety net comprising two cassettes has a storage space under the cargo area floor hatch.

lugs .
4. Fold back and lock the backrests.
· Removing the cassette takes place in
reverse order.

Pull out the rod's telescope section and click it in on the other side. Pull up the left-hand safety net and hook it into the rod.
· Folding up takes place in reverse order.

The net can also be used when the rear seat's backrests are folded forward.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

}} 145

05 Loading and storage

|| Removing the net cassettes 1. Roll the safety nets into the cassettes in
accordance with the procedure in the section entitled "Using the safety net", but in reverse.
2. Fold the whole backrest forward.
3. Slide the cassettes out until they loosen from the anchor rails.
Store the cassettes in their compartment under the cargo area floor hatch.

WARNING

Loads in the luggage compartment must be anchored well, and also using a correctly fitted safety net.

Related information

· Loading (p. 142)

· Safety grille (p. 146)

Safety net* combined with cargo cover A safety net prevents loads from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking.

Safety grille A safety grille prevents loads or pets from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking.

Puller-straps for raising the net. The safety net can also be raised from the rear seat when the cargo cover is extended. Follow the procedure described in the section "Using the safety net" (p. 145). The straps for folding up are located by the arrows.
Related information
· Safety net* (p. 145) · Loading (p. 142) · Load retaining eyelets (p. 143)

Folding up Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and pull back/up.
IMPORTANT
The protective grille cannot be folded up or down when a cargo cover is fitted.
Fitting/removal The safety grille is normally permanently installed in the car because it can easily be folded up in the roof and so be out of the way if a longer cargo area is required. However, if

146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

05 Loading and storage

desired, the safety grille can be dismantled

Cargo cover

Press both sides in. A "click" should be

and removed from the car.

audible and the red marking should dis-

For information about the tools required and methods for fitting/removal, see the installation instructions3 that were included with the

appear. > Check that both end pieces are
locked.

initial purchase.

Removing the cargo cover

For safety reasons, the safety grille must

1. Press in one end piece button and lift it

always be correctly fastened and secured

out.

when being refitted.

2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the

Related information

other end piece loosens automatically.

· Safety net* (p. 145) · Loading (p. 142)

Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing disc

· Load retaining eyelets (p. 143)

Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it into the recesses at the cargo area's rear posts.

In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the cargo area when it is fitted.

Pull the sealing disc back gently, free

IMPORTANT

from its support shelves, and lower.

The protective grille cannot be folded up or down when the cargo cover is fitted.
Attaching the cargo cover Move one end piece of the cover into the recess on the side panel.

Related information
· Loading (p. 142) · Loading - long load (p. 143)

Move the other end piece into the corresponding recess.

3 Installation instructions no. 30756681.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147

LOCKS AND ALARM

06 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade

Remote control key - losing

Key memory*

The remote control key is used to start the car and for locking and unlocking. It contains a detachable key blade (p. 155) made of metal. The visible section is available in two versions so that it is possible to distinguish between the remote control keys. The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys or PCCs* (Personal Car Communicator). Additional remote control keys can be ordered - up to 6 can be programmed and used for the same car.
WARNING
If there are children in the car: Remember to switch off the supply to the power windows and sunroof by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.

If you lose a remote control key then a new one can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining remote control keys must be taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the missing remote control key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure. The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103). Related information
· Remote control key - functions (p. 151)

The key memory in the remote control key (p. 149) means that certain settings in the car can be individually adapted for different people.
The key memory function is available in combination with power seat and power rearview and door mirrors. Settings for door mirrors, driver's seat and steering force can be saved in the key memory.
Key memory door mirrors and driver's seat The settings are automatically connected to each respective remote control key, see Key memory* in remote control key (p. 74) and Adjustable steering force* (p. 257). After locking with the remote control key the setting of the combined instrument panel's theme is also saved in the key, see MY CAR (p. 103).

Remote control key with PCC (p. 153) has increased functionality compared with the remote control key, see PCC* - unique functions (p. 153).

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description

of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).

For cars with the Keyless drive function, see Keyless drive* (p. 159).

Related information
· Remote control key - functions (p. 151)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149

06 Locks and alarm

Indication locking/unlocking adjusting When the car is locked or unlocked using the remote control key (p. 149) the direction indicators confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly performed.
· Locking - one flash and the door mirrors
are folded1 in.
· Unlocking - two flashes and the door mir-
rors are folded1 out. After locking the indication is only given if all locks are activated once the doors have been closed.

Lock indicator A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that the car is locked.

Immobiliser The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection system that prevents an unauthorised person from starting the car.
Each remote control key (p. 149) has a unique code. The car can only be started with the correct remote control key with the correct code. The following error messages in the combined instrument panel's information display are related to the electronic immobiliser:

Selecting the function Different options for indicating locking/ unlocking with light can be set in the car's menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).

Related information

· Keyless drive* (p. 159)

· Lock indicator (p. 150)

· Alarm indicator (p. 172)

Same LED as alarm indicator (p. 172).
NOTE
Cars that are not equipped with alarm also have this indicator.
Related information
· Indication locking/unlocking - adjusting
(p. 150)

1 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 Locks and alarm

Message Insert car key
Car key not found

Specification
Error when reading the remote control key during starting - Remove the key from the ignition switch, press it in again and make a new start attempt. Error reading the remote control key during starting - Try to start again. If the error persists: Insert the remote control key into the

Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system makes it possible to track and locate the car, and to remotely activate the immobiliser to switch off the engine.
Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more information and assistance with activating the system.
Related information
· Remote control key with key blade (p.
149)
· Immobiliser (p. 150)

Remote control key - functions The remote control key has functions such as locking and unlocking the doors.

ignition switch and try to start again.

Remote control key, standard version.

Immobi- Error in immobiliser system

Locking

liser Try during starting. If the error

Unlocking

start again

persists: Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo work-

Approach light duration

shop is recommended.

Tailgate

For starting the car, see Starting the engine (p. 264).

Panic function

Related information
· Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system (p. 151)

151

06 Locks and alarm

A long press also opens all windows simultaneously (see also Total airing function (p. 166)).

Related information
· Remote control key with key blade (p.
149)

The function can be changed from unlocking

· PCC* - unique functions (p. 153)

all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driver's door only with one press of the button and, after a further press of the button -

· Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.
164)

within 10 seconds - unlocking the remaining

doors.

The function can be changed in the menu

system MY CAR. For a description of the

Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car

menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).

Communicator. Information

Approach light duration Used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance. For

Function buttons

more information, see Approach light duration (p. 89).

Locking Locks the doors and tailgate while the alarm is activated.

Tailgate (p. 167) - Unlocks and disarms the alarm for the tailgate only.

A long press also closes all windows and

sunroof* simultaneously (see also Total airing

Panic function Used to attract atten-

function (p. 166)).

tion in an emergency.

WARNING
If the sunroof and windows are closed using the remote control key, check that nobody's hands are trapped.
Unlocking Unlocks the doors and tailgate while the alarm is deactivated.

Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn. The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after approx. 3 minutes.

152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 Locks and alarm

Remote control key - range

PCC* - unique functions

Using the information button

Remote control key (p. 149) functions have a

Remote control key with PCC has extended

Press the information button .

range of about 20 metres from the car. If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.

functionality compared with remote control key without PCC (p. 149) in the form of an information button and indicator lamps.

> All indicator lamps flash for approximately 7 seconds and the light travels around on the PCC. This indicates that information from the car has been

NOTE

read.

The remote control key functions may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc.

If any of the other buttons are pressed during this time then the reading is interrupted.

The car can always be locked/unlocked with the key blade, Detachable key blade -

NOTE

unlocking doors (p. 156).

If none of the indicator lamps illumi-

If the remote control key is removed from the car when the engine is running or key position (p. 70) I or II is active, and if all doors are closed, then a warning message is shown in the information display in the combined

Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car Communicator.

nates with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after 7 seconds and after the light has travelled around on the PCC), contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

instrument panel and an audio reminder sig-

Information button

nal sounds at the same time. The message is extinguished and the audible

Indicator lamps

Indicator lamps display information in accordance with the following illustration:

reminder signal stops when the remote control key is brought back to the car after

Using the information button enables access to certain information from the car via the

either/or:

indicator lamps.

· The remote control key has been inserted
into the ignition switch.

· Speed exceeds 30 km/h. · the OK button has been pressed.

Related information
· Remote control key - functions (p. 151)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153

06 Locks and alarm

PCC* - range

Related information

The PCC's range for locking, unlocking and

· Keyless drive* - PCC range (p. 159)

tailgate is approx. 20 m from the car - for other functions up to approx. 100 m.

· Remote control key - range (p. 153)

If the car does not verify a button being pressed - move closer and try again.

NOTE

The information button function may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc.

Green continuous light the car is locked.

Out of PCC range

Yellow continuous light the car is unlocked. Red continuous light the alarm has been triggered since the car was locked.

If the PCC is too far away from the car for the information to be read then the status the car was last left in is shown, without the light travelling around on the PCC.

Red light flashing alternately in both indi-

If several PCCs are used for the car then it is

cator lamps The alarm was triggered

only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking

less than 5 minutes ago.

that shows correct status.

Related information
· PCC* - range (p. 154)

NOTE
If no indicator lamps illuminate when the information button is used within range then this may be because the last communication between the PCC and the car was disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions etc.

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 Locks and alarm

Detachable key blade A remote control key (p. 149) contains a detachable key blade of metal with which some functions can be activated and some operations carried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades.
Key blade functions Using the remote control key's detachable key blade:
· the left-hand front door can be opened
manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, see Detachable key blade - unlocking doors (p. 156).
· the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated/deactivated (p. 169).
· the right-hand front door and the rear
doors can be locked manually (p. 165), e.g. in the event of power failure.
· access to the glovebox and cargo area
(privacy locking (p. 156)*) can be blocked.
· the airbag for front passenger seat
(PACOS*) can be activated/deactivated (p. 30).

Related information
· Remote control key - functions (p. 151) · Remote control key with key blade (p.
149)

Detachable key blade - detaching/ attaching Detaching/attaching the detachable key blade (p. 155) is carried out as follows:
Removing the key blade

Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.

At the same time pull the key blade

straight out backwards.

Attaching the key blade

Carefully refit the key blade into its location in

the remote control key (p. 149).

1. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.

2. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 155

06 Locks and alarm
|| Related information
· Detachable key blade - unlocking doors
(p. 156)
· Child safety locks - manual activation (p.
169)
· Passenger airbag - activating/deactivat-
ing* (p. 30)
06

Detachable key blade - unlocking doors The detachable key blade (p. 155) can be used if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key (p. 149), e.g. if the key's battery has run out. If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are discharged - then the left-hand front door can be opened as follows: 1. Unlock the left-hand front door with the
key blade in the door handle's lock cylinder. For illustration and more information, see Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key blade (p. 162).
NOTE
When the door has been unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered.
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch.
For cars with the Keyless system, see Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key blade (p. 162). Related information
· Remote control key with key blade (p.
149)
· Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
battery (p. 158)

Privacy locking* Privacy locking is intended for when the car is left for service, with a hotel parking valet or similar. The glovebox is then locked and the tailgate lock is disconnected from the central locking - the tailgate cannot be opened with either the central locking button in the front doors or the remote control key (p. 149).
Active locks for remote control key with key blade.

G017869

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Activate/deactivate

06 Locks and alarm
NOTE
Do not reinsert the key blade into the remote control key, but keep it in a safe place instead.
· Deactivation takes place in reverse order.
For information on locking the glovebox only, see Locking/unlocking - glovebox (p. 167).

G017870

Active locks for remote control key, without key blade and privacy locking activated.

Activating privacy locking.

This means that the remote control key without key blade can only be used to activate/ deactivate the alarm (p. 171), to open the doors and to drive the car.

To activate privacy locking: Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cylinder.

The remote control key without key blade can then be handed over to the service or hotel staff - the loose key blade is retained by the

Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise. The keyhole is vertical in the locked position for privacy locking.

car owner.

Pull out the key blade. The combined

instrument panel's information display

NOTE

shows a message at the same time.

Do not forget to pull out the cargo cover (p. 147)) over the cargo area before closing the tailgate.

The glovebox is then locked and the tailgate can no longer be unlocked with the remote control key or the central locking button.

157

06 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/PCC - replacing the battery The batteries for the remote control key/PCC can be replaced. The batteries for the remote control key/PCC should be replaced if: · the information symbol in the combined
instrument panel illuminates and the display shows Low battery in remote control. Please change batteries. and/or
· the locks repeatedly do not react to sig-
nals from the remote control key within 20 metres from the car.
06

Opening Slide the spring-loaded catch to the
side.
At the same time pull the key blade straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the hole behind the spring-loaded catch and gently prize the remote control key up.

NOTE
Turn the remote control key over with the buttons facing up, this is to avoid the batteries falling out when it is opened.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their contact surfaces with your fingers as this may impair their function.
Battery replacement Closely study how the battery/batteries are secured on the inside of the cover, with regard to their (+) and () sides.
Remove control key (1 battery) 1. Carefully prize out the battery. 2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.
PCC* (2 batteries) 1. Carefully prize out the batteries. 2. First install one new one with the (+) side
up. 3. Position the white plastic tab in between
and finally install a second new battery with the (+) side down.
Battery type Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V - one in the remote control key and two in the PCC.

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 Locks and alarm

NOTE

Keyless drive*

Keyless drive* - PCC range

Volvo recommends that the batteries to be used in the remote control key/PCC fulfil UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III,

Keyless drive, only with PCC (p. 153)2 means that the car's lock and starting systems can be operated keylessly.

In order to open a door or the tailgate, a PCC must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres from the car door handle or tailgate.

sub-section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop fulfil the above criteria.

The Keyless drive function in the PCC allows the car to be unlocked (p. 161), driven and locked without the need for a key. You simply

The person who wishes to lock or unlock a door must have the PCC with him or her. It is not possible to lock or unlock a door if the

Assembly 1. Press the remote control key together.

have to have the PCC with you. The system makes it easier and more convenient to open the car, e.g. when your hands are full.

PCC is on the opposite side of the car.

2. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot.

Both of the car's PCCs incorporate the Keyless function. Additional PCCs can be ordered, see Remote control key with key

3. Lightly press the key blade. You should

blade (p. 149).

hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.

The car's electrical system can be set to three different levels - key position 0, I and II

IMPORTANT

(p. 70) - with the remote control key.

Make sure that exhausted batteries are disposed of in a manner which is kind to the environment.

Related information

· Keyless drive* - PCC range (p. 159)

· Keyless drive* - handling the PCC safely

The red rings in the above figure indicate the

(p. 160)

range covered by the system's antennas.

Related information
· Remote control key with key blade (p.
149)
· Remote control key - functions (p. 151)

· Keyless drive* - interference to PCC func-
tion (p. 160)

If all PCCs are removed from the car when the engine is running or key position I or II (p. 70) is active, and if all doors are closed, then a warning message is shown in the informa-

tion display in the combined instrument panel

and an audio reminder signal sounds at the

same time.

2 Personal Car Communicator.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159

06 Locks and alarm

|| When the PCC has been returned to the car, the warning message goes off and the audible reminder ceases once either/or:
· a door has been opened and closed

Keyless drive* - handling the PCC safely It is important to handle all remote control keys with great care.

Keyless drive* - interference to PCC function Electromagnetic fields and screening can interfere with the Keyless function.

· the PCC is inserted into the ignition
switch
· the OK button has been pressed.
Related information
· Keyless drive* (p. 159) · Keyless drive* - antenna location (p. 163)

If a PCC with keyless function is left in the car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry. However, if someone breaks into the car and finds the PCC, it can be reactivated. It is therefore important to handle all PCCs with great care.
IMPORTANT

NOTE
Do not place/store the PCC near a mobile phone or metal object - no closer than 10-15 cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use the PCC and the key blade as a remote control key, see Remote control key - functions (p. 151).

Never leave a PCC in the car. Related information
· Keyless drive* (p. 159)

Related information
· Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
battery (p. 158)
· Keyless drive* - handling the PCC safely
(p. 160)

· Keyless drive* - PCC range (p. 159)
06

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keyless drive* - locking Cars with the Keyless-drive system have a touch-sensitive area on the outer handle of the doors and a rubberised button next to the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate for locking/unlocking.

NOTE
In cars with automatic gearbox selectors, the gear selector must be set to the P position; otherwise the car can be neither locked nor alarmed.
Related information
· Keyless drive* (p. 159) · Alarm indicator (p. 172)

The touch-sensitive area on the outer door handles and the rubberised button next to the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate. Lock the doors and the tailgate with one long press on any of the door handles' touch-sensitive areas or press the smaller of the tailgate's two rubberised buttons - the lock indicator (p. 150) in the windscreen confirms that locking has been completed by starting to flash. All doors and the tailgate must be closed before the car can be locked - otherwise the car is not locked.

06 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive* - unlocking Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate is actuated - open the door or tailgate as normal.
NOTE
The door handles normally register a hand that takes hold of the handle, but with thick gloves on or after a very quick hand movement a second attempt may be required, or with the glove taken off. Related information
· Keyless drive* (p. 159) · Keyless drive* - locking (p. 161)
06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161

06 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key blade If central locking cannot be unlocked with the PCC, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then the left-hand front door can be opened with the PCC's detachable key blade (see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 155)).

2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cylinder and unlock the door.
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered. It is switched off by inserting the PCC in the ignition switch, see Alarm remote control key not working (p. 172).
Related information
· Keyless drive* (p. 159) · Alarm (p. 171)

Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.

To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's plastic cover must be removed - this is also

done with the key blade:

1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight up into the hole on the underside of the door handle/cover - do not prize. > The plastic cover loosens automatically by means of the torque when the blade is pushed straight up and into the opening.

3 Only in combination with power driver's seat* and power mirrors.

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keyless drive* - key memory The key memory3 in the PCC means that certain settings in the car can be individually adapted for different persons.
The key memory function is available in combination with power seat and power rearview and door mirrors. Settings for door mirrors and driver's seat can be saved in the key memory.
PCC memory function If several people each with a PCC approach the car, then the settings for seat and mirrors are implemented for the person who opens the driver's door.
After the driver's door has been opened by person A with PCC A but person B with PCC B shall drive, the settings can be changed as follows:
· Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
behind the steering wheel, person B presses their PCC's unlock button, see Remote control key - functions (p. 151).
· Select one of three possible memories for
seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 73).
· Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see
Seats, front - electrically operated (p. 73) and Door mirrors (p. 94).

06 Locks and alarm

Related information
· Keyless drive* (p. 159) · Remote control key - functions (p. 151)

Keyless drive* - lock settings Lock settings for the Keyless function can be adapted.
Lock settings for the Keyless function can be adapted by indicating in the menu system for MY CAR which doors are to be unlocked. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
Related information
· Keyless drive* (p. 159)

Keyless drive* - antenna location The Keyless system has a number of integrated antennae located around the car.

Rear bumper, centre

Door handle, left rear

Cargo area, central and furthest in under

the floor

Door handle, right rear

Centre console, under the rear section

Centre console, under the front section.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163

06 Locks and alarm
|| WARNING
People who have had a pacemaker operation should not come closer than 22 cm to the Keyless system's antennas with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the Keyless system. Related information
· Keyless drive* (p. 159)
06

Locking/unlocking - from the outside Locking/unlocking from the outside is carried out using the remote control key (p. 149). The remote control key can lock/unlock all doors and the tailgate simultaneously. Different sequences for unlocking can be selected, see Remote control key - functions (p. 151). In order that the lock sequence can be activated, the driver's door must be closed - if any of the other doors or the tailgate is open, then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is activated only when it/they are closed. With the Keyless* system all the doors and tailgate must be closed.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote control key, the battery may be discharged - lock or unlock the left-hand front door with the detachable key blade, see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 155).

NOTE
Remember that the alarm is triggered when the door is opened after being unlocked with the key blade - the alarm is switched off when the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch.
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the car when it is locked from the outside using the remote control key - it is then not possible to open any of the doors from the inside with the door controls. For more information, see Deadlocks* (p. 168).
Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within two minutes of unlocking, all are locked again automatically. This function reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally. (For cars with alarm, see Alarm (p. 171).) Related information
· Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
165)
· Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.
164)

164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 Locks and alarm

Manual locking of the door In certain situations the car must be lockable manually, e.g. in the event of power failure.
The left-hand front door can be locked with its lock cylinder and the remote control key's detachable key blade, see Keyless drive* unlocking with the key blade (p. 162). Other doors do not have lock cylinders and instead have lock knobs on each door's end face which must be re-turned - then they are mechanically locked/blocked against opening from the outside. The doors can still be opened from the inside.

The door is blocked against opening from the outside. The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.
NOTE · A door's knob control only locks that
particular door - not all doors simultaneously.
· A manually locked rear door with an
activated manual child safety lock cannot be opened from either the outside or the inside, see Child safety locks manual activation (p. 169). A rear door that is locked in this way can only be unlocked with the remote control key or central locking button.

Locking/unlocking - from the inside All of the doors and the tailgate are locked or unlocked simultaneously using the central locking button on the driver's door and passenger door*.
Central locking

Related information
· Remote control key/PCC - replacing the
battery (p. 158)
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with child safety locks (p. 169). Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade to turn the knob, see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 155).

Central locking.

· Press one side

of the button to lock -

the other side to unlock.

Press and hold to also open all side windows* simultaneously.

Unlocking A door can be unlocked from the inside in two different ways:
· Press the central locking button .
A long press also opens all the side windows* simultaneously (see also Total airing function (p. 166)).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165

06 Locks and alarm

||
· Pull the door handle and open the door -
the door is unlocked and opened in one operation.
Lamp in lock button Central locking is available in two variants the lamp in the central locking button for the driver's door has different meanings dependent on the variant.

Lock button* rear doors

Total airing function The total airing function opens or closes all side windows simultaneously and can be used for example to quickly air the car during hot weather.

With central locking button only in the driver's door, other doors have no button:

· Illuminated lamp means that all doors are

locked. With central locking button on both front doors and electric lock button in each rear door:
· Illuminated lamp means that only that
particular door is locked. When all but-

The button's lamp illuminates when the door is locked. The rear door lock buttons only lock their respective rear door. To unlock the door:

tons are illuminated all doors are locked.

· Pull the door handle - the door is

Locking

unlocked and opened.

· Press the central locking button

- all

Automatic locking

closed doors are locked.

The doors and tailgate are locked automati-

A long press also closes all side windows and cally when the car starts to move.

Central locking button
A long press on the symbol in the central locking button opens all side windows simultaneously. The same procedure on the symbol closes all side windows simultaneously.

sunroof simultaneously (see also Total airing function (p. 166)).

The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).

Related information
· Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
165)

Related information
· Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.
164)

· Power windows (p. 92)

· Alarm (p. 171)

· Remote control key - functions (p. 151)

166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Locking/unlocking - glovebox The glovebox (p. 140) can only be locked/ unlocked using the detachable key blade from the remote control key.
For information on the key blade, see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 155).

Locking/unlocking - tailgate The tailgate can be opened, locked and unlocked in several ways.
Manual opening

06 Locks and alarm
IMPORTANT · Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the rubberised panel.
· Do not place the lift force on the rub-
ber panel when opening the rear hatch - lift the handle. Using too much force may damage the electrical contacts on the rubber panel. Unlocking with the remote control key

Rubber plate with electrical contact.

The tailgate is held closed by an electrical

Locking the glovebox:

lock. To open:

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cylinder.

1. Push down gently on the wider of the two rubberised pressure plates under the outer handle - the lock is released.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. The keyhole is horizontal in the locked position.

2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully open the tailgate.

The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed* and the tailgate unlocked on its own by using

Pull out the key blade.

the remote control key's button.

· Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
order. For information on privacy locking, see Privacy locking* (p. 156).

The lock indicator (p. 150) on the instrument panel stops flashing in order to show that not all of the car is locked and the alarm's* level and movement sensors and the sensors for opening the tailgate are disconnected.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167

06 Locks and alarm

|| The doors remain locked and armed.
· The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
closed - press lightly on the rubberised pressure plate under the outer handle and lift the tailgate. If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
Unlocking the car from inside

Locking with the remote control key Press the remote control key's button for
locking , see Remote control key functions (p. 151). > The lock indicator on the instrument
panel starts flashing, which means that the car is locked and the alarm* has been activated.
Related information
· Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
165)
· Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.
164)

Deadlocks* Deadlocks4 means that all door handles are mechanically disengaged, which prevents doors being opened from both inside and outside. The deadlocks are activated with the remote control key (p. 149) and are set after an approximately 10 second delay after the doors have been locked.
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time then the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated.

Unlocking, tailgate

To unlock the tailgate:
Press the lighting panel button. (1) > The tailgate is unlocked and can be opened within 2 minutes (if the car is locked from the inside).

The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock state with the remote control key. The front left door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade (p. 155). In addition, it is possible to unlock/open the doors and tailgate on cars equipped with the Keyless drive* by touching door handles or the tailgate's handle.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.

4 Only in combination with alarm.
168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Temporary deactivation

Related information
· Keyless drive* - unlocking with the key
blade (p. 162)
· Remote control key with key blade (p.
149)

06 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks - manual activation The child safety locks prevent children from being able to open a rear door from the inside. Activate/deactivate child safety locks

Active menu options are indicated with a cross. MY CAR
OK MENU
TUNE knob control EXIT If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside, then the deadlocks function can be temporarily switched off. This takes place the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
NOTE · Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
· If any of the doors are opened from
the inside then the alarm is triggered.

Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with manual door lock (p. 165).

The child safety locks are located on the trail-

ing edge of the rear doors and are only accessible when the doors are open.

To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:

Use the remote control key's detachable key blade (p. 155) to turn the knob.

The door is blocked against opening from the inside.

The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169

06 Locks and alarm
|| WARNING
Each rear door has two knob controls - do not mix up the child safety locks with manual door locks.
NOTE · A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors simultaneously.
· Cars with an electric child safety lock
do not have a manual child lock.

Related information
· Child safety locks - electrical activation*
(p. 170)

· Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
165)

· Locking/unlocking - from the outside (p.

164)

Child safety locks - electrical activation* Child safety locks with electrical activation prevent children from opening the rear doors or windows from the inside.
Activation The child safety locks can be activated/deactivated in all key positions (p. 70) higher than 0. Activation/deactivation can be performed up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided that no door is opened.
To activate the child safety locks:

2. Press the button in the driver's door control panel. > The combined instrument panel's information display shows the message Rear child locks Activated and the button's lamp illuminates - the locks are active.
When the child safety lock is active then the rear:
· windows can only be opened with the
driver's door control panel
· doors cannot be opened from inside.
The current setting is stored when the engine is switched off - if the child safety locks are activated at engine shutdown, the function will remain activated the next time the engine is started.
Related information
· Child safety locks - manual activation (p.
169)
· Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p.
165)

Control panel driver's door. 1. Start the engine or choose a key position
higher than 0.

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 Locks and alarm

Alarm The alarm is a device that warns in the event of e.g. a break-in in the car.
Activated alarm is triggered if:
· a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is
opened
· a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement detector*)
· the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector*)
· the battery's cable is disconnected · the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system then the information display in the combined instrument panel shows a message. In which case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

NOTE
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in the event of movement in the passenger compartment - air currents are also registered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with a window or the sunroof open or if the passenger compartment heater is used. To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof when leaving the car. If the car's integrated passenger compartment heater (or a portable electric heater) shall be used direct the airflow from the air vents so that they are not pointing upwards in the passenger compartment. Alternatively, reduced alarm level can be used, see Reduced alarm level (p. 173).
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter components in the alarm system yourself. Any such attempts may affect the terms of the insurance.

Deactivating a triggered alarm Press the remote control key unlock but-
ton or insert the remote control key in the ignition switch. Related information
· Alarm indicator (p. 172) · Alarm - automatic re-arming (p. 172) · Alarm - remote control key not working
(p. 172)
06

Arming the alarm Press the remote control key lock button.
Deactivate the alarm Press the remote control key unlock but-
ton.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171

06 Locks and alarm

Alarm indicator The alarm indicator shows alarm system (p. 171) status.

Alarm - automatic re-arming Automatic re-arming of the alarm (p. 171) prevents the car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes, then the alarm is automatically rearmed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Related information
· Reduced alarm level (p. 173)

Alarm - remote control key not working If the alarm (p. 171) cannot be deactivated with the remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery (p. 158) is discharged - the car can be unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the detachable key blade (p. 162). > The alarm is triggered, the alarm indicator (p. 172) flashes rapidly and the siren sounds.

Same LED as lock indicator (p. 150).

A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status:

· LED not lit Alarm not armed

· The LED flashes once every other second
Alarm is armed

· The LED flashes rapidly after disarming
the alarm (and until the remote control key is inserted in the ignition switch and key position I is selected) Alarm has been triggered.

2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch. > The alarm is deactivated and the alarm indicator goes out.
3. Start the engine.

172

Alarm signals When the alarm (p. 171) is triggered a siren sounds and all direction indicators flash.
· A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its own battery and works independently of the car battery.
· The direction indicators flash for 5
minutes or until the alarm is switched off.

Reduced alarm level Reduced guard means that the movement and tilt detectors can be temporarily deactivated.
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm (p. 171) - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on a car train or car ferry temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt detectors. The procedure is the same as with the temporary disengaging of deadlocks (p. 168)5.
Related information
· Alarm indicator (p. 172)

06 Locks and alarm

5 Only in combination with alarm.

173

DRIVER SUPPORT

07 Driver support

Active chassis - Four C*

Operation

Stability and traction control system

Active chassis "Four-C" (Continously

(DSTC)

Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the

The stability and traction control system,

characteristics of the shock absorbers so that

DSTC (Dynamic Stability & Traction Control),

the car's driving characteristics can be

helps the driver to avoid skidding and

adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort,

improves the car's traction.

Sport and Advanced.

The activation of the system during braking

Comfort

may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The

This setting means that the car is perceived

car may accelerate slower than expected

as being more comfortable on rough and

when the accelerator pedal is depressed.

uneven road surfaces. Shock absorption is soft and the movement of the body is smooth and gentle.
Sport This setting means that the car is perceived as being more sporty and is recommended for more active driving. Steering response is faster than in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption is harder and the body follows the road in order to reduce rolling during corner-

Control buttons. The required chassis setting is selected using the centre console buttons. The setting used when the engine was switched off is re-activated when the engine is next started. The exception is Advanced - it is restarted as Sport.

The system consists of the following functions:
· Active Yaw Control · Spin Control · Traction control system · Engine drag control - EDC · Corner Traction Control - CTC · Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA

ing.

Active Yaw Control

Advanced This setting is only recommended on very even and smooth road surfaces.
The shock absorbers are optimised for maximum roadholding and rolling in bends is further minimised.

The function checks the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car.

Spin Control

The function prevents the driving wheels from

spinning against the road surface during

acceleration.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175

07 Driver support

|| Traction control system The function is active at low speed and transfers power from the driving wheel that is spinning to the one that is not.
Engine drag control (EDC) EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involuntary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine braking when driving in low gears on slippery road surfaces.

Related information
· Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - operation (p. 176)
· Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 178)

Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - operation The stability and traction control system (p. 175) (DSTC - Dynamic Stability & Traction Control), helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.
Selection of level - Sport mode The stability and traction control system is always activated - it cannot be switched off.

Involuntary wheel locking while driving can, amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to steer the car.

Corner Traction Control (CTC)* CTC compensates for understeer and allows higher than normal acceleration in a bend without wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on an arcing motorway entrance road to quickly reach the prevailing traffic speed.

Trailer Stability Assist1 Trailer stability assist (p. 312) function is to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake. For more information, see Driving with a trailer (p. 306).

NOTE

However, the driver can select the Sport mode, which allows for a more active driving experience. In Sport mode the system detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding with the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car. If the driver interrupts a controlled skid by releasing the accelerator pedal then the stability and traction control system intervenes and stabilises the car. With Sport mode, maximum traction is obtained if the car has become stuck, or when driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deep snow.

The function is deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode.

Sport mode is selected in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).

1 Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.
176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The Sport mode is active until the driver deselects it or until the engine is switched off - after the engine is started the next time the stability and traction control system is back in its normal mode again. Related information
· Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 178)

07 Driver support
07
177

07 Driver support

Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - symbols and messages The stability and traction control system (p. 175) (DSTC - Dynamic Stability & Traction

Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.

Table Symbol Message

Specification

DSTC Temporarily OFF

The system is temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature. - The function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.

DSTC Service required

The system is disengaged.
· Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again. · Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

"Message"

There is a text message in the combined instrument panel (p. 59) - Read it!

and

Constant glow for 2 seconds. Flashing light.

System check when the engine is started. The system is being activated.

Sport mode is activated.
07 Related information
· Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - operation (p. 176)

178

07 Driver support

Road Sign Information (RSI)* The road sign information function (RSI Road Sign Information) helps the driver to remember which speed-related road signs the car has passed.

WARNING
RSI does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid. The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed.
Related information
· Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 179)
· Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 181)

Road sign information (RSI)* operation The road sign information function (RSI Road Sign Information) helps the driver to remember which speed-related road signs the car has passed.
The function is operated as follows

Examples of readable speed related signs2. The RSI function gives information on current speed, e.g. that a motorway or road is starting/ending and when overtaking is prohibited. If both a sign for motorway/road for motorised traffic and a sign showing the maximum permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to show the sign symbol for maximum permitted speed.

Recorded speed information3.

When RSI has recorded a road sign with an imposed speed, the combined instrument panel displays the sign as a symbol.

Together with the symbol for

the current speed limit, a

sign showing that overtaking

is prohibited may also be

displayed where appropriate.

2 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples. 3 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179

07 Driver support
|| End of restriction or motorway A corresponding road sign is shown in the combined instrument panel for approx. 10 seconds in situations where RSI detects a sign that involves the end of a speed limit - or other speed-related information, e.g. end of a motorway. Examples of such signs are:

End of all restrictions.

End of motorway.

Following which, the sign information is hid-

den until the next speed-related sign is detected.

Additional signs

Examples of additional signs3. Sometimes different speed limits are signposted for the same road - an additional sign then indicates the circumstances under which the different speeds apply. The road section may be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog, for example. An additional sign relating to rain is displayed only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
The speed applicable on an exit is indicated in certain markets by means of an additional sign containing an arrow. Speed signs linked to this type of additional sign are displayed only if the driver is using the direction indicator.

Some speeds are applicable only after e.g. a specific distance or at a certain time of day. The driver's attention is drawn to the situation by means of a symbol for an additional sign under the symbol showing speed. Display of additional information
A symbol for additional sign in the form of an empty frame under the combined instrument panel's speed symbol means that the RSI has detected an additional sign with supplementary information for the current speed limit. Setting in MY CAR There are options for RSI in the MY CAR menu system; see MY CAR (p. 103).

3 Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.

180

07 Driver support

Road sign information On/Off
The combined instrument panel's speed symbol display can be disabled. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103). Speed warning

exceeded. The function can be activated/ deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
Related information
· Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 179) · Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 181)
· MY CAR (p. 103)

Road sign information (RSI)* limitations The road sign information function (RSI Road Sign Information) helps the driver to remember which speed-related road signs the car has passed. The function has the following limitations.
The RSI function's camera sensor has limitations just like the human eye - read more about camera sensor limitations (p. 220)). Signs which indirectly provide information on a prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI function. Here are several examples of what can disrupt the function:
· Faded signs · Signs positioned on bends · Rotated or damaged signs · Concealed or poorly positioned signs · Signs completely or partly covered with
frost, snow and/or dirt.

The driver can opt to receive a warning when the applicable speed limit is exceeded by 5 km/h or more. This warning is given by the symbol showing the applicable maximum speed temporarily flashing when this speed is

Related information
· Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 179)

· Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 179)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181

07 Driver support

Speed limiter* A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Overview

Related information
· Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 182) · Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 183)
· Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee-
ded (p. 184)
· Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 184)

Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument panel.
Speed limiter - On/Off.

Standby mode ceases and the stored

speed is resumed.

Standby mode.

Activate and adjust the max. speed.

Selected speed.

Speed limiter active.

Speed limiter* - getting started A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Switch on and activate When the speed limiter is active, its symbol (6) is shown in combination with a mark (5) by the set maximum speed in the combined instrument panel.
Selection and storage of the highest possible speed in the memory can be made both during a journey and while stationary.
While driving 1. Press the steering wheel button to
switch on the speed limiter. > The symbol (6) for speed limiter illumi-
nates in the combined instrument panel.
2. When the car is moving at the desired highest possible speed: Press one of the steering wheel buttons or until the combined instrument panel shows a mark (5) by the desired maximum speed. > The speed limiter is then active and the selected max. speed is stored in the memory.

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

When stationary

Speed limiter* - changing speed

Speed limiter* - temporary

1. Press the steering wheel button to

A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a

deactivation and standby mode

switch on the speed limiter.

reverse cruise control - the driver regulates

A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a

2. Scroll with the button until the combined instrument panel shows a mark (5) by the desired maximum speed. > The speed limiter is then active and the selected max. speed is stored in the memory.
Related information
· Speed limiter* (p. 182)

the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set speed by the speed limiter.
To change the stored speed:
· Adjust with short presses on or -
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last presses made are stored in the memory. To adjust +/- 1 km/h:

· Speed limiter* - changing speed (p. 183) · Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 183)
· Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 184) · Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee-
ded (p. 184)

· Hold the button depressed and release
when the combined instrument panel shows a mark (5) by the desired maximum speed. Related information
· Speed limiter* (p. 182) · Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 182) · Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 183)

> The mark (5) in the combined instrument panel changes colour from GREEN to WHITE and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum speed.
The speed limiter is reactivated with one press on . The mark (5) then changes colour from WHITE to GREEN and the car's maximum speed is limited once again.

· Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 184) · Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee-
ded (p. 184)

Temporary deactivation with the accelerator pedal
The speed limiter can also be set in standby

mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rap-

idly accelerating the car out of a situation:

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183

07 Driver support

Depress the accelerator pedal fully.

Speed limiter* - alarm for speed

Speed limiter* - deactivation

> The combined instrument panel shows exceeded

A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a

the stored maximum speed with a coloured mark (5) and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum speed - the mark (5) changes colour during this time from GREEN to WHITE. The speed limiter is automatically reactivated after the release of the accelerator pedal and the car's speed is slowed down to below the selected/ stored maximum speed - the display's mark (5) changes colour from WHITE to GREEN and the car's maximum speed is again limited. Related information
· Speed limiter* (p. 182) · Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 182)

A (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/set speed by the speed limiter. On a steep downhill gradient the speed limiter's engine braking effect may be inadequate and the selected maximum speed is exceeded. The driver is alerted about this with an acoustic signal. The signal is active until the driver has slowed to below the selected maximum speed.
NOTE
The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km/h provided that none of the buttons

reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set speed by the speed limiter.
To deactivate the speed limiter: Press the steering wheel button .
> The combined instrument panel's symbol for the speed limiter (6) and the mark for the set speed (5) are extinguished. The selected and stored speed are thus deleted from the memory and cannot be resumed with the button. The driver can then use the accelerator pedal to choose a speed without limitation.

· Speed limiter* - changing speed (p. 183) · Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 184)

or has been depressed during the last half minute.

Related information
· Speed limiter* (p. 182)

· Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee-
ded (p. 184) 07

Related information
· Speed limiter* (p. 182) · Speed limiter* - changing speed (p. 183) · Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 182) · Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 183)

· Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 182) · Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 183)
· Speed limiter* - alarm for speed excee-
ded (p. 184)

· Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 184)

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

Cruise control* The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in a more relaxed driving on motorways and long, straight roads in regular traffic flows.
Overview

WARNING
The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed and/or suitable distance. The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument panel in cars without speed limiter4.

The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument panel in cars with speed limiter4.
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed. Standby mode
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).
Cruise control active - WHITE symbol (GREY = Standby mode).

Related information
· Cruise control* - managing speed (p.
186)
· Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 186)
· Cruise control* - resume set speed (p.
187)
· Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 187)

4 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185

07 Driver support

Cruise control* - managing speed The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed. It is possible to activate, set or change the speed.
Activating and setting the speed To enable cruise control:
· Press the steering wheel button
> The cruise control symbol in the combined instrument panel changes from WHITE to GREY and shows that the cruise control is in standby mode.
To activate cruise control:
· At the required speed - press the steering
wheel button or . > The current speed is stored in the mem-
ory and the combined instrument panel's marking (5) is illuminated/turns WHITE at the selected speed.
NOTE

· Hold down the button and release it at
the required speed. A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting - the car returns to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held depressed for several minutes then it is blocked and deactivated. To be able to reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped and the engine restarted.
Related information
· Cruise control* (p. 185) · Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 186)
· Cruise control* - resume set speed (p.
187)
· Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 187)

Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed. The function can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode To temporarily disengage cruise control and set it in standby mode:
· Press the steering wheel button .
> The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and the symbol (6) change colour from WHITE to GREY.
Automatic standby mode Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if:
· wheels lose traction · the foot brake is used · speed falls below approx. 30 km/h

Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds below 30 km/h.

07 Changing the speed To change the stored speed:
· Adjust with short presses on or -
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last presses made are stored in the memory.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

· the clutch pedal is held depressed for a
short time - however, a few seconds does not activate standby mode5
· the gear selector is moved to neutral
position (automatic gearbox)
· the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute. The driver must then regulate the speed.
Related information
· Cruise control* (p. 185) · Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 186) · Cruise control* - resume set speed (p.
187)
· Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 187)

Cruise control* - resume set speed The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed. After temporary deactivation and standby mode (p. 186) it is possible to resume the set speed.
To reactivate the cruise control from standby mode:
· Press the steering wheel button .
> The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour from GREY to WHITE and the speed is then set to the last speed stored.
NOTE
A marked speed increase may occur once the speed has been resumed by selecting
.

Cruise control* - deactivate The cruise control (CC Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed. How it is deactivated is described here.
The cruise control is deactivated with a steering wheel button (1) or by switching off the engine - the set speed is deleted from the memory and cannot be resumed with the button.
Related information
· Cruise control* (p. 185) · Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 186) · Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 186)
· Cruise control* - resume set speed (p.
187)

Related information
· Cruise control* (p. 185)

· Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 186)

· Cruise control* temporary deactivation
and standby mode (p. 186)

· Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 187)

5 Cars with 4-cyl 2.0L engine also allow gear changing.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187

07 Driver support

Adaptive cruise control - ACC* The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
The adaptive cruise control provides a more relaxing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows. The driver sets the desired speed (p. 191) and time interval (p. 192) to the car in front. When the radar detector detects a slower vehicle in front of the car, the speed is automatically adapted to that. When the road is clear again the car returns to the selected speed. If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or set to standby mode (p. 193) and the car comes too close to a vehicle in front, then the driver is warned instead by the Distance Warning (p. 202) function about the short distance.

WARNING
The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance. The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions. Read all the sections about the adaptive cruise control in the owner's manual in order to learn about its limitations, of which the driver should be aware before it is used. The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information
· Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
190)
· Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
189)
· Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing
and action (p. 199)
· Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 200)

Automatic gearbox

Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced

functionality with the adaptive cruise control's

Queue Assist (p. 195).

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

Adaptive cruise control* - function The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. It consists of a cruise control system and a coordinated spacing system.
Function overview

The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the cruise control's set speed. This also happens if the speed of the vehicle in front exceeds the cruise control's set speed. The adaptive cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/herself. This applies with large differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar sensor (p. 197) braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.

Function overview6. Warning lamp - braking by driver required
Steering wheel keypad (p. 190)
Radar sensor (p. 197)

Distance to the vehicle ahead (p. 192) is measured primarily by a radar sensor (p. 197). Cruise control regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used by the adaptive cruise control.
WARNING

The adaptive cruise control can be activated to follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h7 up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls below 30 km/h or if the engine speed becomes too low, the cruise control is set in standby mode (p. 193) at which automatic braking ceases - the driver must then take over himself/herself to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.

The brake pedal moves when Cruise Control brakes. Do not rest your foot beneath

Warning lamp - braking by driver

the brake pedal as it may become trapped.

required

Adaptive cruise control has a braking

capacity that is equivalent to more than 40%

of the car's braking capacity.

6 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model. 7 Queue Assistant (p. 195) (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

}} 189

07 Driver support

|| If the car needs to be braked more heavily than cruise control capacity and the driver does not brake, then cruise control uses the warning lamp and warning sound from the Collision warning system (p. 212) in order to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required.
NOTE
The warning lamp may be difficult to see in strong sunlight or when wearing sunglasses.

Related information
· Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 188) · Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p.
194)
· Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle (p. 194)

WARNING
Cruise Control warns only of vehicles which the radar sensor has detected. Hence the warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. Do not wait for a warning without braking when so required.

Steep roads and/or heavy load

Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control

is primarily intended for use when driving on

level road surfaces. It may have difficulty in

keeping the correct distance from the vehicle

ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes,

with a heavy load or with a trailer - in which

case, be extra attentive and ready to slow

down.

8 A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Adaptive cruise control* - overview Operation of the adaptive cruise control and steering wheel keypad varies depending on whether or not the car is equipped with speed limiter8. Adaptive cruise control with Speed limiter
Cruise control - On/Off. Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed. Standby mode Time interval - Increase/decrease. Activate and adjust the speed. Green marking at stored speed (WHITE = standby mode).

07 Driver support

Time distance
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE = standby mode).
Adaptive cruise control without Speed limiter

Related information
· Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 188) · Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
189)
· Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 200)

Standby mode ceases and the stored speed is resumed. Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode. Time interval - Increase/decrease. Activate and adjust the speed. (Not used) Green marking at stored speed (WHITE = standby mode). Time distance ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE = standby mode).

Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.

To enable cruise control:

· Press the steering wheel button - a
similar WHITE symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel (8) which shows that cruise control is in standby mode (p. 193).

To activate cruise control:

· At the required speed - press the steering
wheel button or .

> The current speed is stored in the memory, the combined instrument panel shows a "magnifying glass" around the selected speed for a second or so and its marking changes from WHITE to GREEN.

When this symbol changes colour

from WHITE to GREEN, the cruise

control is active and the car main-

tains the stored speed.

Only when the symbol shows

an image of another vehicle

is the distance to the vehicle

in front controlled by the

cruise control.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191

07 Driver support

|| At the same time a speed range is marked:
· the higher speed with the GREEN mark-
ing (6) is the pre-programmed speed
· the lower speed is the speed of the car in
front.

NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held depressed for several minutes then it is blocked and deactivated. To be able to reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped and the engine restarted. In certain situations, cruise control cannot be activated. In this case, the combined instrument panel (p. 200) shows Cruise control Unavailable.

Changing the speed To change the stored speed:
· Adjust with short presses on or -
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last presses made are stored in the memory.
If speed is increased using the accelera-

Related information
· Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 188) · Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
190)
· Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
189)

tor pedal prior to pressing the / button, then it is the car's current speed when the button is pressed that is stored in the cruise control.

To adjust +/- 1 km/h:

· Hold down the button and release it at
the required speed. 07

Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the combined instrument panel as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line corresponds to approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately 3 seconds. To set/change the time distance:
· Turn the thumbwheel on the steering
wheel keypad (p. 190) (or use the / buttons for cars without Speed limiter). At low speed, when the distances are short, the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly. The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary noticeably in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably. Note that a short time interval only allows the driver a short time to react and take action if any unforeseen traffic problem should arise.

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

The same symbol is also shown when Distance Warning (p. 202) function is activated.
NOTE
Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations. If Cruise Control does not appear to react when activated, this may be because the time distance to the car in front is preventing an increase in speed. The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time interval.
Related information
· Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 188) · Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
190)
· Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
189)
· Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p.
194)

Adaptive cruise control* - temporary

· the gear selector is moved to N position

deactivation, and standby mode

(automatic gearbox)

The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an

· the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute.

even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. The cruise control can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode.

The driver must then regulate the speed. A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not

Temporary deactivation - standby mode affect the cruise control setting - the car

with Speed limiter To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise

returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released.

control and set it in standby mode:
· Press the steering wheel button

Automatic standby mode The adaptive cruise control is dependent on

This symbol and the stored speed's marking then change colour from GREEN to WHITE.

other systems, e.g. DSTC (Stability and traction control system) (p. 175). If any of these systems stop working then cruise control is automatically deactivated.

Temporary deactivation - standby mode without Speed limiter
To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise control and set it in standby mode:

In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will sound and the message Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the combined instrument panel. The driver must then intervene

· Press the steering wheel button

and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.

Standby mode due to driver intervention Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if:

An automatic deactivation can be due to:
· the driver opens the door

· the foot brake is used · the clutch pedal is depressed for longer
than 1 minute9

· the driver takes off his seatbelt · engine speed is too low/high · speed has fallen below 30 km/h10

9 Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode. 10 Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant - it manages right down to stationary.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193

07 Driver support

· wheels lose traction · brake temperature is high · the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet
snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
Resume set speed Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is reactivated with one press on the steering wheel button - the speed is then set to the last stored speed.
NOTE

Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another vehicle The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
When the car is following another vehicle and the driver indicates an impending overtaking manoeuvre with the direction indicator11, the adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accelerate the car towards the vehicle in front.

Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
Keypad with Speed limiter The adaptive cruise control is switched off with the steering wheel button in the steering wheel keypad (p. 190). The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with the button.

A marked speed increase may occur once the speed has been resumed by selecting
.
Related information
· Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 188) · Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
190)
· Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
189)
07

This function is active at speeds above 70 km/h.
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations other than during overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road - the car will then accelerate briefly.
Related information
· Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 188) · Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
190)

Keypad without Speed limiter With a short press on the steering wheel button the adaptive cruise control is set in standby mode (p. 193). With a further short press it is deactivated. The set speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with the button.
Related information
· Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 188) · Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
189)
· Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and
messages (p. 200)

· Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
189)

11 On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control* - Queue Assist The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. Queue Assist also provides the Adaptive Cruise Control with enhanced functionality at speeds below 30 km/h..
In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive cruise control is supplemented with the Queue Assist function (also referred to as "Queue Assist").

Extended speed range NOTE
In order to activate the cruise control the driver's door must be closed and the driver must be wearing the seatbelt.
With an automatic gearbox, the adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle within the range 0-200 km/h.
NOTE

NOTE
Queue Assist can hold the car stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the parking brake is applied and Cruise Control is disengaged.
· The driver has to release the parking
brake before the cruise control can be reactivated.
Change of target

Queue Assistant has the following functions:
· Extended speed range - also below
30 km/h and when stationary

Activation of the cruise control below 30 km/h requires a vehicle in front within a reasonable distance.

· Change of target · Automatic braking ceases when station-

For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is

ary

automatically resumed if the stops do not

· Automatic activation parking brake.
Note that the lowest programmable speed for the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h - even though it is capable of following another vehicle down to a standstill, a lower speed cannot be selected.

exceed about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in front starts moving again then the Adaptive cruise control is set in standby mode with automatic braking. The driver must then reactivate it in one of the following ways:
· Press the steering wheel button .

If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front. When the adaptive cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h and changes target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will slow down for the stationary vehicle.

· Depress the accelerator pedal.

> The cruise control will then resume following the vehicle in front.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

}} 195

07 Driver support

|| WARNING
When the cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds in excess of 30 km/h and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the cruise control will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead select the stored speed.
· The driver must intervene him/herself
and brake.

Queue Assist releases the foot brake and sets the adaptive cruise control in standby mode in the following situations:
· the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
· the parking brake is applied · the gear selector is moved to P, N or R
position
· the driver sets the cruise control in
standby mode.

Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
Changing from ACC to CC With one press of the button the adaptive part (spacing system) in the cruise control is deactivated, at which point the car just follows the set speed.

Automatic standby mode with change

Automatic activation parking brake

· Give a long press on the steering wheel

of target

In certain situations Queue Assist applies the

button - the combined instrument

The adaptive cruise control is disengaged

parking brake in order to keep the car remain-

panel's symbol changes from to .

and set in standby mode:

ing stationary.

> By these means the standard cruise con-

· when the speed is below 5 km/h and
cruise control is not sure whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some other object, e.g. a speed bump.
· when the speed is below 5 km/h and the
vehicle in front turns off so the cruise control no longer has a vehicle to follow.

This takes place if:
· the driver opens the door or takes off
his/her seatbelt
· DSTC is changed from Normal to Sport
mode
· Queue Assist has held the car stationary
for more than 4 minutes

trol (p. 185) CC (Cruise Control) is activated.
WARNING
The car no longer brakes automatically after switching from ACC to CC - it merely follows the set speed.

Termination of automatic braking at a

standstill

In certain situations, Queue Assist stops

automatic braking at a standstill. This means

that the brakes are released and the car may

start to roll - the driver must therefore inter-

vene and brake the car himself/herself in

order to maintain its position.

· the engine is switched off · the brakes have overheated.
Related information
· Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 188) · Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
190)
· Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.

Changing back from CC to ACC Switch off cruise control with 1-2 presses on
in accordance with the deactivation instructions (p. 194). The next time the system is switched on it is the Adaptive cruise control that is activated.

189)

196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information
· Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 188) · Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
190)
· Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
189)

07 Driver support

Radar sensor The function of the radar sensor is to detect cars or larger vehicles in the same direction, in the same lane.
The radar sensor is used by the following functions:
· Adaptive cruise control* · Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Pedestrian Detection*
· Distance Warning*
Related information
· Radar sensor - limitations (p. 197) · Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 188) · Collision warning system* (p. 212) · Distance Warning* (p. 202)

Radar sensor - limitations A radar sensor (p. 197) has certain limitations, due to its limited field of vision for example. The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehicles in front is reduced significantly: · if the radar sensor becomes blocked and
cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy rain or slush, or if other objects have collected in front of the radar sensor.
NOTE
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor clean - see subheading "Maintenance" (p. 217).
· if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi-
cantly different from your own speed. Field of vision The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations another vehicle is not detected, or the detection is made later than expected.
07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197

07 Driver support
||

ACC field of vision.

Sometimes the radar sensor is late at

detecting vehicles at close distances, e.g.

a vehicle that drives in between the car

and vehicles in front.

Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or

vehicles not driving in the centre of the

lane can remain undetected.

In bends the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view.

WARNING
The driver must always be observant with regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance. The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all traffic, weather and road conditions. Read all the sections about the adaptive cruise control in the owner's manual in order to learn about its limitations, of which the driver should be aware before it is used. The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the correct distance and speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.
WARNING
Accessories or other objects such as auxiliary lamps must not be fitted in front of the grille.

WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front. The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects. Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads.
IMPORTANT
In the event of visible damage to the car's grille, or if you suspect that the radar sensor may be damaged:
· Contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. The function may completely or partially disappear - or malfunction - if the grille, the radar sensor or its bracket is damaged or has loosened.
Related information
· Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 188) · Collision warning system* (p. 212) · Distance Warning* (p. 202)

198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action The adaptive cruise control (p. 188) (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
If the combined instrument panel shows the message Radar blocked See manual this

means that the radar signals from the radar sensor (p. 197) are blocked and that vehicles in front of the car cannot be detected. In turn this means that - apart from Adaptive Cruise Control - Distance Warning (p. 202) and Collision Warning (p. 212) with Auto Brake are not operating either.

The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action:

Cause

Action

The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.

Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals.

No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals.

No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road surface.

The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains.

Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer blocked.

Related information
· Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
190)

· Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.

189)
· Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and

messages (p. 200)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199

07 Driver support

Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages The adaptive cruise control (ACC Adaptive Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an

even speed and a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. Sometimes the adaptive cruise control may display a symbol and/or text

Symbol Message The symbol is GREEN

Specification The car maintains the stored speed.

message. Here are several examples - follow the recommendation given if appropriate:

The symbol is WHITE

Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.

Standard cruise control is selected manually.

DSTC Normal to enable The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability and Traction Control system (DSTC)

Cruise

(p. 175) has been set in Normal mode.

Cruise control Cancelled

The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.

Cruise control Unavailable

The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated. This could be due to:
· brake temperature is high · the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.

Radar blocked See

The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.

manual

· The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy

rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.

The driver can then choose to switch to (p. 196) normal Cruise control (CC) - a text message provides information on appropriate alternatives.

Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 197).

200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

Symbol Message

Specification

Cruise control Service required

The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.
· Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Press Brake To hold + acoustic alarm (Only with Queue Assistant)

The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to take over and hold the car, but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll.
· The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver
depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.

Below 30 km/h Only following (Only with Queue Assistant)

Shown with attempts to activate the cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h without a vehicle in front within the activation distance (approx. 30 metres).

Related information
· Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 188) · Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p.
190)
· Adaptive cruise control* - function (p.
189)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201

07 Driver support

Distance Warning* Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function that informs the driver about the time interval to vehicles in front.
Distance Warning is active at speeds above 30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in front of the car, in the same direction. No distance information is provided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles.

NOTE
Distance warning is deactivated during the time the adaptive cruise control is active.
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the distance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value - the speed of the driver's vehicle is not affected.
Operation

tion is handled by the car's menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 103). Set time interval

Orange-coloured warning lamp12.

An orange-coloured warning lamp in the

windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the set time interval.

Press the button in the centre console to switch the function on or off. The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the

button.

Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console - in which case the func-

12 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

202 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Controls and symbol for time interval. Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Time interval - On. Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the combined instrument panel as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line corre-
sponds to approximately 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately 3 seconds.

07 Driver support

The same symbol is also shown when adaptive cruise control is activated.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time interval. The set time interval is also used by the function adaptive cruise control (p. 189). Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations.
Related information
· Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 203)

Distance Warning* - limitations Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function that informs the driver about the distance to vehicles in front. The function uses the same radar sensor as the Adaptive cruise control (p. 188) and Collision warning with auto brake (p. 212), has some limitations.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong variations in light intensity, as well as wearing sunglasses, could mean that the warning light in the windscreen cannot be seen. Poor weather or winding roads could affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles in front. The size of other vehicles could also affect detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This could mean that the warning lamp illuminates at a shorter distance than the setting or that the warning is temporarily absent. Extremely high speeds can also cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than that set due to limitations in sensor range.

For further information on radar sensor limita-

tions, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 197)

and (p. 218).

Related information
· Distance Warning* (p. 202) · Distance Warning* - symbols and mes-
sages (p. 204)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 203

07 Driver support

Distance Warning* - symbols and messages Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function that informs the driver about the time interval

to vehicles in front. The function has certain limitations.

SymbolA Message Radar blocked See manual
Collision warn. Service required

Specification
Distance Warning temporarily disengaged. The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor. Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 197). Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged. Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information
· Distance Warning* (p. 202) · Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 203)

204 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

City SafetyTM City SafetyTM is a function for helping the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, amongst other things, when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.
The City SafetyTM function is active at speeds under 50 km/h and it helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of imminent risk of collision with vehicles in front, should the driver not react in time by braking and/or steering away. City SafetyTM is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation. City SafetyTM is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.

IMPORTANT
Maintenance and replacement of City SafetyTM components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WARNING
City SafetyTM does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road conditions. City SafetyTM does not react to vehicles driving in a different direction from the car, to small vehicles and motorcycles or to humans and animals. City SafetyTM can prevent collision at a speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at a higher speed difference, it is only possible to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain full brake function, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

City SafetyTM - function City SafetyTM detects the traffic in front of the car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk of collision, City SafetyTM will automatically brake the car, which may be experienced as sudden braking.

City SafetyTM must not be used as an excuse

Never wait for City SafetyTM to engage.

for the driver to change his/her driving style. If the driver solely relies on City SafetyTM to do the braking, there will be a collision sooner or

The driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the proper distance and speed.

later.

The driver or passengers normally only notice City SafetyTM if a situation arises where the car is extremely close to being in a collision.

Related information
· City SafetyTM - limitations (p. 207) · City SafetyTM - function (p. 205)

If the car is also equipped with Collision Warning with Auto Brake (p. 212)* these two

· City SafetyTM - operation (p. 206) · City SafetyTM - laser sensor (p. 209)

systems complement each other.

· City SafetyTM - symbols and messages (p.

211)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205

07 Driver support

When the function is activated and brakes,

City SafetyTM - operation

the combined instrument panel shows a text message to the effect that the function is/has been active.

City SafetyTM is a function for helping the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, amongst other things, when changes

NOTE

in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.

When City SafetyTM brakes, the brake lights come on.

On and Off

Related information

NOTE

Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window13. If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation

· City SafetyTM - limitations (p. 207) · City SafetyTM (p. 205) · City SafetyTM - operation (p. 206)

The City SafetyTM function is always switched on after the engine has been started via key position I and II (p. 70).

to the vehicle in front then City SafetyTM can completely prevent a collision. City SafetyTM activates a short, sharp braking and stops the car in normal circumstances, just behind the vehicle in front. For most dri-

· City SafetyTM - laser sensor (p. 209) · City SafetyTM - symbols and messages (p.
211)

In certain situations, it may advisable to disable City SafetyTM, e.g. where leafy branches could sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen.

vers this is well outside normal driving style

After starting the engine City SafetyTM can be

and may be experienced as being uncomfort-

deactivated as follows: The function can be

able.

activated/deactivated in the menu system MY

If the difference in speed between the vehicles is greater than 15 km/h then City

CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).

SafetyTM may not prevent the collision on its

However, the function will be enabled the

own. To obtain full brake force, the driver

next time the engine is started, regardless of

must depress the brake pedal. This could

whether the system was enabled or disabled

then make it possible to prevent a collision,

when the engine was switched off.

even at speed differences above 15 km/h.

13 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
206

07 Driver support

WARNING
The laser sensor also transmits laser light when City SafetyTM is disabled manually.
Related information
· City SafetyTM (p. 205) · City SafetyTM - limitations (p. 207) · City SafetyTM - function (p. 205) · City SafetyTM - laser sensor (p. 209)

City SafetyTM - limitations The sensor in City SafetyTM is designed to detect cars and other large vehicles in front of the car irrespective of whether it is day or night. However, the function has a number of limitations.
However, the sensor has limitations and has poorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g. heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust storms or white-out situations. Mist, dirt, ice

City SafetyTM is not activated at low speeds under 4 km/h, which is why the system does not intervene in situations where a vehicle in front is being approached very slowly, e.g. when parking. Driver commands are always prioritised, which is why City SafetyTM does not intervene in situations where the driver is steering or accelerating in a clear manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.

· City SafetyTM - symbols and messages (p.
211)

or snow on the windscreen may disrupt the function.

When City SafetyTM has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains sta-

· MY CAR (p. 103)

Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function.

tionary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front.

The laser beam from the sensor in City SafetyTM measures how the light is reflected. The sensor cannot detect objects with low reflection capacity. The rear sections of the

On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when City SafetyTM has stopped the car, unless the driver manages to depress the clutch pedal beforehand.

vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently thanks to the number plate and rear light

NOTE

reflectors.

· Keep the windscreen surface in front

On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the capacity of City SafetyTM to avoid a collision.

of the laser sensor free from ice, snow

and dirt (see the illustration for sensor location (p. 205)).

In such situations the ABS and DSTC sys-

· Do not affix or mount anything on the

tems will provide best possible braking force

windscreen in front of the laser sensor

with maintained stability.

· Remove ice and snow from the bonnet

When your own car is reversing, City SafetyTM is temporarily deactivated.

- snow and ice must not exceed a height of 5 cm.

207

07 Driver support

|| Fault tracing and action If the message Windscreen Sensors blocked is shown in the combined instrument panel it indicates that the laser sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of the car. This means in turn that City SafetyTM is not operational.
The Windscreen Sensors blocked message is not shown for all situations in which the laser sensor is blocked. The driver must therefore be diligent about keeping the windscreen and area in front of the laser sensor clean.
The following table presents possible causes for the message being shown, along with suggestions for appropriate action.

Cause

Action

The windscreen surface in front of the laser sensor is dirty or covered with ice or snow.

Clean the windscreen surface in front of the sensor from dirt, ice and snow.

The laser sensor field Remove the of vision is blocked. blocking object.

IMPORTANT
If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips in the windscreen in front of either of the laser sensor's "windows" and they cover a surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm (or larger), then a workshop must be contacted for replacement of the windscreen (see the illustration for sensor location (p. 205)) - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Failure to take action may result in reduced performance for City SafetyTM.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or reduced operation for City SafetyTM, the following also applies:
· Volvo recommends that you do not
repair cracks, scratches or stone chips in the area in front of the laser sensor instead, the whole windscreen should be replaced.
· Before replacing a windscreen, con-
tact an authorised Volvo workshop to verify that the correct windscreen is ordered and fitted.
· The same type or Volvo-approved
windscreen wipers must be fitted during replacement.

Related information
· City SafetyTM (p. 205) · City SafetyTM - function (p. 205) · City SafetyTM - operation (p. 206)

· City SafetyTM - laser sensor (p. 209) · City SafetyTM - symbols and messages (p.
211)

208

07 Driver support

City SafetyTM - laser sensor The City SafetyTM function includes a sensor which transmits laser light (see illustration (p. 205) for sensor location). Contact a qualified workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. It is absolutely essential to follow the prescribed instructions when handling the laser sensor.
The following two labels relate to the laser sensor:

· IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies
with FDA (U.S. Food Administration) standards for laser product design with the exception of deviations in accordance with "Laser Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001.
Radiation data for the laser sensor The following table specifies the laser sensor's physical data.

Maximum pulse energy Maximum average output Pulse duration Divergence (horizontal x vertical)

2.64 µJ 45 mW 33 ns 28° × 12°

The upper label in the figure describes the laser beam's classification:
· Laser radiation - Do not look into the
laser beam with optical instruments Class 1M laser product. The lower label in the figure describes the laser beam's physical data:

WARNING

If any of these instructions are not followed then there is a risk of eye injury!

· Never look into the laser sensor (which
emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at a distance of 100 mm or closer with magnifying optics such as a magnifying glass, microscope, lens or similar optical instruments.

· Testing, repair, removal, adjustment
and/or replacement of the laser sensor's spare parts must only be carried out by a qualified workshop - we recommend an authorised Volvo workshop.

· To avoid exposure to harmful radia-
tion, do not carry out any readjustments or maintenance other than those specified here.

· The repairer must follow specially
drawn up workshop information for the laser sensor.

· Do not remove the laser sensor (this

includes removing the lenses). A

removed laser sensor does not fulfil

laser class 3B as per standard IEC

60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eye-

safe and therefore entails a risk of

injury.

· The laser sensor's connector must be
unplugged before removal from the windscreen.

}} 209

07 Driver support
||
· The laser sensor must be fitted onto
the windscreen before the sensor's connector is plugged in.
· The laser sensor transmits a laser light
when the remote control key is in key position II (p. 70) even if the engine is switched off. Related information
· City SafetyTM (p. 205) · City SafetyTM - limitations (p. 207) · City SafetyTM - function (p. 205) · City SafetyTM - operation (p. 206) · City SafetyTM - symbols and messages (p.
211)
07
210

07 Driver support

City SafetyTM - symbols and messages In conjunction with automatic braking by the City SafetyTM (p. 205) system, one or more
Symbol Message Auto braking by City Safety

symbols may illuminate in the combined instrument panel and a text message may be shown. A text message can be acknowledged

by briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.

Meaning/Action City SafetyTM is braking or has automatically braked.

Windscreen Sensors blocked City Safety Service required

The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
· Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about laser sensor limitations (p. 207).
City SafetyTM is not operational.
· Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information

· City SafetyTM (p. 205)

· City SafetyTM - limitations (p. 207)

· City SafetyTM - function (p. 205)

· City SafetyTM - operation (p. 206)

· City SafetyTM - laser sensor (p. 209)

211

07 Driver support

Collision warning system* "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation. Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention. Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection may prevent a collision or reduce the collision speed.

two variants, depending on how the car is equipped: Level 1 The driver is merely warned14 of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals - no automatic braking intervenes, the driver must himself brake. Level 2 The driver is warned of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals - the car is braked automatically if the driver himself does not act within a reasonable time.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of components included in Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection must only be carried out in a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

· Collision warning system* - general limita-
tions (p. 218)
· Collision warning system* - camera sen-
sor limitations (p. 220)
· Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 222)

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedes-

trian Detection must not be used as an

Related information

excuse for the driver to change his/her driving · Collision warning system* - function (p.

style. If the driver solely relies on Collision

213)

Warning with Auto Brake to do the braking,

there might be a risk of a collision sooner or

later.

· Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 216)
· Collision warning system* - cyclist detec-

Two system levels

tion (p. 214)

The Collision Warning with Auto Brake &

· Collision warning system* - operation (p.

Pedestrian Detection function is available in

217)

14 No warning for cyclists with "Level 1".

212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

Collision warning system* - function "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

3. Auto Brake16 The collision warning system and City SafetyTM (p. 205) complement each other.
1 - Collision warning The driver is first warned of a potentially imminent collision. The collision warning system detects pedestrians, stationary vehicles as well as vehicles driving in the same direction in front of the car. If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian or a vehicle then the driver's attention is attracted with a flashing red warning signal (1) and an acoustic signal.

3 - Auto Brake16 The automatic brake function is activated last.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started to take evasive action and the risk of collision is imminent then the automatic braking function is deployed - this takes place irrespective of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then takes place with full brake force in order to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision. For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.

2 - Brake support16

If the risk of collision has increased further

after the collision warning then the brake sup-

Function overview15.

port is activated.

Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk. Radar sensor16

This means that the brake system is prepared for rapid braking by applying the brakes lightly, which may feel like a slight jolt.

Camera sensor Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes

If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently quickly then full brake function is implemented.

three steps in the following order:

Brake support also reinforces the driver's

1. Collision warning 2. Brake support16

braking if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision.

15 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 16 With system Level 2 only.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

}} 213

07 Driver support

|| WARNING

The collision warning system does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road conditions. The collision warning system does not react to vehicles or cyclists driving in another direction to the car or to animals. Warning only activated in the event of a high risk for collision. This section "Function" and the section "Limitations" inform about limitations that the driver must be aware of before using the Collision Warning system with Auto Brake. Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at a vehicle speed exceeding 80 km/h.

Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists do not work in darkness and tunnels - not even when streetlights are lit.

The auto-brake function can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed. To ensure full brake performance, the driver should always depress the brake pedal - even when the car auto-brakes.

Never wait for a collision warning. The

driver is always responsible that the correct distance and speed are maintained -

even when the collision warning system

with auto-brake is used.

Related information
· Collision warning system* (p. 212) · Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 216)
· Collision warning system* - cyclist detec-
tion (p. 214)
· Collision warning system* - operation (p.
217)
· Collision warning system* - general limita-
tions (p. 218)
· Collision warning system* - camera sen-
sor limitations (p. 220)
· Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 222)

Collision warning system* - cyclist detection "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

Optimum examples of what the system interprets as a cyclist - with clear body and bicycle contours, directly from behind and in the car's centre line. Optimal performance of the system requires that the system function that detects a cyclist receives as unambiguous information as possible about the body and bicycle contours this implies the opportunity to identify the bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body combined with a normal human pattern of movement.

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect a cyclist.

· The function's capacity to detect cyclists
at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the human eye.

Related information
· Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 216)

· The function's capacity to detect cyclists
is deactivated when driving in darkness and tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.
· For optimum bicycle detection, the City
SafetyTM function must be activated, City SafetyTM (p. 205).

· Collision warning system* (p. 212) · Collision warning system* - function (p.
213)
· Collision warning system* - operation (p.
217)
· Collision warning system* - general limita-
tions (p. 218)

WARNING

· Collision warning system* - camera sen-

The function can only "see" cyclists from behind, who are travelling in the same direction.

Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Cyclist Detection is a means of assistance. The function cannot detect:
· all cyclists in all situations and does

sor limitations (p. 220)
· Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 222)

· For the function to be able to detect a
cyclist, he/she must be an adult and riding a "senior bicycle".

not see partially obscured cyclists, for example.
· cyclists in clothing that obscures the

· The bicycle must be equipped with a
highly visible and approved17 rearwardfacing red reflector, fitted at least 70 cm above the roadway.

contours of the body or who are approaching from the side.
· bicycles that have no rearward-facing
red reflector.

· The function can only detect cyclists

· bicycles loaded with large objects.

directly from behind and who are travel-

The driver is always responsible that the

ling in the same direction - not at an

vehicle is driven properly and with a safety

angle from behind, not from the side.

distance adapted to the speed.

· Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand
edge of the car's imagined/extended side lines may be detected late or not at all.

17 The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215

07 Driver support

Collision warning system* - detection of pedestrians "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

If large parts of the body are not visible to the camera then the system cannot detect a pedestrian.
· In order for a pedestrian to be detected
he/she must appear full-length and have a height of at least 80 cm.
· The system cannot detect a pedestrian
carrying larger items.
· The camera sensor's ability to see pedes-
trians at dusk and dawn is limited - just like the human eye.
· The camera sensor's capacity to detect
pedestrians is deactivated when driving in darkness and tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.

Related information
· Collision warning system* (p. 212) · Collision warning system* - function (p.
213)
· Collision warning system* - operation (p.
217)
· Collision warning system* - cyclist detec-
tion (p. 214)
· Collision warning system* - general limita-
tions (p. 218)
· Collision warning system* - camera sen-
sor limitations (p. 220)
· Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 222)

Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedestrians with clear body contours.

Optimal performance of the system requires

that the system function that detects pedes-

trians receives as unambiguous information

as possible about the contours of the body -

this implies the opportunity to identify the

head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower

body combined with a normal human pattern

of movement.

WARNING
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection is an assistance tool. This function cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and it cannot see e.g. partially obscured pedestrians, people in clothing that hides the contours of the body or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.
· The driver is always responsible that
the vehicle is driven properly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.

216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

Collision warning system* - operation "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.
Settings for the collision warning system are made from MY CAR via the centre console screen and menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103). Warning signals On and Off You can select whether the collision warning system's acoustic and visual warning signals should be switched on or off. When starting the engine, the setting that was selected when the engine was switched off is obtained automatically.
NOTE
The Brake Support and Auto Brake functions are always enabled - they cannot be deactivated.
Light and acoustic signals Both the light and acoustic signals can be deactivated after starting the engine. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).

The warning lamp (see (1) in the illustration (p. 213)) is tested each time the engine is started by briefly lighting the separate light points of the warning lamp if the visual and acoustic warning of the collision warning system is activated.

NOTE
When the adaptive cruise control is in use the warning lamp and warning sound will be used by the cruise control even if the collision warning system is switched off. The collision warning system warns the

Acoustic signal The warning sound can be activated/deactivated separately in the menu system MY

driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but the function cannot shorten driver reaction time.

CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).

In order for the collision warning system to be effective, always drive with Distance Warning (p. 202) set at time interval 45.

Set warning distance

The warning distance regulates the distance at which the visual and acoustic warnings are

NOTE

deployed. The warning distance is set in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103). The warning distance determines the sys-

Even if the warning distance has been set to Long warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations, e.g. when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles in front brake heavily.

tem's sensitivity. Warning distance Long pro-

vides an earlier warning. First test with Long and if this setting produces too many warn-

WARNING

ings, which could be perceived as irritating in

No automatic system can guarantee

certain situations, then change to warning

100 % correct function in all situations.

distance Normal. Only use warning distance Short in excep-

Therefore, never test Collision Warning with Auto Brake by driving at people or vehicles - this may cause severe damage

tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.

and injury and risk lives.

Checking settings The settings required can be controlled on the centre console display screen. Search with the menu system (p. 103) MY CAR.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

}} 217

07 Driver support
|| Maintenance

Camera and radar sensor18. For the sensors to work correctly, they must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement.

Related information

· Collision warning system* (p. 212)

· Collision warning system* - function (p.
213)

· Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 216)

· Collision warning system* - cyclist detec-
tion (p. 214)
· Collision warning system* - general limita-
tions (p. 218)
· Collision warning system* - camera sen-
sor limitations (p. 220)
· Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 222)

Collision warning system* - general limitations "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction. The function has certain limitations - for example, it is not active until approx. 4 km/h..
The collision warning system's visual warning signal (see (1) in the illustration (p. 213)) may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead. The warning sound should therefore always be activated. On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the capacity to avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability.

18 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
218 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

NOTE
The visual warning signal can be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example. If this occurs then the warning sound is activated even if it is deactivated in the menu system.
· Warnings may not appear if the dis-
tance to the vehicle in front is small or if steering wheel and pedal movements are large, e.g. a very active driving style.

WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic situation or external influences mean that

Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged. Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not activated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is

the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front correctly.

why the system does not intervene in situations where the car is approaching a vehicle in front very slowly, e.g. when parking.

The sensor system has a limited range for pedestrians and cyclists19 - the system can provide effective warnings and brake interventions for them at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h. For stationary or slow-moving

In situations where the driver demonstrates active, aware driving behaviour, a collision warning may be postponed slightly in order to keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.

vehicles, warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h. Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles could be disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility. Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h.

When Auto Brake has prevented a collision with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed as that maintained by the vehicle in front. On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless the driver manages to depress the

The collision warning system uses the same

clutch pedal beforehand.

radar sensors as the Adaptive cruise control

Related information

(p. 188). Read more about radar sensor limitations (p. 197). If warnings are perceived as being too fre-

· Collision warning system* (p. 212) · Collision warning system* - function (p.
213)

quent or disturbing then the warning distance can be reduced (p. 217). This would lead to the system warning at a later stage, which reduces the total number of warnings.

· Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 216)
· Collision warning system* - cyclist detec-
tion (p. 214)

19 For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

}} 219

07 Driver support

· Collision warning system* - operation (p.
217)
· Collision warning system* - camera sen-
sor limitations (p. 220)
· Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 222)
07

Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction. The function uses the car's camera sensor, which has certain limitations.
The car's camera sensor is also used - as well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake - by the functions:
· Automatic main/dipped beam dim-
ming (p. 82)
· Road sign information (p. 179) · Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 224) · Lane Keeping Aid (p. 229)
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and dirt. Do not stick or attach anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one or more of the systems dependent on the camera to stop working.
The camera sensors have limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in

darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for example. Under such conditions the functions of camera-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged. Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings could also significantly reduce camera sensor function when it is used to scan the carriageway and detect pedestrians and other vehicles. The field of vision of the camera sensor is limited, which is why pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles cannot be detected in some situations, or they are detected later than anticipated. During very high temperatures the camera is temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started in order to protect camera functionality.
Fault tracing and action If the display shows the message Windscreen Sensors blocked then this means that the camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles or road markings in front of the car. At the same time, this means that - besides Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the Automatic main/dipped beam dimming, Road Sign Information, Driver Alert Control and Lane

220 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keeping Aid functions will not have full functionality either. The following table presents possible causes for a message being shown along with the appropriate action.

Cause The windscreen surface in front of the camera is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Thick fog, heavy rain or snow means that the camera does not work sufficiently well.

Action Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera from dirt, ice and snow. No action. At times the camera does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.

Cause The windscreen surface in front of the camera has been cleaned but the message remains. Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera.

Action Wait. It may take several minutes for the camera to measure the visibility.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the camera cover cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information
· Collision warning system* (p. 212) · Collision warning system* - function (p.
213)
· Collision warning system* - cyclist detec-
tion (p. 214)
· Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 216)
· Collision warning system* - operation (p.
217)
· Collision warning system* - general limita-
tions (p. 218)
· Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 222)

07 Driver support
07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 221

07 Driver support

Collision warning system* - symbols and messages "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to

assist the driver when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.

SymbolA Message Collis'n warning OFF
Collision warn. Unavailable
Auto braking was activated

Specification
Collision warning system switched off. Shown when the engine is started. The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
The collision warning system cannot be activated. Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function. The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Auto Brake has been active. The message clears after one press of the OK button.

Windscreen Sensors blocked

222 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

SymbolA Message Radar blocked See manual
Collision warn. Service required

Specification
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged. The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor. Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 197).
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
· Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

Related information
· Collision warning system* (p. 212)

· Collision warning system* - function (p.
213)

· Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 216)

· Collision warning system* - cyclist detec-
tion (p. 214)

· Collision warning system* - operation (p.
217)

· Collision warning system* - general limita-

tions (p. 218)

· Collision warning system* - camera sen-

sor limitations (p. 220)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 223

07 Driver support

Driver Alert System* The Driver Alert System is intended to assist drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are driving on.
The Driver Alert System consists of different functions which can either be switched on at the same time or individually:
· Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 225). · Lane Departure Warning - LDW (p. 229). · Lane Keeping Aid - LKA (p. 234)
A switched-on function is set in standby mode and is not activated automatically until speed exceeds 65 km/h.

Related information
· Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 224) · Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages (p. 227)
· Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p.
225)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 229) · Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 234)

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* The DAC function is intended to attract the driver's attention when he/she starts to drive less consistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads. The function is not intended for city traffic.

The function is deactivated again when speed decreases to below 60 km/h.

Both functions use a camera which is dependent on the lane having side markings painted on each side.

WARNING

Driver Alert System does not work in all

situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.

A camera detects the side markings painted on the carriageway and compares the section of the road with the driver's steering wheel movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the carriageway evenly. In some cases driving ability is not affected despite driver fatigue. In which case there may not be any warning issued for the driver. For this reason it is always important to stop and take a break in the event of any signs of

224 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

driver fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC issues a warning.
NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a period of driving. Always plan breaks at regular intervals, and make sure you are well rested.
Limitation In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for example:
· in strong side winds · on rutted road surfaces.
NOTE

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation Settings are made from the centre console display screen and its menu system. For information on how the menu system is used, see MY CAR (p. 103).
Depending on whether the car has Lane Departure Warning - LDW (p. 229) or Lane Keeping Aid - LKA (p. 234) the screen can show one of the following options:

Car with LKA can show this on the screen. The Driver Alert function can be set in standby mode. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).

The camera sensor has certain limitations (p. 220).
Related information
· Driver Alert System* (p. 224) · Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p.
225)
· Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages (p. 227)

Car with LDW can show this on the screen.

Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds 65 km/h and remains active as long as the speed is over 60 km/h.

If the vehicle is being driven errati-

cally, the driver is notified by an

acoustic signal plus the text mes-

sage Driver Alert Time for a break

- the linked symbol is illuminated in the com-

bined instrument panel at the same time. The

warning is repeated after a time if driving abil-

ity does not improve.

The warning symbol can go off:

· Press the left stalk switch OK button.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 225

07 Driver support
|| WARNING
An alarm should be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her own condition. In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon as possible and rest. Studies have shown that it is equally as dangerous to drive while tired as it is under the influence of alcohol. Related information
· Driver Alert System* (p. 224) · Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 224) · Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages (p. 227)
07
226 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and messages DAC (p. 224) can show symbols and text messages on the combined instrument panel

or in the centre console's display screen in different situations.

Combined instrument panel SymbolA Message

Specification

Driver Alert Time for a break

The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.

Windscreen Sensors blocked Driver Alert Sys Service required

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
· Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 220).
The system is disengaged.
· Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

Display

Sym- Message

Specification

bolA

Driver Alert OFF

The function is disengaged.

Driver Alert Available

The function is activated.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

}} 227

07 Driver support

|| SymbolA

Message

Specification

Driver Alert Standby <65 km/h The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.

Driver Alert Unavailable

The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 220).

A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

Related information
· Driver Alert System* (p. 224) · Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 224) · Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation (p.
225)

07
228 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* Lane Departure Warning is one of the functions in the Driver Alert System - sometimes also referred to as LDW (Lane Departure Warning). The function is intended for use on motorways and similar major roads in order to reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally leaving its own lane in certain situations.

Principle for LDW

· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 230)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera-
tion (p. 230)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 232)

Lane Departure Warning LDW or LKA

Volvo has developed two different systems

for lane keeping assistance:

(The figure is schematic - not model specific.)

· LDW - Lane Departure Warning which
only warns the driver.
· LKA - Lane Keeping Aid
(Lane Keeping Aid) which, in addition to warning the driver, also actively steers the car.
The Volvo V60 can be supplied with both vari-

LDW consists of a camera that detects the side lines painted on the road/lane. If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand side line of the carriageway without due cause then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal.

ants - market and engine alternatives determine which of the systems the car is equip-

NOTE

ped with.

The driver is only warned once each time the wheels cross a line. So there is no

In the event of uncertainty whether the car has LDW or LKA:

acoustic alarm when there is a line between the car's wheels.

· Open the menu system MY CAR and
locate Settings Driver support system - which specifies Lane Departure Warning whether the car has LDW or Lane Keeping Aid for LKA.

Related information
· Driver Alert System* (p. 224) · Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
tions (p. 231)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 229

07 Driver support

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) function Certain settings can be made for the Lane Departure Warning function.
Off & On

· On at start-up - The function enters
standby mode every time the engine is started. Otherwise the same value as when the engine was switched off is obtained.
· Increased sensitivity - The sensitivity
increases, an alarm is triggered earlier and fewer limitations apply.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) operation LDW is complemented in the combined instrument panel with intuitive graphics in different situations. Here are some examples:

Related information
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 229) · Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
tions (p. 231)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera-
tion (p. 230)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 232)

LDW is engaged or disengaged using a button on the centre console. An indicator lamp in the button illuminates when the function is switched on.

This function is complemented in the com-

bined instrument panel with intuitive graphics

in different situations.

Personal preferences

Settings are made from the centre console's

screen via the menu system in MY CAR. For

a description of the menu system, see MY

CAR (p. 103).

Select from the options:

The LDW function's side lines (marked in red in the figure).
· The LDW symbol has WHITE side lines -
the function is active and detects/"sees" one side line, or both.
· The LDW symbol has GREY side lines -
the function is active but detects neither left nor right side line.
or
· The LDW symbol has GREY side lines -
the function is in standby mode because the speed is below 65 km/h.
· The LDW symbol has no side lines - the
function is deactivated.

230 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 229) · Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita-
tions (p. 231)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 230)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 232)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) limitations The Lane Keeping Aid camera sensor is restricted in a similar way to the human eye.
For more information, read about camera sensor limitations (p. 220).
NOTE
There are some situations where LDW does not give any warning, such as:
· Direction indicators are switched on · The driver has his/her foot on the
brake pedal20
· In the event of rapid depression of the
accelerator pedal20
· In the event of rapid steering wheel
movements20
· If turning is so sharp that the car rolls.
Related information
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 229) · Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 230)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera-
tion (p. 230)
· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 232)

07 Driver support
07

20 When "Increased sensitivity" is selected a warning is still given, see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function (p. 230).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231

07 Driver support

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) symbols and messages In situations where there is no LDW function a symbol may be shown in the combined

instrument panel in combination with an explanatory message - follow the recommendation given if appropriate.

Message examples:

SymbolA Message

Specification

Lane departure warning ON/ Lane departure warning OFF

The function is switched on/off. Shown at switch-on/off. The text disappears after 5 seconds.

Lane Depart. Warning Unavail- The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h. able at this speed

Lane Depart. Warning Unavail- The lane does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

able

Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 220).

Lane Depart. Warning Available

The function scans the lane's side markings.

Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.

Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.

· Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.

Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 220).

Driver Alert Sys Service

The system is disengaged.

required

· Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

A Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.

232

07 Driver support
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 233

07 Driver support

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)*

Principle for LKA

Related information
· Driver Alert System* (p. 224)

Lane Keeping Aid is one of the functions in the Driver Alert System - sometimes also referred to as LKA (Lane Keeping Aid). The function is intended for use on motor-

· Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - limitations (p.
237)
· Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - function (p.
235)

ways and similar major roads in order to reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally leaving its own lane in certain situations.
Lane Departure Warning LDW or LKA Volvo has developed two different systems for lane keeping assistance:
· LDW - Lane Departure Warning which
only warns the driver.
· LKA - Lane Keeping Aid
(Lane Keeping Aid) which, in addition to warning the driver, also actively steers the car.

(The figure is schematic - not model specific.) A camera detects the painted the side lines of the road/lane. If the car is about to cross a side line, the Lane Keeping Aid will actively steer the car back into the lane with a slight steering torque in the steering wheel.

· Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - opera-
tion (p. 230)
· Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - operation (p.
236)
· Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - symbols and
messages (p. 238)

The Volvo V60 can be supplied with both variants - market and engine alternatives determine which of the systems the car is equip-

If the car reaches or crosses a side line, the Lane Keeping Aid will also alert the driver with pulsating vibration in the steering wheel.

ped with.

In the event of uncertainty whether the car

has LDW or LKA:

· Open the menu system MY CAR and

WARNING
LKA is merely a driver's aid and does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road conditions.

locate Settings Driver support system - which specifies Lane Departure Warning whether the car has LDW or Lane Keeping Aid for LKA.

The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable laws and road traffic regulations are followed.

234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - function
Certain settings can be made for the Lane Departure Warning function. Off & On The Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed interval 65-200 km/h on roads with clearly visible side lines. The function is temporarily deactivated on narrow roads with less than 2.6 metres between the lane's side lines.

the function is instead handled in the car's menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).
In addition, the following selections can be made in MY CAR:
· Warning with vibration in the steering
wheel: - On or Off.
· Active steering: - On or Off. · Both, Warning with vibration in the steer-
ing wheel and Active steering: - On or Off.
Active steering The Lane Keeping Aid strives to keep the car within the side lines for the lane.

Press the button in the centre console to activate or deactivate the function. The function is switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the button. Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for an On/Off button in the centre console - in which case

LKA intervenes and steers away. If the vehicle approaches the left or right side line of the lane and the direction indicator is

21 The figure shows 3 pulsating vibration when the side line is crossed.

not activated, the car is steered back into the lane. Warning with vibration in steering wheel
LKA steers and warns with pulsating steering wheel vibration21. If the vehicle crosses a side line, the Lane Keeping Aid warns the driver with pulsating vibration in the steering wheel. This occurs regardless of whether the car is actively steered back by applying a slight steering torque.
07
}} 235

07 Driver support
|| Dynamic cornering

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - operation
Lane Keeping Aid is supplemented with selfexplanatory graphics in different situations. Here are some examples:
NOTE
LKA is temporarily deactivated for as long as the direction indicator is switched on.

LKA does not intervene in sharp inside bends.

LKA intervenes on the right-hand side (marked in red in the figure).

In certain cases, the Lane Keeping Aid allows the car to cross side lines without engaging active steering or warning with pulsating

The Lane Keeping Aid intervenes and steers away from the side line - this is indicated with:

vibration in the steering wheel. Using an adjacent lane for dynamic cornering when there is

· RED line for the side in question.

a clear line of vision is an example of one such case.

Related information
· Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 234)

· Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - limitations (p.

237)

· Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - operation (p.
236)

· Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - symbols and
messages (p. 238)

LKA "sees" and follows the side lines (marked in red in the figure). If the Lane Keeping Aid is active and detects/"sees" the side lines, the LKA symbol indicates this with WHITE lines.
· GREY side line - the Lane Keeping Aid
does not see a line on that side of the car.

· Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - limitations (p.
237)
· Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - function (p. 235) · Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - symbols and
messages (p. 238)

236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - limitations
The Lane Keeping Aid camera sensor is restricted in a similar way to the human eye.
· For more information, read about camera
sensor limitations (p. 220) and seeCollision warning system* - operation (p. 217).
NOTE
In certain demanding situations LKA may find it difficult to assist the driver correctly - in which case it is recommended that LKA is switched off. Examples of such a situation could be:
· roadworks · winter road conditions · poor road surface · very sporty driving style · poor weather with reduced visibility.

Related information
· Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 234) · Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - function (p. 235) · Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - operation (p.
236)
· Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - symbols and
messages (p. 238)

Hands on the steering wheel

In order for Lane Keeping Aid to operate, the

driver must have his/her hands on the steer-

ing wheel. LKA continually monitors this. If

hands are not detected on the steering wheel

then a text message is shown, prompting the

driver to actively steer the car.

If the driver does not follow the request to begin steering, Lane Keeping Aid goes into standby mode and will remain in this mode until the driver begins to steer the car again.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237

07 Driver support

Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - symbols and messages

In situations where there is no LKA function or it is interrupted, a symbol may be shown in the combined instrument panel in combina-

tion with an explanatory message - follow the recommendation given if appropriate. Message examples:

SymbolA Message

Specification

Lane Keeping Aid Unavail- The Lane Keeping Aid is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h. able at this speed

Lane Keeping Aid Unavailable for current markings

The lane does not have clear side lines or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 220) and Collision warning system* - operation (p. 217).

Lane Keeping Aid Available

The function scans the lane's side lines.

Windscreen sensors blocked See manual

The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
· Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations (p. 220) and Collision warning system* - operation (p. 217).

Lane Keeping Aid Service required

The system is disengaged.
· Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Lane Keeping Aid Interrupted

LKA has been set to standby mode. The lines of the LKA symbol indicate when the function is active again.

A The table's symbols are schematic. The symbols shown in the combined instrument panel may have a slightly different appearance.

238 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information
· Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 234) · Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - limitations (p.
237)
· Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - function (p. 235) · Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - operation (p.
236)

07 Driver support

07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239

07 Driver support

Park Assist* Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance sound level can be adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal using the centre console's VOL knob. The sound level can also be adjusted in the audio settings menu, which is accessed by pressing SOUND or in the car's menu system (p. 103) MY CAR22. Parking assistance is available in two variants:
· Rear only · Both front and rear.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures the parking space.

WARNING · Parking assistance does not relinquish
the driver's own responsibility during parking.
· The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
· Be aware of e.g. people or animals
near the car.
Related information
· Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 243)
· Park assist syst* - function (p. 240) · Park assist syst* - forward (p. 242) · Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 243) · Park assist syst* - backward (p. 241) · Park assist camera (p. 244)

Park assist syst* - function The parking assistance system is automatically activated when the engine is started the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.
On/Off for parking assistance and CTA*. If the car is equipped with CTA (p. 255) the indicator lamps flash for BLIS (p. 253) once, then parking assistance is activated using the button.

22 Depending on the audio and media system.
240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and are then temporarily not detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone may then unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone.

Park assist syst* - backward Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.

The sensors cannot detect high objects, such as projecting loading docks.

Display screen view - showing an obstacle left front and right rear. The centre console's display screen shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacle.

· In such situations, pay extra attention
and manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current parking manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of damage to vehicles or other objects since the sensors are temporarily unable to function optimally.

Marked sectors show which of the four sensor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the car symbol a selected sector box is, the shorter the distance between the car and a detected obstacle.

Related information
· Park Assist* (p. 240) · Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 243)

The distance covered to the rear of the car is about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles behind comes from one of the rear loudspeakers.

The frequency of the signal increases the shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of or behind the car. Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically. When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is

· Park assist syst* - forward (p. 242) · Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 243) · Park assist syst* - backward (p. 241) · Park assist camera (p. 244)

Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged. When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the towbar, rear parking assistance is switched off automatically - otherwise the sensors would

constant and the active sensor's field nearest

react to the trailer.

the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is

within the distance for the constant tone both

behind and in front of the car, then the tone

sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241

07 Driver support

|| NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to be switched off manually in order that the sensors do not react to them.
Related information
· Park Assist* (p. 240) · Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 243)
· Park assist syst* - function (p. 240) · Park assist syst* - forward (p. 242) · Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 243) · Park assist camera (p. 244)

Park assist syst* - forward Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.
The parking assistance system is automatically activated when the engine is started the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.

NOTE
Front parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied or P mode is selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember that these must not obscure the sensors the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an obstacle.
Related information
· Park Assist* (p. 240) · Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 243)
· Park assist syst* - function (p. 240) · Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 243) · Park assist syst* - backward (p. 241) · Park assist camera (p. 244)

The distance covered in front of the car is

about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for

obstacles in front comes from one of the front

loudspeakers.

Front park assist is active up to approx. 10 km/h. The lamp in the button is illuminated in order to indicate that the system is activated. When the speed is below 10 km/h the system is reactivated.

242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

Park assist syst* - fault indication Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.
If the combined instrument panel's information symbol illuminates with constant glow and the text message Park assist syst Service required is shown then parking assistance is disengaged.

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the centre console's display screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and car shampoo.

IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning signals that are caused by external sound sources that emit the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works with. Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Related information
· Park Assist* (p. 240) · Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 243)
· Park assist syst* - function (p. 240) · Park assist syst* - forward (p. 242) · Park assist syst* - backward (p. 241) · Park assist camera (p. 244)

Sensor location, front.

Sensor location, rear.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.

Related information
· Park Assist* (p. 240)

· Park assist syst* - function (p. 240)

· Park assist syst* - forward (p. 242)

· Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 243)

· Park assist syst* - backward (p. 241)

· Park assist camera (p. 244)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243

07 Driver support

Park assist camera The parking camera is an assist system and is activated when reverse gear is engaged (can be changed in the settings menu (p. 246)). The camera image is shown on the centre console's screen.

Function and operation

NOTE

When a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures the parking space.

CAM button location.

WARNING
· The parking camera serves as an aid.
It does not relieve the driver of responsibility when reversing.
· The camera has blind spots, where
obstacles cannot be detected.

The camera shows what is behind the car and if something appears from the sides. The camera shows a wide area behind the car and part of the bumper and any towbar. Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly - this is normal.

· Be aware of people and animals in the
vicinity of the car.

NOTE

Objects on the display screen may be

closer to the car than they appear to be on

the screen.

where the car's rear wheels will roll with the current steering wheel angle, this facilitates tight parking, reversing into tight spaces and for hitching a trailer. The car's approximate external dimensions are illustrated by means of two dashed lines. These park assist lines can be switched off in the settings menu. If the car is also equipped with parking assistance sensors* then their information is displayed graphically as coloured fields in order to illustrate the distance to detected obstacles, see the heading "Cars with reversing sensors" later in the text. The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after reverse gear has been disengaged or until the car's speed exceeds 10 km/h forward or 35 km/h backward.

If another view is active the parking camera system takes over automatically and the camera image is displayed on the screen. When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken lines are shown graphically which illustrate

Camera location next to the opening handle.

244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

Light conditions The camera image is adjusted automatically according to prevailing light conditions. Because of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness and quality. Poor light conditions can result in a slightly reduced image quality.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and ice to ensure optimum function. This is particularly important in poor light.
Park assist lines

ment, which shows the driver the path the car will then take - also when the car is turning.
NOTE · When reversing with a trailer which is
not connected electrically to the car, the lines on the display show the route the car will take - not the trailer.
· The screen shows no lines when a
trailer is connected electrically to the car's electrical system.
· The parking camera is deactivated
automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.

Boundary lines
The system's different lines23. Boundary line, free reversing zone

IMPORTANT

"Wheel tracks"

Bear in mind that the screen only shows the area behind the car - pay attention to the sides and front of the car when manoeuvring during reversing.
Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed for the driver. The lines on the screen are projected as if they were at ground level behind the car and are directly related to steering wheel move-

The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also the limit of the car's most protruding parts, such as door mirrors and corners - also when the car is turning.

The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side

lines indicate where the wheels will roll and

can extend about 3.2 m back from the

bumper if no obstacle is in the way.

23 The figure is schematic and does not show the model in question in an accurate way.

}} 245

07 Driver support
|| Cars with reversing sensors*

· Park Assist* (p. 240)

Four coloured areas (one per sensor) show distance. If the car is also equipped with parking assistance sensors (parking assistance sensors (p. 240)) the distance indication will be more precise and the coloured areas show which of the 4 sensors is/are registering an obstacle.

Colour / paint Distance (metres)

Light yellow

0.71.5

Yellow

Orange

0,50,7 0,30,5

Red

00.3

Related information
· Park assist camera - settings (p. 246) · Park assist camera - limitations (p. 247)

246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Park assist camera - settings The parking camera is an assist system and is activated when reverse gear is engaged.
Settings To change the settings for the parking camera:
1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is shown.
2. Turn to reach the desired option with OK/ MENU.
3. Press OK/MENU and back out with EXIT. or
1. Press CAM. 2. Press OK/MENU. 3. Turn to reach the desired option with OK/
MENU. 4. Press OK/MENU and back out with EXIT.
Miscellaneous The default setting is that the camera is activated when reverse gear is engaged.
· One press on CAM activates the camera
even if reverse gear is not engaged.
· Change between normal and zoomed
image by turning TUNE or by pressing CAM.
Towbar The camera can be used with advantage for coupling a trailer. A park assist line for the

07 Driver support

towbar's intended "trajectory" toward the trailer can be shown on the screen - just as for the "wheel tracks".
· If precise manoeuvring is required then
the towbar can be zoomed in by pressing CAM - pressing the button again returns to normal view. The towbar's park assist line is activated in the menu system after pressing OK/MENU where you can select to display either the "wheel tracks" or the towbar's trajectory both options cannot be shown simultaneously.
Related information
· Park assist camera (p. 244) · Park assist camera - limitations (p. 247) · Park Assist* (p. 240) · MY CAR (p. 103)

Park assist camera - limitations The parking camera is an assist system and is activated when reverse gear is engaged.
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on the rear of the car could obscure the camera's view.
To bear in mind Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured, it could be a relatively large sector that is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go undetected until they are very close to the car.
· Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice
and snow.
· Clean the camera lens regularly with luke-
warm water and car shampoo - take care not to scratch the lens.

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* The Park Assist Pilot (PAP Park Assist Pilot) helps the driver to park by first checking whether a space is sufficiently large and then turning the steering wheel and steering the car into the space. The combined instrument panel uses symbols, graphics and text to show when different operations should be performed.

Related information
· Park assist camera (p. 244) · Park assist camera - settings (p. 246) · Park Assist* (p. 240)

The On/Off button is located on the centre console.

NOTE

When a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar is included when the function measures the parking space.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247

07 Driver support
|| WARNING
PAP does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid. The driver always has the final responsibility for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and for paying attention to the surroundings and other road users approaching or passing during parking.
Related information
· Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - symbols and
messages (p. 252)
· Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation (p.
249)
· Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function (p.
248)
· Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations (p.
251)
· Park Assist* (p. 240) · Park assist camera (p. 244)
07

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function The Park Assist Pilot (PAP Park Assist Pilot) helps the driver to park by first checking whether a space is sufficiently large and then turning the steering wheel and steering the car into the space. The combined instrument panel uses symbols, graphics and text to show when different operations should be performed.
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and turns the steering wheel - the driver's task is to follow the combined instrument panel's instructions and select the gear (reverse/forward), control the speed, brake and stop.
PAP can be activated if the following criteria are met once the engine has been started:
· The functions DSTC or ABS must not
intervene while the PAP function is enabled - these can be activated due to a steep or slippery surface, for example; see the sections on Foot brake and Stability and traction control system for more information.
· A trailer must not be connected to the
car.
· The speed must be below 50 km/h.

Principle for PAP. The PAP function parks the car using the following steps: 1. The function searches for a parking space
and measures it (A & B) - during measurement the speed must not exceed 30 km/h. 2. The car is steered into the space while reversing (C & D). 3. The car is straightened up in the space by driving back and forth (E & F ).
Related information
· Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - symbols and
messages (p. 252)
· Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation (p.
249)
· Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations (p.
251)
· Park Assist* (p. 240)

248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

· Park assist camera (p. 244) · Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 247)

07 Driver support

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation The Park Assist Pilot (PAP Park Assist Pilot) helps the driver to park by first checking whether a space is sufficiently large and then turning the steering wheel and steering the car into the space. The combined instrument panel uses symbols, graphics and text to show when different operations should be performed.
NOTE
Remember that certain steering wheel positions may obstruct the combined instrument panel's instructions when you turn it during the parking manoeuvre.

The PAP function searches for a parking space and checks whether it is big enough. Proceed as follows:
1. Activate PAP by pressing this button and do not drive faster than 30 km/h.
2. Keep an eye on the combined instrument panel and be prepared to stop the car when the graphics and text so request.
3. Stop the car when the graphics and text so request.

1 - Searching and checking measurements

NOTE
PAP searches the area for a parking space, displays instructions and guides the car in on its passenger side. But if required the car can also be parked on the driver's side of the street:
· Activate the direction indicator for the
driver's side - the car is then parked on that side of the street instead.
07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249

07 Driver support

|| 2 - Reversing in

NOTE
· Keep your hands away from the steer-
ing wheel when the PAP function is activated.
· Make sure that the steering wheel is
not hindered in any way and can rotate freely.
· For optimum results - Wait until the
steering wheel has been turned before starting to drive backwards/forwards.

During the Reversing step, PAP will steer the car into the parking space. Proceed as follows:
1. Check that the area behind the car is clear, then engage reverse gear.
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching the steering wheel - and no faster than approx. 7 km/h.
3. Keep an eye on the combined instrument panel and be prepared to stop the car when the graphics and text so request.

3 - Straightening up

When the car has reversed into the parking

space, it must be straightened up and stop-

ped.

1. Engage 1st gear or D position, wait until the steering wheel has been turned, then drive slowly forwards.
2. Stop the car when the graphics and text message so request.
3. Engage reverse gear and drive backwards slowly until the graphics and text message tell you to stop.
The function is disengaged automatically when parking is complete, and the graphics and text message show that parking is complete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct the positioning afterwards. Only the driver can determine whether the car is properly parked.
IMPORTANT
The warning distance is shorter when the sensors are used by Active Park Assist compared with when Park Assist uses the sensors.
Related information
· Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - symbols and
messages (p. 252)
· Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function (p. 248) · Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations (p.
251)
· Park Assist* (p. 240) · Park assist camera (p. 244) · Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 247)

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations The Park Assist Pilot (PAP Park Assist Pilot) helps the driver to park by first checking whether a space is sufficiently large and then turning the steering wheel and steering the car into the space. The combined instrument panel uses symbols, graphics and text to show when different operations should be performed.

IMPORTANT
Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable to find parking spaces - one reason for this may be the fact that there is interference with the sensors from external sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the system works. Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes

tem to drive as close to the side of the road as possible where you intend to park.
· Bear in mind that the front of the car may
swing out towards oncoming traffic while being parked.
· Objects situated higher than the detection
area of the sensors are not included when calculations are made for the parking manoeuvre. This may cause PAP to

The PAP sequence is stopped:
· if the car is driven too quickly - above
7 km/h
· if the driver touches the steering wheel · if the ABS or DSTC function is enabled -
e.g. if a wheel loses grip on a slippery road surface.

and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
To bear in mind The driver should bear in mind that the Park Assist Pilot is an aid - not an infallible, fullyautomatic function. The driver must therefore be prepared to intervene. There are also several details to bear in mind while parking, e.g.:

swing into the parking space too early for this reason, such parking spaces should be avoided.
· The driver is responsible for determining
whether the space selected by PAP is suitable for parking.
· Use approved tyres24 with the correct tyre
pressure - this affects PAP's ability to

A text message indicates why the PAP sequence was stopped.

· PAP starts out from the current location
of the parked vehicles - if they are inap-

park the car.
· Heavy rain or snow may cause the sys-

NOTE

propriately parked then the car's tyres and wheel rims may be damaged against

tem to measure the parking space incorrectly.

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors

kerbs.

· Do not use PAP if snow chains or the

will reduce their function and may prevent measurement.

· PAP is designed for parking on straight

spare wheel are fitted.

streets - not sharp bends or turns in the

· Do not use PAP if loaded objects are pro-

road. For this reason, make sure the car is parallel to the parking space when PAP

truding from the car.

measures the space.

· It is not always possible to find parking
spaces on narrow streets since there is not enough space for manoeuvring. In such parking situations, it helps the sys-

24 "Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

}} 251

07 Driver support

|| IMPORTANT
The PAP system's parameters may need to be updated when changing to another approved wheel rim size involving changed tyre circumference. Consult a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Maintenance

Related information
· Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - symbols and
messages (p. 252)
· Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation (p.
249)
· Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function (p. 248) · Park Assist* (p. 240) · Park assist camera (p. 244) · Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 247)

Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - symbols and messages The Park Assist Pilot (PAP Park Assist Pilot) helps the driver to park by first checking whether a space is sufficiently large and then turning the steering wheel and steering the car into the space. The combined instrument panel uses symbols, graphics and text to show when different operations should be performed. The combined instrument panel can show different combinations of symbols and text with varying content - sometimes with a selfexplanatory piece of advice on appropriate action. If a message shows that PAP is disengaged, contact with an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

The PAP sensors are located in the bumpers25 6 front and 4 rear.

For the PAP function to work correctly, its

sensors must be cleaned regularly with water

and car shampoo - these are the same sen-

sors that are used by parking assistance, see

Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors (p.

243).

Related information
· Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - operation (p.
249)
· Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - function (p. 248) · Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* - limitations (p.
251)
· Park Assist* (p. 240) · Park assist camera (p. 244) · Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 247)

25 The figure is schematic and therefore does not show the car model in question.
252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a function designed for providing support for the driver when driving in dense traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction.

Overview

Maintenance

BLIS is a driver's aid intended to provide a warning about:

· vehicles in the car's blind spot

· rapidly approaching vehicles in the left
and right-hand lanes closest to the car.

The BLIS function CTA (p. 255) (Cross Traffic

Alert) is a driver's aid intended to provide a warning about:
· crossing traffic when the car is reversed.
WARNING
BLIS is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations.

BLIS lamp location26. Indicator lamp BLIS symbol
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car

Sensor location. The sensors for the BLIS functions are located inside the rear wing/bumper on each side of the car.
· To ensure optimal functionality the areas
in front of the sensors must be kept clean.

BLIS is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mirrors. BLIS can never replace the driver's

where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.

Related information
· BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) -
operation (p. 254)

responsibility and attention - it is always

the driver's responsibility to change lanes in a safe manner.

26 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253

07 Driver support

BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) - operation BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is a function designed for providing support for the driver when driving in dense traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction.
Activate/deactivate BLIS BLIS is activated when the engine is started. This is confirmed by the indicator lamps in the door panels flashing once.

When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp in the button extinguishes/illuminates and the combined instrument panel confirms the change with a text message. The door panel indicator lamps flash once upon activation. To extinguish the message:
· Press the left stalk switch OK button.
or
· Wait approx. 5 seconds - the message
extinguishes.
When BLIS operates

· the driver's vehicle is overtaken by other
vehicles
· the driver's vehicle is rapidly caught up
by another vehicle. When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the door panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver activates the direction indicator on the same side as the warning in this situation then the BLIS lamp will change from a constant glow to flashing with a more intense light.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends. BLIS does not work when the car is being reversed.

Button for activating/deactivating.

The BLIS function can be deactivated/acti-

vated by pressing the BLIS button on the

centre console.

Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in the centre console - in which case the function is handled by the car's menu system (p. 103) MY CAR.

Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone for rapidly approaching vehicle. The BLIS function is active at speeds above approx. 10 km/h. The system is designed to react when:

Limitations
· Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossible to provide warnings. BLIS cannot detect hazards if it is covered.
· Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in
the area of the sensors.
· BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is con-
nected to the car's electrical system.

254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

07 Driver support

IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
· BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) (p.
253)
· BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 257)

CTA (Cross Traffic Alert)* CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is a driver aid intended to warn about crossing traffic when the car is reversing. CTA is a supplement to BLIS (p. 253).
Activate/deactivate CTA CTA is activated when the engine is started. This is confirmed by the indicator lamps for BLIS in the door panels flashing once.

WARNING
CTA is a supplementary aid and does not work in all situations. CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style and the use of rearview and door mirrors. CTA can never replace the driver's responsibility and attention - it is always the driver's responsibility to reverse in a safe manner.
When CTA operates

On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors.

The CTA function can be deactivated with the Parking assistance (p. 240) On/Off button.

Principle for CTA.

The BLIS lamp flashes once on activation

CTA supplements the BLIS function by being able to see crossing traffic from the side dur-

ing reversing, such as when reversing out of a

parking space.

CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In favourable conditions, it may also be able to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and pedestrians.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255

07 Driver support

|| CTA is only active during reversing and is activated automatically when the gearbox's reverse position is selected.
· If CTA detects something approaching
from the side, an acoustic warning signal sounds. The signal comes from either the left or the right-hand speaker, depending on the direction from which the object is approaching.
· CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS
lamps.
· An additional warning is provided in the
form of an illuminated icon in the display screen's PAS graphics (p. 240).
Limitations CTA does not perform optimally in all situations, but has a certain limitation - for example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or obstructing objects.
Here are some examples of when CTA's "field of vision" may be limited from the beginning and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be detected until they are very close:

The car is parked deep inside a parking slot. Blind CTA sector.
Sector where CTA can detect/"see".

vehicle/object that is blocking, at which the blind sector rapidly decreases. Examples of further limitations:
· Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossible to provide warnings. CTA cannot detect hazards if it is covered.
· Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in
the area of the sensors.
· CTA is deactivated when a trailer is con-
nected to the car's electrical system.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Maintenance

In an angled parking slot CTA can be completely "blind" on one side. However, when the driver is slowly reversing the car, the angle is changed in relation to the

256

07 Driver support

BLIS - symbols and messages In situations where the BLIS (p. 253) and CTA (p. 255) functions fail or are interrupted, the combined instrument panel may show a symbol, supplemented by an explanatory message. Follow any recommendation given.

Adjustable steering force* Steering force increases with the speed of the car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. The steering is firmer and more immediate on motorways. Steering is light and requires no extra effort when parking and at low speed.

Sensor location.

Message examples:

Message CTA OFF

Specification CTA is manually switched off - BLIS is active.

The driver can choose between three different levels of steering force for road responsiveness or steering sensitivity. The setting is made in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 103).

The sensors for the CTA functions are located inside the rear wing/bumper on each side of

BLIS and CTA OFF

BLIS and CTA are temporarily non-operational

This setting is not accessible when the car is moving.

the car.
· To ensure optimal functionality the areas
in front of the sensors must be kept

Trailer attached

because a trailer is connected to the car's electrical system.

NOTE
In certain situations the power steering

clean. Related information
· BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) (p.
253)

BLIS and CTA Service required

BLIS and CTA are nonoperational.
· Visit a workshop if the
message remains - an

may become too hot and then needs to be temporarily cooled - during this time the power steering operates with reduced power and turning the steering wheel may then be perceived to be slightly heavier.

· BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 257)

authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

In parallel with the temporarily reduced steering assistance the combined instru-

ment panel shows a message.

A text message can be acknowledged by

briefly pressing the OK button on the direc-

Related information

tion indicator stalk.

· MY CAR (p. 103)

Related information
· BLIS* (Blind Spot Information System) (p.
253)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257

STARTING AND DRIVING

08 Starting and driving

Alcolock* The function of the Alcolock1 is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in accordance with each market's limit value in force for driving legally.
WARNING
The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt the driver from responsibility. It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and to drive the car safely.
Related information
· Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.
259)
· Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 261) · Alcolock* - storage (p. 260) · Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p.
260)
· Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
(p. 263)

Alcolock* - functions and operation Functions
Nozzle for breath test. Switch. Transmission button. Lamp for battery status. Lamp for result of breath test. Lamp indicates ready for breath test. Operation - battery Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery status:

Indicator lamp (4) Green flashing Green Yellow Red

Battery status
Charging in progress
Fully charged Semi-charged Discharged - fit the charger in the holder or connect the power supply cable from the glovebox.

NOTE
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will keep the built-in battery fully charged and the Alcolock is activated automatically when the car is opened.

Related information
· Alcolock* (p. 259) · Alcolock* - storage (p. 260) · Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 261) · Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p.
260)
· Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
(p. 263)

1 Also called Alcoguard.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259

08 Starting and driving

Alcolock* - storage Store the Alcolock in its holder. Release the handheld unit by depressing it slightly in its holder and releasing it - it then springs out and can be removed from the holder.

· Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
(p. 263)

Handheld unit storage and charging station.
· Replace the handheld unit in the holder
by pushing it in until it engages.
· Store the handheld unit in the holder -
this provides it with the best protection and keeps its batteries fully charged.

Related information
· Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.
259)

· Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p.
260)

· Alcolock* (p. 259)

· Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 261)

Alcolock* - before starting the engine The Alcolock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened.
1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the Alcolock is ready for use.
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If the Alcolock is outside the car when it is unlocked then it must first be activated with the switch (2).
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath and blow with an even pressure until a "click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds. The result will be one of the alternatives in the following table Result after breath test.
4. If no message is shown then the transmission to the car may have failed - in which case, press the button (3) to transmit the result to the car manually.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it must be repeated.

260 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

Result after breath test

Indicator lamp (5) + Display text

Specification

Green lamp + Alcoguard Approved test

Start the engine - no alcohol content measured.

Yellow lamp + Alcoguard Approved test Red lamp + Disapproved test Wait 1 minute

Engine starting possible - measured alcohol content is above 0.1 promille but below the limit value in forceA.
Engine starting not possible - measured alcohol content is above the limit value in forceA.

A Limit values vary from country to country. Find out what applies in your country. See also Alcolock* (p. 259)

NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test.

Related information
· Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.
259)
· Alcolock* - storage (p. 260)

· Alcolock* (p. 259) · Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
(p. 263)

Alcolock* - to bear in mind In order to obtain correct function and as accurate a measurement result as possible: · Avoid eating or drinking approx.
5 minutes before the breath test.
· Avoid excess windscreen washing - the
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result. In order to ensure that a new breath test is carried out in the event of a change of driver depress the switch (2) and the send button (3) simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At which point the car returns to start inhibition mode and a new approved breath test is required before starting the engine.
08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 261

08 Starting and driving

Calibration and service

At temperatures below -20 ºC or above

When the Alcolock is installed, either the

The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated at a workshop2 every 12 months.
30 days before recalibration is necessary the combined instrument panel shows the message Alcoguard Calibr. required. If calibration is not carried out within these 30 days then normal engine starting will be blocked only starting with the Bypass function will then be possible, see the following heading "Emergency situation".
The message can be cleared by pressing the send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reappears each time the engine is started -

+60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional power supply. The combined instrument panel shows Alcoguard insert power cable. In which case, connect the power supply cable from the glovebox and wait until indicator lamp (6) is green. In extremely cold weather the heating time can be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.
Emergency situation In the event of an emergency situation or the Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car.

Bypass or Emergency function is selected as the bypassing option. This setting can be changed afterwards at a workshop2.
Activating the Bypass function
· Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch OK button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the combined instrument panel first shows Bypass activated Wait 1 minute and then Alcoguard Bypass enabled - after which the engine can be started. This function can be activated several times. The error message shown during driving can

only recalibration at a workshop2 can clear the message permanently.
Cold or hot weather The colder the weather the longer it takes before the Alcolock is ready for use:

Temperature (ºC)

Maximum heating time (sec-
onds)

+10 to +85

-5 to +10

-40 to -5

180

NOTE
All Bypass activation is logged and saved in memory, see Recording data (p. 16).
After the Bypass function has been activated the combined instrument panel shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled the whole time while driving and can only be reset by a workshop2. The Bypass function can be tested without the error message being logged - in which case, carry out all the steps without starting the car. The error message is cleared when the car is locked.

only be cleared at a workshop2.
Activating the Emergency function
· Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch OK button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the combined instrument panel shows Alcoguard Bypass enabled and the engine can be started. This function can be used once, after which a reset must be made at a workshop2.
Related information
· Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.
259)
· Alcolock* - storage (p. 260)

2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

· Alcolock* - before starting the engine (p.
260)
· Alcolock* (p. 259) · Alcolock* - symbols and text messages
(p. 263)

Alcolock* - symbols and text messages In addition to the previously described messages related to how the alcolock works before starting the engine (p. 260) the combined instrument panel's display can also show the following:
Display text Meaning/Action

Display text Meaning/Action

Alcoguard Blow harder

Blowing too weak - blow harder.

Alcoguard wait Preheating

Heating not finished wait for text Alcoguard Blow 5 seconds.

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Alcoguard Restart possible Alcoguard Service required

The engine has been switched off for less than 30 minutes - engine starting possible without new test. Contact a workshopA.

Related information
· Alcolock* - functions and operation (p.
259)
· Alcolock* - to bear in mind (p. 261) · Alcolock* - storage (p. 260) · Alcolock* (p. 259)

Alcoguard No signal

Transmission failed send manually with button (3) or take a new breath test.

Alcoguard Invalid test

Test failed - take a new breath test.

Alcoguard Blow longer

Blowing too short - blow for longer.

Alcoguard

Blowing too hard - blow

Blow softer

more gently.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 263

08 Starting and driving

Starting the engine The engine is started and switched off using the remote control key and the START/STOP ENGINE button.
Petrol and diesel engine

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and press it in to its end position. Note that if the car is equipped with Alcolock* then a breath test must first be approved before the engine can be started. For more information on the Alcolock, see Alcolock* (p. 259).
2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed3. (For cars with automatic gearbox depress the brake pedal.)
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button and then release it.
When the engine is started the starter motor works until the engine is started or until the overheating protection triggers.

WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car, and make sure that the key position is 0 - in particular if there are children in the car. For information on how this works see Key positions (p. 70).
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is done in order that the emissions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.

Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key incorrectly turned - hold the end with the detachable key blade, see Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 155).
08

IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further attempt. Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch after starting the engine or when the car is being towed.

Keyless drive* Follow steps 2-3 for keyless (p. 159) starting of the engine.
NOTE
A prerequisite for the engine to start is that one of the car's remote control keys with the Keyless drive function is in the passenger compartment or cargo area.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from the car while driving or during towing.

3 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the engine.

264 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information
· Switching off the engine (p. 265)

08 Starting and driving

Switching off the engine The engine is switched off using the START/ STOP ENGINE button.
To stop the engine:
· Press START/STOP ENGINE - the
engine stops. If the gear selector is not in P position or if the car is moving:
· Press twice on START/STOP ENGINE or
hold the button depressed until the engine stops.
Related information
· Key positions (p. 70)

Steering lock The steering lock makes steering difficult if the car is e.g. taken unlawfully.
Function
· The steering lock unlocks when the
remote control key is in the ignition switch4 and the START/STOP ENGINE button is depressed.
· The steering lock locks when the driver's
door is opened after the engine has been switched off. A mechanical noise can be perceived when the steering lock unlocks or locks.
Related information
· Starting the engine (p. 264) · Key positions (p. 70) · Steering wheel (p. 76)

4 Cars with Keyless drive must have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.

08
265

08 Starting and driving

Remote start (ERS)* Remote start (ERS Engine Remote Start) means that the car's engine can be started remotely using the remote control key or the PCC key. This is so that the passenger compartment can be warmed up/cooled down before departure.
The climate control system and audio system start with the same settings that were in use when the car was parked. An ERS-started engine is activated for a maximum of 15 minutes, then it is switched off. After two ERS-activations the engine must be started in the normal way before ERS can be re-used. The optional ERS function is available on most cars with automatic gearbox.
NOTE
The service life of the remote control key's battery is affected by the ERS function. In the event of frequent use of ERS the battery should therefore be changed once per year, see Remote control key/PCC replacing the battery (p. 158).

WARNING
To remote-start the engine, the following criteria must be met:
· The car must be supervised. · There must be no people or animals
inside the car.
· The car must not be parked in a
closed, unventilated area - the exhaust gases may seriously injure humans and animals.
Related information
· Remote start (ERS) - operation (p. 266) · Remote start (ERS) - symbols and mes-
sages (p. 268)

NOTE

Follow local/national rules/regulations on

idling.

Remote start (ERS) - operation
The key's buttons for remote start. Unlocking Locking Approach light duration Unlocking, tailgate Information5
Remote starting the engine To be able to remotely start the engine, the car must be locked. Proceed as follows:

5 Only on PCC key, see PCC* - unique functions (p. 153).
266 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

1. Briefly press on the key's button (2).

Active functions

· Active ERS time exceeds 15 minutes.

2. Follow this immediately afterwards with a long press - at least 2 seconds - on button (3).
If the conditions for ERS are fulfilled then the following takes place:
1. The direction indicators flash quickly several times.
2. The engine starts. 3. The direction indicators illuminate with a
constant glow for 3 seconds to verify that the engine has started.

The following functions are activated with a remote started engine:
· Ventilation system · Audio/video system · Approach light duration.
Deactivated functions The following functions are deactivated with a remote started engine:
· Headlamps · Position lamps

When an ERS-started engine is switched off, the direction indicators illuminate with a constant glow for 3 seconds. Related information
· Remote start (ERS)* (p. 266) · Remote start (ERS) - symbols and mes-
sages (p. 268)

NOTE
After remote starting, the car continues to be locked but with deactivated movement detector*.

· Number plate lighting · Windscreen wiper.
ERS is interrupted The following steps switch off an ERS-started engine:

With PCC6 key

· The remote control key's

The light indication for Approach

button (1), (2) or (4) is depressed

lighting7 flashes several times when

· The car is unlocked

the button is pressed and then goes to constant glow if all criteria for ERS have been fulfilled. However, this does

· A door is opened · Accelerator pedal or brake pedal is

not mean that ERS has started the engine.

depressed

To check whether ERS has started the engine, the user can press the button (5) - if the engine has started, there is a light indica-

· The gear selector is moved out of P posi-
tion
· There is approx.10 litres left in the fuel

tion by the buttons (2) and (3).

tank

6 For more information on the PCC key, see PCC* - unique functions (p. 153). 7 For more information on Approach lighting, see Remote control key - functions (p. 151) and Approach light duration (p. 89).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 267

08 Starting and driving

Remote start (ERS) - symbols and messages

In situations where the ERS function fails or is interrupted, a symbol is shown in the combined instrument panel, supplemented by an explanatory text message.

ERS function unavailable

Message

Specification

No remote start Max 2 starts

ERS unavailable because a maximum of 2 ERS activations in succession are allowed.

Message No remote start engine warning
No remote start engine coolant No remote start door open

Specification
ERS unavailable due to warning message from engine. Contact a workshopA.
ERS unavailable due to error message from cooling system, see Coolant level (p. 349).
ERS unavailable because a door/tailgate was not closed.

No remote start low fuel level

ERS unavailable because fuel level too low.

No remote start car not locked

ERS unavailable because the car was not locked.

No remote

ERS unavailable because

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

start gear not gear selector is not in P

in P

position.

Interrupted ERS function

Message

Specification

No remote start driver in car

ERS unavailable because someone is in the passenger compartment.

Remote start off low fuel level

ERS interrupted because fuel level too low.

No remote start low battery

ERS unavailable due to low battery voltage. Charge the battery by starting the engine.

Remote start off gear not in P

ERS interrupted because gear selector is not in P position.

Message

Specification

Remote start off driver in car

ERS interrupted because someone is in the passenger compartment.

Remote start off engine warning

ERS interrupted due to error message from engine. Contact a workshopA.

Remote start off low battery

ERS interrupted because battery voltage too low.

Remote start off engine coolant

ERS interrupted due to error message from cooling system.

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
· Remote start (ERS)* (p. 266) · Remote start (ERS) - operation (p. 266)

268 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

Starting the engine Flexifuel Flexifuel engines can be driven on 95 octane unleaded petrol and bioethanol E85. The engine is started in the same way as in a petrol-driven car.

block heater should be activated for at least 2 hours.
· In outside temperatures lower than
-20 °C, the electric engine block heater should be activated for at least 3 hours.

· Make further attempts to start with the
START/STOP ENGINE button.
· Check that the engine block heater has
been activated and, where appropriate, activate it for the time specified above.

Engine block heater*

WARNING

IMPORTANT

The engine block heater is powered by high voltage. Fault tracing and repair of an electric engine block heater and its electrical connections must only be carried out by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Points to remember for carrying reserve fuel:

If the engine does not start despite repeated start attempts, you are recommended to contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Fuel adaptation Flexifuel engines can be driven on both 95 octane unleaded petrol and bioethanol E85. Both fuels are filled in the common fuel tank so that any variations of mixing ratios between these two fuels is possible.

Electrical input to the engine block heater.

· In the event of stalling due to an empty
fuel tank, bioethanol E85 from a

If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the car has been driven on bioethanol E85 (or vice

Cars intended for E85 have an electric engine block heater. Starting and driving with a preheated engine means significantly reduced emissions and reduced fuel consumption. For

reserve fuel can may make the engine difficult to start in extreme cold. This is avoided by filling the reserve fuel can with 95 octane petrol.

versa) then the engine may run slightly unevenly for a time. For this reason it is important to allow the engine to accustom itself (adapt) to the new fuel mixture.

this reason you should aim to use the engine block heater throughout the winter months.
· In outside temperatures between

For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanol E85 fuel, see Fuel - bioethanol E85 (p. 304).

Adaptation takes place automatically when the car is driven for a short period at an even speed.

+5 °C and -10 °C, the electric engine block heater should be activated for at least 1 hour.
· In outside temperatures between

In the event of starting difficulties If the engine does not start at the first start attempt:

-10 °C and -20 °C, the electric engine

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

}} 269

08 Starting and driving

|| IMPORTANT
After the fuel mixture in the tank has been changed an adaptation should be made by driving at an even speed for about 15 minutes.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected then a slightly longer period of driving is required for the adaptation as the memory for the electronics has been cleared. Related information
· Jump starting with battery (p. 270) · Starting the engine (p. 264)

Jump starting with battery If the starter battery (p. 361) is discharged then the car can be started with current from another battery.

4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment.
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the battery in your car and remove the cover, see Starter battery - replacement (p. 363).
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp onto the car's positive terminal (2).

When jump starting the car, the following steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage: 1. Insert the remote control key in key posi-
tion 0 (p. 70).

7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at the top, the outer screw head (4).

2. Check that the donor battery has a volt-

9. Check that the jump lead clamps are

age of 12 V.

affixed securely so that there are no

3. If the donor battery is installed in another

sparks during the starting procedure.

car - switch off the donor car's engine

10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and

and make sure that the two cars do not

allow it to run a few minutes at a speed

touch each other.

slightly higher than idle

approx. 1500 rpm.

270

08 Starting and driving

11. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the crocodile clips during the start procedure. There is a risk of sparks forming.

Gearboxes There are two main types of gearbox. Manual gearbox and automatic gearbox.
· Manual gearbox (p. 271) · Automatic gearbox - Geartronic (p. 273)
and Powershift (p. 276)

Manual gearbox The function of the gearbox is to change the gear ratio depending on speed and power requirements.

12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red. > Make sure that none of the black jump lead's clamps comes into contact with the battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead!
WARNING · The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode.
· The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
· If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
Related information
· Starting the engine (p. 264)

IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system components, the working temperature of the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of overheating, a warning symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel in conjunction with a text message being shown. Follow the recommendation given in the text message.
Related information
· Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p.
273)

Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.
The 6-speed box is available in two versions reverse gear position differs between them. Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted on the gear lever.
· Depress the clutch pedal fully during
each gear change.
· Take your foot off the clutch pedal
between gear changes.

WARNING

Always apply the parking brake when

parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear

is not sufficient to hold the car in all situa-

tions.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271

08 Starting and driving
|| Reverse gear inhibitor The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel.
· Follow the gearing pattern printed on the
gear lever and start from neutral position, N before moving it to R position.
· Engage reverse gear only when the car is
stationary.
NOTE
With the upper variant of the shifting pattern for 6-speed gearbox (see previous illustration) - first press down the gear lever in the N position in order to engage reverse gear.
Related information
· Gearboxes (p. 271) · Transmission fluid - grade and volume (p.
399)

Gear shift indicator* The gear shift indicator notifies the driver when it is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower gear. An essential detail in connection with environmental driving is to drive in the right gear and to change gear in plenty of time.
Manual gearbox Gear shift indicator for manual gearbox. Only one marker is illuminated at a time - during normal driving it is only illuminated in the centre.
When gearing up/down as recommended, the upper one is illuminated at +" or the lower at "-", marked red in the illustration.
Automatic gearbox

An indicator is available as an aid on some variants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which notifies the driver when it is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower gear in order to obtain the lowest possible fuel consumption. However, taking into consideration characteristics such as performance and vibration-free running, it may be advantageous to change gear at a higher engine speed. The framed number indicates the current gear.
With "Analogue" combined instrument panel, the gear positions and indicator arrows are shown in the instrument's centre.

08 Combined instrument panel "Digital" with gear shift indicator.
272 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic*

Parking position - P

Neutral position - N

The Geartronic gearbox has two different gear modes - Automatic and Manual.

Select position P when starting the engine or when the car is parked.
· In order to be able to move the gear

No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in N position.

selector from P-position, the brake pedal must first be depressed firmly. The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged. Also apply the parking brake (p. 293), as a precaution.

Drive position - D D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be stationary when the gear selector is

moved to D position from R position.

NOTE
The gear selector must be in P position to allow the car to be locked and alarmed.

Geartronic Manual gear positions (+S-)
The driver can also change gear manually

using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The

D: Automatic gear positions. +/: Manual gear positions. S8: Sport mode*.

IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when posi-

car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released.

Combined instrument panel (p. 59) shows the position of the gear selector using the following indications: P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc. Gear positions

tion P is selected.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when

The manual gear position is reached by moving the lever to the side from position D to the end position at "+S-". The combined instrument panel's symbol "+S-" changes colour from

Automatic gear positions are indicated on the right of the combined instrument panel.

parking on a slope - the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation.

WHITE to ORANGE and the digits 1, 2, 3 etc. are displayed in a box, corresponding to the gear that has just been selected.

(Only one marker is illuminated at a time - the one showing the current gear selector position.)

Reverse position - R The car must be stationary when R position is selected.

· Move the lever forwards towards "+"
(plus) to change up a gear and release the lever, which returns to its rest position between + and .

Symbol "S" for Sport mode is ORANGE when the mode is active.

8 The "Sport mode" function is not available in a V60 Plug-in Hybrid - only "+" and "-".

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

}} 273

08 Starting and driving

· Pull the lever back towards "" (minus) to
change down a gear and release it. The manual gearshift mode "+S" can be selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver allows the speed to decrease lower than a level suitable for the selected gear, in

instrument panel then changes indication from "D" to a figure, which indicates the current gear. To then change gear one step:
· Pull one of the paddles backwards -
towards the steering wheel - and release.

NOTE
Automatic deactivation If the steering wheel paddles are not used then they are deactivated after a short time - this is indicated when the combined instrument panel switches indication, from the figure for the current gear back to "D".

order to avoid jerking and stalling.

The exception is during engine braking -

To return to automatic driving mode:
· Move the lever to the side to the end
position at D.

then the paddles are activated as long as engine braking is in progress. Manual deactivation

The steering wheel paddle shifters can

NOTE

also be deactivated manually:

If the gearbox has a Sport programme then the gearbox will only become manual after the gear selector has been moved forwards or backwards in its "+S" position. The combined instrument panel then changes indication from S to show which

Both steering wheel "paddles".

· Pull both paddles toward the steering
wheel and hold until the combined instrument panel changes character from the figure for the current gear to "D".

of the gears 1, 2, 3 etc. is engaged.

"-": Selects the next lower gear.

The paddles can also be used with the gear

Paddles*

"+": Selects the next higher gear.

selector in Sport mode* - then the paddles are constantly activated without being deacti-

As a supplement to manual gear changing

A gear change occurs at each pull of the pad- vated.

with the gear selector there are also controls

dle provided that the engine speed does not

located on the steering wheel, so-called

leave the permitted range.

"paddles".

After each gear change the combined instru-

To be able to change gear with the steering

ment panel changes figure to show the cur-

wheel paddles they must first be activated.

rent gear.

This is by means of pulling one of the paddles toward the steering wheel - the combined

274 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

Geartronic - Sport mode* (S)9 The Sport programme provides sportier characteristics and allows higher engine speed for the gears. At the same time it responds more
quickly to acceleration. During active driving, the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to a delayed upshift.
To activate Sport mode:

The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car moves off with a lower engine speed and reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
Kick-down When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown.

when the engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine. Related information
· Transmission fluid - grade and volume (p.
399)

· Move the gear selector to the side from D

If the accelerator is released from the kick-

position to the end position at "+S" - the

down position, the gearbox automatically

combined instrument panel changes indication from D to S. Sport mode can be selected at any time while driving.

changes up. Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking.

Safety function

Geartronic - Winter mode It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads if 3rd gear is engaged manually.

To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down

1. Depress the brake pedal and move the

function.

gear selector from D position to the end position at "+S" - the combined instrument panel changes indication from D to the figure 110. 2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever forward towards "+" (plus) twice - the display shifts the indication from 1 to 3.

Geartronic does not permit downshifting/ kick-down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged.

3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.

When kick-down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depending on engine speed. The car changes up

9 With some engines only. 10 If the car has Sport mode* then "S" is shown first.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 275

08 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox -- Powershift*

273). Powershift enables driving away on a

can also overheat during slow driving in

An automatic gearbox with Powershift differs from an automatic gearbox with Geartronic (p. 273), in that it has double mechanical clutch discs.

slippery road surface if 2nd gear is engaged manually instead of 3rd gear (Geartronic).
Powershift or Geartronic The model with Powershift transmission should not be towed as it is dependent on the engine running in order to receive sufficient lubrication. If towing still has to take place,

queues (10 km/h or slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer hitched. The transmission cools down when the car is stationary, with foot brake depressed and the engine running at idling speed. Overheating during slow driving in queues can be avoided by driving in stages:

the route must be as short as possible and

· Stop the car and wait with your foot on

then with very low speed.

the brake pedal until there is a moderate

In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not the car is equipped with Powershift transmission, this can be verified by checking the designation on the gearbox label under the

distance to the traffic ahead, drive forward a short distance, and then wait another moment with your foot on the brake pedal.

bonnet - see Type designations (p. 386). The designation "MPS6" means that it is

IMPORTANT

Powershift transmission - otherwise it is

Use the foot brake to hold the car station-

D: Automatic gear positions. +S: Manual gear positions. S: Sport mode*.

Geartronic automatic transmission.

ary on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car with the accelerator pedal. The gear-

The Powershift automatic gearbox transmits

To bear in mind

box could then overheat.

the motive force from the engine to the drive wheels with double mechanical clutch discs, as opposed to Geartronic which instead uses a hydraulic torque converter.

The transmission's double clutch has overload protection that is activated if it becomes too hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for

For important information regarding Powershift transmission and towing, see Towing (p. 313).

Powershift transmission operates in the same way and has similar controls and functions as the Geartronic automatic transmission. One exception is Geartronic's Winter mode, see the section "Geartronic - Winter mode" (p.

a long time. Overheated transmission causes the car to shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illuminates and the combined instrument panel shows a message. The transmission

Text message and action In some situations the combined instrument panel may show a text message at the same time as a symbol is illuminated.

276 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

Symbol Message

Driving characteristics

Action

Transm. overheat brake to hold Transm. overheat park safely Transm. cooling let engine run

Difficulty in maintaining even speed at constant engine speed. Significant pulling in the car's traction.
No drive due to overheated gearbox.

Transmission overheated. Keep the car stationary using the foot brake.A
Transmission overheated. Park the car immediately in a safe manner.A
Transmission overheated. For fastest cooling: Run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the message clears.

A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.

The table shows three steps with an increased degree of seriousness should the transmission become too hot. In parallel with the text message, the driver is also advised that the car's electronics are temporarily changing the driving characteristics. Follow the instructions in the text message where appropriate.
NOTE
The examples in the table are no indication of the car being defective, but show that a safety function has been activated with a view to preventing damage to any of the car's components.

WARNING
If a warning symbol combined with the text Transm. overheat park safely is ignored then the heat in the gearbox may become so high that the power transmission between engine and gearbox is temporarily halted in order to prevent the clutch from malfunctioning - the car then loses drive and is stationary until gearbox temperature has cooled to an acceptable level.
For more possible text messages with their respective proposals for solutions concerning automatic gearbox, see Messages (p. 101).

A text message extinguishes automatically

after the action has been carried out or after

one press on the indicator stalk OK button.

277

08 Starting and driving

Gear selector inhibitor There are two different types of gear selector inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor

· Keep your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the gear selector to another position.
Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking position (P) To be able to move the gear selector from P to other gear positions, the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in key position II (p. 70).

Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor

Shiftlock Neutral (N)

If the gear selector is in N position and the

car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds

(irrespective of whether the engine is running)

G021351

then the gear selector is locked.

If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat

The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D. Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector. With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P, R, N and D.

To be able to move the gear selector from N to other gear positions, the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in key position II.

battery, the gear selector must be moved from the P position so that the car can be moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment behind the centre console and locate a hole11 for the key blade (p. 155) in the bottom of the compartment.
Search for a spring-loaded button down in the hole with the key blade; depress

Automatic gear selector inhibitor

the button with the blade and hold.

The automatic gearbox has special safety systems:

Move the gear selector from the P position and pull up the key blade.

Parking position (P)

4. Set the rubber mat back in place.

Stationary car with engine running:

11 There may be 2 holes - one for the key blade and one that fixes the rubber mat.
278

08 Starting and driving

Related information
· Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 273) · Automatic gearbox -- Powershift* (p. 276)

Hill start assist (HSA)*12 The foot brake can be released before setting off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start Assist) function means that the car does not roll backwards.
The function means that the pedal pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal to accelerator pedal. The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver accelerates.
Related information
· Starting the engine (p. 264)

Start/Stop* Some engine and gearbox combinations come fitted with a Start and Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights - the engine is then switched off temporarily and restarts automatically when the journey is due to continue.
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corporation's core values which guides all our activities. This target orientation has resulted in several separate energy-saving functions of which Start/Stop is one, all with the collective task of reducing fuel consumption, which in turn helps to reduce exhaust emissions.
General information about Start/Stop

12 Depends on engine and gearbox combination. HSA not possible with some combinations.

The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter

and cleaner.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 279

08 Starting and driving
|| The Start/Stop function gives the driver the opportunity for a more active environmentally conscious way of driving the car by means of being able to allow the engine to stop automatically, whenever appropriate. Manual or Automatic
Note that there are differences in the Start/Stop function depending on whether the gearbox is manual or automatic.
Related information
· Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
280)
· Starting the engine (p. 264) · Start/Stop* - settings (p. 285) · Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start (p. 284)
· Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p.
283)
· Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.
282)
· Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
manual gearbox (p. 284)
· Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p.
286)
· Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)

Start/Stop* - function and operation Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start/Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. The Start/Stop function is activated automatically when the engine is started with the key.
The Start/Stop function is activated automatically when the engine is started with the key. The driver is made aware of this by the function's symbol illuminating in the combined instrument panel and the On/Off button lamp illuminating. All of the car's normal systems such as lighting, radio, etc. work as normal even with an engine that has stopped automatically, except that some equipment may have the function temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate control system's fan speed or extremely high volume on the audio system.
Engine auto-stop The following is required for the engine to auto-stop:

Conditions

M/A
A

Declutch, set the gear lever in neu- M tral position and release the clutch pedal - the engine stops automatically.

Stop the car with the foot brake,

and then keep your foot on the

pedal - the engine auto-stops.

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

If the ECO function is activated then the engine may auto-stop before the car is completely stationary.

As verification and reminder that the engine is auto-stopped the combined instrument panel's symbol for the Start/Stop function illuminates.

280 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

Engine auto-start

Conditions

With the gear lever in neutral posi-

tion:

1. Depress the clutch pedal or press the accelerator pedal the engine starts.

2. Engage a suitable gear and drive.

Release the foot pressure on the

foot brake - the engine auto-starts

and the journey can continue.

Maintain foot pressure on the foot

brake and depress the accelerator

pedal - the engine auto-starts.

The following option is also availa- M +

ble on a downhill gradient:

Release the foot brake and let the car move off - the engine starts automatically when the speed exceeds normal walking pace.

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

Deactivate the Start/Stop function In certain situations, it may advisable to temporarily switch off the automatic Start/Stop function - this is carried out with a push of this button.
Disengaged function is indicated by the combined instrument panel's Start/Stop symbol and the On/Off button's lamp extinguishing. The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is reactivated with the button or until the next time the engine is started with the key.

· Start/Stop* - settings (p. 285) · Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start (p. 284)
· Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p.
283)
· Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.
282)
· Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
manual gearbox (p. 284)
· Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p.
286)
· Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)

Start assistance HSA The foot brake can also be released on an uphill slope to auto-start the engine - the HSA (p. 279) (Hill Start Assist) function prevents the car from rolling backwards.
HSA means that the pressure in the brake system remains temporarily available while the driver moves his/her foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal for driving off with the engine having stopped automatically. The temporary braking effect releases after a few seconds or when the driver depresses the accelerator pedal.

Related information
· Start/Stop* (p. 279)

· Starting the engine (p. 264)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 281

08 Starting and driving

Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start/Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. Although the Start/Stop function is activated, the engine does not always stop automatically.
The engine does not auto-stop if:

Conditions

M/AA

the car has not first reached approx. 8 km/h after a key start or the last auto-stop.

M + A

the driver has unbuckled the seat- M + A belt.

battery capacity is below the mini- M + A mum permitted level.

the engine does not have normal operating temperature.

M + A

outside temperature is below freezing point or above approx. 30 °C.

M + A

the windscreen's electric heating is activated.

M + A

Conditions

M/AA

the environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the preset values - indicated by the ventilation fan running at a high speed.

M + A

the car is reversed.

M + A

the starter battery temperature is below the freezing point or is too high.

M + A

the driver makes greater steering wheel movements.

M + A

the exhaust system's particulate filter is full - the temporarily disengaged Start/Stop function is reactivated as soon as an automatic cleaning cycle has been performed (see Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 305)).

M + A

the road is very steep.

M + A

a trailer is connected electrically to the car's electrical system.

M + A

the bonnet has been openedB.

M + A

the gearbox does not have normal A operating temperature.

Conditions

M/AA

the atmospheric air pressure is

less than equivalent to 1500-2500

metres above sea level - the cur-

rent air pressure varies with the

prevailing weather conditions.

adaptive cruise control Queue

Assist is activated.

the gear selector is in S positionC

or "+/-".

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox. B With certain engines only. C Sport mode.

Related information
· Start/Stop* (p. 279) · Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
280)
· Starting the engine (p. 264) · Start/Stop* - settings (p. 285) · Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start (p. 284)
· Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p.
283)
· Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
manual gearbox (p. 284)
· Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p.
286)
· Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)

282 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start/Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. An auto-stopped engine may restart in certain cases without the driver having decided that the journey should continue.
In the following cases the engine also starts automatically if the driver has not depressed the clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or takes his/her foot off the brake pedal (automatic gearbox):

Conditions

M/AA

Misting forms on the windows. The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the preset values.

M + A M + A

Conditions

M/AA

The car starts to move, or increases speed slightly if the car autostopped without being fully stationary. The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with the gear selector in D or N position.
Steering wheel movementsB. The gear selector is moved out of the D position to S positionC, R or "+/-". The driver's door is opened with the gear selector in D position - a "ping" sound and text message inform that the Start/Stop function is active.

M + A
A A A A

Related information
· Start/Stop* (p. 279) · Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
280)
· Starting the engine (p. 264) · Start/Stop* - settings (p. 285) · Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start (p. 284)
· Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.
282)
· Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
manual gearbox (p. 284)
· Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p.
286)
· Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)

There is a temporarily high current take-off or battery capacity drops below the minimum permitted level.

M + A

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox. B With certain engines only. C Sport mode.
WARNING

Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.

M + A

Do not open the bonnet when the engine has stopped automatically - the engine may suddenly start automatically. First

The bonnet is openedB.

M + A

switch off the engine as normal using the START/STOP ENGINE button before

opening the bonnet.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 283

08 Starting and driving

Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start/Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. The engine does not always auto-start after having auto-stopped.
In the following cases the engine does not auto-start after having auto-stopped:

Conditions

A gear is engaged without

declutching - a display text

prompts the driver to set the gear

lever in neutral position in order to

enable auto-start.

The driver is unrestrained, the gear A selector is in P position and the driver's door is open - a normal engine start must take place.

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

Related information

· Start/Stop* (p. 279)

· Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.

280)
· Starting the engine (p. 264)

· Start/Stop* - settings (p. 285)

· Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p.
283)
· Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.
282)
· Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
manual gearbox (p. 284)
· Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p.
286)
· Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)

Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage manual gearbox Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start/Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. In the event that a start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed in accordance with the below:
1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine starts automatically.
2. In certain cases the gear lever must be set in neutral position. The combined instrument panel then shows the text Put gear in neutral.
Related information
· Start/Stop* (p. 279) · Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
280)
· Starting the engine (p. 264) · Start/Stop* - settings (p. 285) · Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start (p. 284)
· Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p.
283)
· Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.
282)
· Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p.
286)
· Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)

284 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

Start/Stop* - settings Some engine and gearbox combinations are equipped with a Start/Stop function which engages in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at traffic lights. The car's MY CAR menu system, under the DRIVe heading, contains information about Volvo's Start-Stop system, as well as recommendations for energy-saving driving techniques.

· Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.
282)
· Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
manual gearbox (p. 284)
· Start/Stop* - symbols and messages (p.
286)
· Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)

Related information
· Start/Stop* (p. 279) · Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
280)
· Starting the engine (p. 264) · Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start (p. 284)
· Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p.
283)

08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 285

08 Starting and driving

Start/Stop* - symbols and messages The Start/Stop function can show text messages on the information display.

Text message In combination with this indicator lamp the Start/Stop function may show text messages in the com-
bined instrument panel for certain situations.

For some of them there is a recommended action that should be performed. The following table shows some examples.

Symbol Message Auto Start-Stop serv. required

Info/action Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

M/AA M + A

Autostart Engine running + Activated if the driver's door is opened with auto-stopped engine and the gear selector is

acoustic signal

in D position.

Press Start button Depress clutch pedal to start

The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button. The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed.

M + A M

Press brake and clutch to The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed.

start

Put gear in neutral to start Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the gear lever in neutral position.

286 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

Symbol Message

Info/action

M/AA

Select P or N to start Press Start button

Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to N or P position and start the

engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.

The engine will not auto-start - start the engine normally with the START/STOP ENGINE

button and the gear selector in P or N.

A M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.

If a message does not go out following completion of the action then a workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
· Start/Stop* (p. 279) · Start/Stop* - function and operation (p.
280)
· Starting the engine (p. 264) · Start/Stop* - settings (p. 285) · Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-
start (p. 284)
· Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p.
283)
· Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop (p.
282)
· Start/Stop* - involuntary engine stoppage
manual gearbox (p. 284)
· Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)
08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 287

08 Starting and driving

ECO* ECO is an innovative Volvo function for automatic-gearbox cars, capable of reducing fuel consumption by up to 5%, depending on the driver's driving style. The function gives the driver the option of a more active environmentally conscious way of driving.

General

The following are changed upon activation of the ECO function:

· Gearbox gearshift points. · Engine management and response from
the accelerator pedal.
· Start/Stop function - the engine can also
auto-stop before the car has stopped to being fully stationary.
· The Eco Coast function is activated -
engine braking ceases.
· Climate control system settings - some
electricity consumers are deactivated or operate at reduced power.
08

NOTE
When the ECO function is activated, several parameters in the climate control system's settings are changed, and several electricity consumer functions are reduced - a press of the AC button resets the climate control system, but then with reduced AC function. ECO - Operation
ECO On/Off ECO symbol The ECO function is deactivated when the engine is switched off, and must therefore be activated after each time the engine is started. There are exceptions for certain engines. However, it is easily verified by means of both the combined instrument panel ECO symbol and the ECO button lamp illuminating when the function is activated.

ECO function On or Off Disengaged ECO function is indicated by the combined instrument panel ECO symbol and the ECO button lamp extinguishing. The function is then switched off until it is reactivated with the ECO button.
Eco Coast - Function The Eco Coast subfunction means in practice that engine braking is deactivated, meaning in turn that the car's kinetic energy is used to coast for longer distances. When the driver releases the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically disengaged from the engine whose speed is reduced to idling speed with minimum consumption. This function is intended for use in the event of an anticipated reduction in speed, e.g. to roll forward to an intersection or a red light. Eco Coast enables proactive driving where the driver can use the so-called "Pulse & Glide" technique and a minimum of braking. Combination On and Off
A combination of Eco Coast and temporarily deactivated ECO function can also collectively contribute to reduced consumption. Accordingly:
· Active Eco Coast: Long coasting without
engine braking = Low consumption

288 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

and
· Deactivated ECO function: Short coasting
with engine braking = Minimum consumption.
NOTE
However, to achieve optimal low fuel consumption, Eco Coast in combination with short coasting distances should generally be avoided.
Activate Eco Coast The function is activated when the accelerator pedal is fully released, in combination with the following parameters:
· The ECO button activated · The gear selector in D position · Speed within the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h
· The road's downhill gradient is not
steeper than approx. 6%.
Deactivate Eco Coast In certain situations it may be desirable to deactivate the Eco Coast function. Examples of such situations include:

Deactivating Eco Coast and returning to engine braking can be performed as follows:
· Press the ECO button. · Move the gear lever to manual "S+/-"
position.
· Change gear with the steering wheel pad-
dle shifters.
· Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal.
Eco Coast - Limitations The function is not available if:
· cruise control is activated · the road's downhill gradient is steeper
than approx. 6%.
· manual gear changing is performed with
the steering wheel paddle shifters*
· engine and/or gearbox are not at normal
operating temperature.
· the gear selector is moved from D- to "S
+/-" position
· speed is outside the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h

More information and settings
The car's menu system MY CAR contains further information on the ECO concept - see the section MY CAR (p. 103). Related information
· General information on climate control (p.
115)

· on steep downhill gradients - to be able
to use engine braking.

· before an imminent overtaking manoeu-

vre - in order to be able to complete it in

the safest way possible.

289

08 Starting and driving

All Wheel Drive - AWD* The best traction possible is achieved with allwheel drive.

Foot brake The foot brake is used to reduce the car's speed while driving.

and after the car has been washed, it is advisable to carry out cleaning by braking gently for a short period while driving.

All Wheel Drive is always available

The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If one brake circuit is damaged then this will mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level and higher pedal pressure is needed to produce the normal braking effect.

Maintenance To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a brake servo.

IMPORTANT

WARNING

The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly.

All Wheel Drive (All Wheel Drive) means that the car is driving all four wheels at the same time. The power is automatically distributed between the front and rear wheels. An electronically controlled clutch system distributes the power to the wheels that have the best grip on the current road surface. This provides the best traction and prevents wheel spin. Under normal driving conditions, the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels.

The brake servo only works when the engine is running.
If the brake is used when the engine is switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the car. In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using engine braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used if the same gear is used downhill as up. For more general information on heavy loads on the car, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 395).

Contact a workshop for information about the procedure or engage a workshop to carry out the inspection - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols and messages Symbol Specification Constant glow Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss. Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started automatic function check.

All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in

rain, snow and icy conditions.

Cleaning the brake discs Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs

may result in delayed brake function. With

wet road surfaces, prior to long-stay parking

290 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

WARNING

and

illuminate at the same

time, there may be a fault in the brake sys-

tem.

If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

Related information
· Parking brake (p. 293) · Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 291)
· Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 292)
· Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p.
291)

Foot brake - anti-lock braking system The anti-lock braking system, ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), prevents the wheels from locking up during braking.
The function allows steering ability to be maintained, and it is easier to swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal. A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the engine has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal. A further automatic test of the ABS system may be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The test may be experienced as pulses in the brake pedal.
Related information
· Foot brake (p. 290) · Parking brake (p. 293) · Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 291)
· Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 292)

Foot brake - emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about sudden braking. The function means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds above 50 km/h in the event of sudden braking. After the car's speed has been slowed below 10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing to the normal constant glow while at the same time the hazard warning flashers (p. 86) are activated, and they flash until the driver changes engine speed with the accelerator pedal or they are deactivated with their button.
Related information
· Foot brake (p. 290) · Parking brake (p. 293) · Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 292)
· Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p.
291)

291

08 Starting and driving
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance Emergency brake assistance EBA (Emergency Brake Assist) helps to increase the braking force and so reduce the braking distance. EBA detects the driver's braking style and increases the braking force when necessary. The brake force can be reinforced up to the level when the ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is interrupted when the pressure on the brake pedal is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal lowers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases. Related information
· Foot brake (p. 290) · Parking brake (p. 293) · Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 291)
· Foot brake - anti-lock braking system (p.
291) 08
292

08 Starting and driving

Parking brake The parking brake holds the car stationary, when the driver's seat is empty, by mechanically locking/blocking two wheels.
Function A faint electric motor noise can be heard when the electrical parking brake is being applied. The noise can also be heard during the automatic function checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is applied when the car is moving then the normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear wheels when the car is almost stationary.
Low battery voltage If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can neither be released nor applied. Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low, see Jump starting with battery (p. 270).

Applying the parking brake

Parking brake control - apply.

1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

2. Press the control PUSH LOCK/PULL RELEASE.

The combined instrument pan-

el's symbol starts flashing - once there

is a constant glow the parking brake is

applied.

3. Release the foot brake pedal and make sure that the car is at a standstill position.

· When parking the vehicle, always engage
1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selector in position P (for automatic gearbox).

pressing and holding the control for PUSH LOCK/PULL RELEASE. The braking procedure is stopped when the control is released.
NOTE
In the event of emergency braking at speeds above 10 km/h a signal sounds during the braking procedure.
Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill:
· Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
· Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has automatic transmission, is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation.

Emergency brake

In an emergency the parking brake can be

applied when the vehicle is in motion by

}} 293

08 Starting and driving

|| Disengaging the parking brake

NOTE
The parking brake can also be released manually by depressing the clutch pedal instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recommends that the brake pedal is used.
Releasing automatically 1. Start the engine.

2. Start the engine.

3. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

4. Move the gear selector to position D or R and depress the accelerator.

The parking brake releases and

the combined instrument panel's sym-

bol extinguishes.

2. Engage 1st gear or reverse gear.

NOTE

3. Ease up the clutch and depress the accelerator.

For safety reasons, the parking brake is only released automatically if the engine is

Parking brake control - release. Cars with manual gearbox

The parking brake releases and

the combined instrument panel's sym-

bol extinguishes.

running and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The parking brake is released immediately on cars with automatic gearbox when the accelerator pedal is depressed

Releasing manually

Cars with automatic gearbox

and the gear selector is in position D or R.

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.13
2. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

Releasing manually
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch13.

Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car to roll backward when the parking brake

3. Pull the control PUSH LOCK/PULL RELEASE.

2. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

is released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid this by depressing the control while

The parking brake releases and

the combined instrument panel's sym-

3. Pull the control.

The parking brake releases and

driving off. Release the control when the engine achieves traction.

bol extinguishes.

the combined instrument panel's symbol extinguishes.

Replacing the brake linings The rear brake linings must be replaced at a

Releasing automatically 1. Put the seatbelt on.

workshop due to the design of the electric parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

13 For a car with the Keyless system: Press START/STOP ENGINE.
294

08 Starting and driving

Symbols and messages For information on how the combined instrument panel's text messages can be shown

and deleted, see Messages - handling (p. 102).

Symbol Message "Message"

Meaning/Action · Read the message in the combined instrument panel.

Park brake not fully released

A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied.
If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen.
· Read the message in the combined instrument panel.
A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released:
· Try to apply and release the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
· Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Note: A warning signal sounds if the journey is continued with this error message.

08
}} 295

08 Starting and driving

|| Symbol Message Parking brake not applied
Parking brake Service required

Meaning/Action
A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied:
· Try to release and apply the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
· Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed with the door open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged.
A fault has arisen:
· Try to apply and release the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
· Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

· If the car has to be parked before a pos-
sible fault has been rectified, then the wheels must be turned as if parking on a hill and 1st gear engaged (manual gearbox) or the gear selector must be in position P (automatic gearbox). A text message can be acknowledged by briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
Related information
· Foot brake (p. 290)

296

08 Starting and driving

Fording Fording means that the car is driven through a water-covered roadway. Fording must be carried out with great caution.
The car can be driven through water at a maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the car. When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function.
· Clean the electric contacts of the electric
engine block heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud.
· Do not let the car stand with water over
the sills for any long period of time - this could cause electrical malfunctions.

IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter. In depths greater than 25 cm, water could enter the transmission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of these systems. In the event of the engine stalling in water, do not try restart - tow the car from the water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of engine breakdown.
Related information
· Recovery (p. 316) · Towing (p. 313)

Overheating Under special conditions, for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat - in particular with a heavy load.

For information about overheating when driving with a trailer, see Driving with a trailer (p. 306).

· Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in hot climates.

· If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system is too high then a warning symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel's information display and a text message High engine temp Stop safely is shown there - stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes in order to cool down.

· If the text message High engine temp
Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop engine is shown then the engine must be switched off after stopping the car.

· In the event of overheating in the gearbox

a built-in protection function is activated

which, amongst other things, illuminates

a warning symbol in the combined instru-

ment panel, and its display shows the

text message Transmission hot Reduce

speed or Transmission hot Stop safely

- follow the recommendation given and

lower the speed and stop the car in a safe

way and allow the engine to run at idling

297

08 Starting and driving

speed for a few minutes in order to allow the gearbox to cool down.
· If the car overheats, the air conditioning
may be switched off temporarily.
· Do not turn the engine off immediately
you stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a time after the engine has been switched off.

Driving with open tailgate When driving with the tailgate open, toxic exhaust fumes can be sucked into the car through the cargo area.
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area.
Related information
· Loading (p. 142)

Overload - starter battery The electrical functions in the car load the starter battery (p. 361) to varying degrees. Avoid using the key position (p. 70) II when the engine is switched off. Instead use the I mode - which uses less power.
Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the engine is switched off. Examples of such functions are:
· ventilation fan · headlamps · windscreen wiper · audio system (high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low then the combined instrument panel's information display shows the text Low battery Power save mode. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.
In which case, charge the battery by starting the engine and then running it for at least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary.

298

08 Starting and driving

Before a long journey Before a long journey, it makes good sense to go through the following points:
· Check that the engine is working normally
and that fuel consumption (p. 403) is normal.
· Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil
or other fluid).
· Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths. · Carrying a warning triangle (p. 329) is a
legal requirement in certain countries.
Related information
· Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 346) · Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.
324)
· Lamp replacement (p. 352)

Winter driving For winter driving it is important to perform certain checks in order to ensure that the car can be driven safely.
Check the following in particular before the cold season:
· The engine coolant (p. 349) must contain
at least 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine against frost erosion down to approximately 35 °C. To achieve optimum antifreeze protection, different types of glycol must not be mixed.
· The fuel tank must be kept filled to pre-
vent condensation.
· Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold. For more information on suitable oils, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 395).
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather.

starter battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold.
· Use washer fluid (p. 361) to avoid ice
forming in the washer fluid reservoir. To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries.
Slippery driving conditions Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts.

· The condition of the starter battery and

charge level must be inspected. Cold

weather places great demands on the

299

08 Starting and driving

Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing The fuel filler flap can be opened/closed as follows:
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

Fuel filler flap - manual opening The fuel filler flap can be opened manually when electric opening from the passenger compartment is not possible.

Filling up with fuel Important things to consider when refuelling.
Opening/closing the fuel cap

Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the lighting panel - the flap opens when the button is released.
In the combined instrument panel's display the arrow on the symbol indicates which side of the car the fuel cap is located.
· Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in
until a click confirms that it is closed.
Related information
· Filling up with fuel (p. 300)
08

1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo area (same side as fuel filler flap).
2. Expand/open a perforated section in the isolation and locate a green cord with handle.
3. Pull the cord gently straight back until the fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".
IMPORTANT
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is required to disengage the hatch lock.
Related information
· Filling up with fuel (p. 300)

The fuel filler cap can be attached onto the flap. A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in the event of high outside temperatures. Open the cap slowly.
· After refuelling - refit the cap and turn it
until one or more clicking sounds are heard. Filling up with fuel
· Do not overfill the tank but fill until the
pump nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.

300

08 Starting and driving

Filling with a fuel can14 When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel located under the floor hatch in the cargo area. The funnel is located by the spare wheel or in the well under the floor hatch. Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into the filler pipe. The filler pipe has an openable cap and the funnel's pipe must be moved past the cap before filling can begin.
Related information
· Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 300) · Fuel - handling (p. 301)

Fuel - handling Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo must not be used as engine power and fuel consumption is negatively affected.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes. In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited.

IMPORTANT
Mixing different types of fuel or the use of fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's guarantees, and any associated service agreement. This applies to all engines. NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.
Related information
· Economical driving (p. 305) · Fuel - diesel (p. 302) · Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 305) · Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p.
403)
· Fuel tank - volume (p. 402)

Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.

Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.

14 Only applies to cars with diesel engine.

301

08 Starting and driving

Fuel - petrol Petrol is used as fuel.

Fuel - diesel Diesel is used as fuel.

IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:

Petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard. Most

Only use diesel fuel from well-known produc-

· Special additives

engines can be run with octane ratings of 95 and 98 RON. Only in exceptional cases should 91 RON be used.

ers. Never use diesel of dubious quality. Diesel should fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to

· Marine diesel fuel · Heating oil

· 95 RON can be used for normal driving. · 98 RON is recommended for optimum
performance and minimum fuel consumption. When driving in temperatures above +38 °C, fuel with the highest possible octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
IMPORTANT · Always refuel with unleaded petrol so
as not to damage the catalytic converter.
· Do not use additives not recom-
mended by Volvo.
Related information
· Fuel - handling (p. 301)

contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sulphur particles for example. At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel fuel designed for low temperatures around freezing point is available from the major oil companies. This fuel is less viscous at low temperatures and reduces the risk of paraffin precipitate. The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When refuelling, check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent and water.
IMPORTANT

· FAME15 (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and
vegetable oil. These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
Empty tank The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the tank may need to be vented in the workshop in order to restart the engine after fuelling. Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starvation, the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check. Do this before starting the engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with diesel:

· Economical driving (p. 305) · Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p.

Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard.

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and push it in to the end posi-

403)

The sulphur content must be a maximum

· Fuel tank - volume (p. 402)

of 50 ppm.

15 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.
302

08 Starting and driving

tion, see Key positions (p. 70) for more information. 2. Press the START button without depressing the brake and/or clutch pedal. 3. Wait approx. 1 minute.

Related information
· Fuel - handling (p. 301) · Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 305) · Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p.
403)

Catalytic converters The purpose of the catalytic converters is to purify exhaust gases. They are located close to the engine so that operating temperature is reached quickly.

4. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/or clutch pedal and then press the START button again.
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel shortage:

The catalytic converters consist of a monolith (ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/ rhodium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chemical reaction without being used up themselves.

· Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.
Draining condensation from the fuel filter The fuel filter separates condensation from the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine operation. The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet or if you suspect that the car has been filled with contaminated fuel. For more information, see Volvo service programme (p. 340).
IMPORTANT

Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor The Lambda-sond is part of a control system intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel economy (see Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 403)).
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This value is fed into an electronic system that continuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is continuously adjusted. These adjustments create optimal conditions for efficient combustion, and together with the three-way catalytic converter reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous oxides).

Certain special additives remove the water

separation in the fuel filter.

303

08 Starting and driving
|| Related information
· Economical driving (p. 305) · Fuel - petrol (p. 302) · Fuel - diesel (p. 302)
08

Fuel - bioethanol E85 Bioetanol E85 is used as the fuel for the car's engine. Do not modify the fuel system or its components, and do not replace components with parts that are not specifically designed for use with bioethanol.
WARNING
Methanol must not be used. A decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap shows the correct alternative fuel. The use of components not designed for bioethanol engines could cause fire, injury or engine damage.
Reserve fuel can The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol. For more information, see Starting the engine Flexifuel (p. 269).
IMPORTANT
Make sure the reserve fuel can is securely fastened and that its cap is sealed.
WARNING
Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosive gases could form in the reserve fuel can if it is refuelled with ethanol.

Related information
· Fuel - handling (p. 301) · Economical driving (p. 305)

304

08 Starting and driving

Diesel particle filter (DPF)

motorway. The car should then be driven for

Economical driving

Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,

approximately 20 minutes more.

Driving economically means driving smoothly

which results in more efficient emission control.

NOTE

while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing condi-

The particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the filter during normal driving. Socalled "regeneration" is started in order to burn away the particles and empty the filter.

The following may arise during regeneration:
· a smaller reduction of engine power
may be noticed temporarily

tions.

This requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature.

· fuel consumption may increase tem-
porarily

Regeneration of the particle filter is automatic

· a smell of burning may arise.

and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may

take a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel consumption may increase slightly during regeneration.

When regeneration is complete the warning text is cleared automatically.

Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in cold weather then the engine does not

Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.

reach normal operating temperature. This means that regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied. When the filter has become approx. 80% full of particles, a yellow warning triangle is

IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it may be difficult to start the engine and the filter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that the filter will need to be replaced.

shown in the combined instrument panel, and

the message Soot filter full See manual is shown in its information display.

Related information
· Fuel - handling (p. 301)

Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating temperature, preferably on a main road or

· Fuel - diesel (p. 302) · Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p.
403)

· Fuel tank - volume (p. 402)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 305

08 Starting and driving

· For lowest fuel consumption, activate

· Use engine braking to slow down, when it Driving with a trailer

ECO (p. 288)*16.
· Use the ECO Guide which indicates how
fuel-efficiently the car is being driven, see

can take place without risk to other road users.
· A roof load and ski box increase air resis-

When driving with a trailer there are a number of important points to think about regarding e.g. the towing bracket, the trailer and how

Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 63).
· Drive in the highest gear possible, adap-
ted to the current traffic situation and road - lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption. Use the gear indicator (p. 272).
· Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration
and heavy braking.
· High speed results in increased fuel con-
sumption - the wind resistance increases with speed.
· Do not run the engine to operating tem-
perature at idling speed, but rather drive with a light load as soon as possible - a cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.

tance, leading to higher consumption remove the load carriers when not in use.
· Avoid driving with open windows.
For information about Volvo Car Corporation's environmental philosophy, see Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy (p. 19). For more information about fuel consumption, see Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 403).
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving, such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering and brake servo.

the load is positioned in the trailer.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more detailed information on weights, see Weights (p. 390). If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then the car is delivered with the necessary equipment for driving with a trailer.
· The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
· If the towbar is retrofitted, check with
your Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer.

· Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO tyre pressure for best results, see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 407).
· Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump-
tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.

Related information
· Fuel - handling (p. 301) · Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p.
403)
· Fuel tank - volume (p. 402)

· Distribute the load on the trailer so that
the weight on the towing bracket complies with the specified maximum towball load.
· Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-
mended pressure for a full load. For tyre pressure label location, see Tyres - air

· Remove unnecessary items from the car -

pressure (p. 328).

the greater the load the higher the con-

sumption.

· The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.

16 Only applies to cars with automatic gearbox.
306 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

· Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.
· The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.
· For safety reasons, the maximum permit-
ted speed for the car when coupled with a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights.
· Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
· Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.

If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light are broken then the Bulb fail - Stop lamp trailer text is shown.
Level control* The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant height irrespective of the car's load (up to the maximum permissible weight). When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, which is normal.
Trailer weights For information on Volvo's permitted trailer weights, see Towing capacity and towball load (p. 391).
NOTE

Related information
· Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox (p.
308)
· Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox
(p. 308)
· Towing bracket/Towbar (p. 309) · Lamp replacement (p. 352)

Trailer cable An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.

The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.

Direction indicators and brake lights on

WARNING

the trailer If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indicators are broken, then the combined instru-

Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the

ment panel's symbol for direction indicators

event of sudden movement and braking.

flashes faster than normal and the information

display shows the text Bulb fail - Ind. signal trailer.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 307

08 Starting and driving

Driving with a trailer - manual gearbox When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
Overheating When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
· Do not run the engine at higher revolu-
tions than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm) - otherwise the oil temperature may become too high.
Diesel engine 5-cyl
· In the event of a risk of overheating the
optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000 rpm for optimal circulation of the coolant.
Related information
· Driving with a trailer (p. 306)

Driving with a trailer - automatic gearbox When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
· An automatic gearbox selects the opti-
mum gear related to load and engine speed.
· In the event of overheating a warning
symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel with a message that is shown in the information display - follow the recommendation given.
Steep inclines
· Do not lock the automatic transmission in
a higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine revolutions.
Parking on a hill 1. Depress the foot brake.

IMPORTANT
See also the specific information on slow driving with a trailer for cars with the Powershift automatic transmission, see Automatic gearbox -- Powershift* (p. 276).
Starting on a hill 1. Depress the foot brake. 2. Move the gear selector to driving posi-
tion D. 3. Release the parking brake. 4. Release the foot brake and start driving
off. Related information
· Automatic gearbox -- Geartronic* (p. 273)

2. Activate the parking brake.

3. Move the gear selector to position P.

4. Release the foot brake.

· Move the gear selector to park position P

when parking an automatic car with a

hitched trailer. Always use the parking

brake.

· Block the wheels with chocks when park-

ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.

308 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

08 Starting and driving

Towing bracket/Towbar A towing bracket means that it is possible to e.g. tow a trailer behind the car.
If the car is equipped with a detachable/ removable towbar, the installation instructions for the loose section must be followed carefully, see Detachable towbar - attachment/removal (p. 310).

Detachable towbar - storage Store the detachable towbar in the cargo area.

Detachable towbar - specifications Specifications for detachable towbar.
Specifications

G021485

WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:
· Follow the installation instructions
carefully.
· The detachable section must be
locked with the key before setting off.
· Check that the indicator window
shows green.
Important checks
· The towbar's towball must be cleaned
and greased regularly.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used, the towball must not be lubricated.

Towbar storage space.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towbar after use and store it in the appointed location in the car.
Related information
· Detachable towbar - specifications (p.
309)
· Detachable towbar - attachment/removal
(p. 310)
· Driving with a trailer (p. 306)

Related information
· Driving with a trailer (p. 306)

309

08 Starting and driving
||

Detachable towbar - attachment/ removal The attachment/removal of the detachable towbar is performed in the following way:
Attaching

G021488

G021489

Dimensions, mounting points (mm)

998

854

427

109

282

Side member

Ball centre

Related information

· Detachable towbar - attachment/removal

(p. 310)

· Detachable towbar - storage (p. 309)

· Driving with a trailer (p. 306)

310

Remove the protective cover by first pressing in the catch and then pulling the cover straight back .
Ensure that the mechanism is in the unlocked position by turning the key clockwise.

G021487

G018928

The indicator window must show red. Insert the towbar until you hear a click. The indicator window must show green.

G021490

08 Starting and driving

G000000 G021494 G021495

Turn the key anticlockwise to locked position. Remove the key from the lock.

Check that the towbar is secure by pulling it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, the remainder of the towbar should be clean and dry.

Safety cable. WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable in the intended bracket.
Removing the towbar

Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the unlocked position.
08
}} 311

08 Starting and driving
||

Push in the locking wheel and turn it anticlockwise until you hear a click.

Push the protective cover until it snaps tight.
Related information
· Detachable towbar - storage (p. 309) · Detachable towbar - specifications (p.
309)
· Driving with a trailer (p. 306)

Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while pulling the towbar rearward and upward.

WARNING

Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in

the car, see Detachable towbar - storage

(p. 309).

17 Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.
312

G018929

Trailer stabiliser - TSA17 The trailer stability assist (TSA - Trailer Stability Assist) function is designed to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake.
The trailer stability assist is included in the stability and traction control system (p. 175) (DSTC - Dynamic Stability and Traction Control).
Function The snaking phenomenon can occur with any car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring at lower speeds (70-90 km/h) if the trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a triggering factor, e.g.:
· Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
· Car with trailer drives on an uneven road
surface or in a pothole.
· Sweeping steering wheel movements.
Operation If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even impossible to suppress. This makes the car/trailer combination difficult to control and there is a risk that you could, for example,

08 Starting and driving

end up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway. The trailer stability assist continually monitors the car's movements, particularly lateral movements. If snaking is detected, the front wheels are individually braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car. If snaking is not eliminated the first time the trailer stability assist comes into action, the car/trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combination is stable once again, the system stops regulating and the driver once again has full control of the car. For more information, see Stability and traction control system (DSTC) - operation (p. 176)
Miscellaneous The trailer stability assist can engage within the speed interval 60-160 km/h.

such a situation the system cannot determine whether it is the trailer or the driver that is causing the snaking.
When the trailer stability assist is working, the combined instrument panel's DSTC symbol flashes. Related information
· Stability and traction control system
(DSTC) - symbols and messages (p. 178)

Towing During towing, one vehicle is towed by another vehicle using a tow rope.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward. Do not tow the vehicle at speeds higher than 80 km/h or for distances in excess of 80 km.
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for towing before towing begins. 1. Unlock the steering lock by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch and giving a long press on the START/ STOP ENGINE button - key position II is activated, see Key positions (p. 70) for more information about key positions. 2. The remote control key must remain in the ignition switch while the car is being towed.

NOTE
TSA function is switched off if the driver selects Sport mode, see Stability and traction control system (DSTC) (p. 175).
The trailer stability assist may fail to engage if the driver uses sudden steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in

3. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
4. Be prepared to brake to stop. 08

313

08 Starting and driving

WARNING
· Check that the steering lock is
unlocked before towing.
· The remote control key must be in key
position II - in position I all airbags are deactivated.
· Never remove the remote control key
from the ignition switch when the car is being towed.

lubrication. If towing still has to take place, the route must be as short as possible and then with very low speed. In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not the car is equipped with Powershift transmission, this can be verified by checking the designation on the gearbox label under the bonnet, see Type designations (p. 386). The designation "MPS6" means that it is Powershift transmission - otherwise it is

Jump starting Do not tow the car to bump start the engine. Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged and the engine does not start, see Jump starting with battery (p. 270).
IMPORTANT
The catalytic converter may be damaged during attempts to tow-start the engine.

WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off - the brake pedal needs to be depressed about 5 times more heavily and the steering is considerably heavier than normal.

Geartronic automatic transmission.
IMPORTANT
Avoid towing.
· However, the car can be towed for a
short distance at low speed to move it from a dangerous position - not further

Related information
· Towing eye (p. 315)

Manual gearbox Prior to towing:

than 10 km and not faster than 10 km/h. Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels roll-

Move gear lever into neutral and release the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Geartronic Prior to towing: Move the gear selector to position N and

ing forward.
· In the event of moving a longer dis-
tance than 10 km, the car must be transported with the drive wheels raised from the road - professional recovery is recommended.

release the parking brake.

Prior to towing:

Automatic gearbox Powershift The model with Powershift transmission should not be towed as it is dependent on the

Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.

engine running in order to receive sufficient

314

08 Starting and driving

Towing eye The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or rear.
Attaching the towing eye

The cover for the towing eye's attachment point is available in two variants which must be opened in different ways:
· Open the variant with a recess using a
coin or similar inserted in the recess, turning it outwards. Then turn out the cover completely and remove it.
· The second variant has a marking
along one side or in a corner: Press the marking with a finger and fold out the opposite side/corner at the same time using a coin or similar - the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed.
Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. using the wheel wrench.

WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
Related information
· Towing (p. 313) · Recovery (p. 316)

After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to its place.

Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.

The towing eye may be used to pull the car

up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed plat-

form. The car's position and ground clear-

ance determine whether it is possible. If the

slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too

Take out the towing eye that is located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.

steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up using the towing

eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehi-

cle's lifting device if necessary.

315

08 Starting and driving

Recovery Recovery means that the vehicle is transported away by means of another vehicle. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance. The towing eye may be used to pull the car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible. If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up using the towing eye. Raise the car using the recovery vehicle's lifting device if necessary.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transported with the wheels rolling forward.
· An All Wheel Drive car (AWD) with
raised front suspension must not be towed at speeds above 70 km/h. It should not be towed further than 50 km.
Related information
· Towing (p. 313)

316

WHEELS AND TYRES

09 Wheels and tyres

09 Tyres - direction of rotation Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow.

NOTE
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the same type and dimension, and also the same make.

Follow the recommended tyre pressures specified in the tyre pressure table (p. 407). Related information
· Tyres - dimensions (p. 322) · Tyres - speed ratings (p. 323) · Tyres - load index (p. 323) · Tyres - maintenance (p. 318) · Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 320)

G021778

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation. The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected. Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding).

Tyres - maintenance Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is to provide grip on the road surface, dampen vibration and protect the wheel from wear.
Driving characteristics Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the car performs.
Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that are stored for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.

318

09 Wheels and tyres

New tyres

Wear and maintenance

Related information

Correct tyre pressure (p. 328) results in more

· Tyres - dimensions (p. 322)

even wear. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns

· Tyres - speed ratings (p. 323) · Tyres - load index (p. 323) · Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 318)

arising, the front and rear wheels can be

· Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 320)

switched with each other. A suitable distance

for the first change is approx. 5000 km and

then at 10000 km intervals. Volvo recom-

mends that you contact an authorised Volvo

workshop for checking if you are uncertain

about tread depth. If significant differences in

Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is especially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 1510. The tyre in the figure was manufactured in week 15 of 2010.

wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, the least worn tyres must always be placed on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing forwards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possible complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels. Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging up - and not standing up.

Summer and winter tyres When summer and winter wheels are changed the wheels should be marked with which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right.

WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control over the car.

319

09 Wheels and tyres

09 Tyres - tread wear indicators

Wheel bolts

A tread wear indicator shows the status of the tyre's tread.

Wheel bolts are used to fasten the wheels at the hubs and are available in different versions.

IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm. Overtightening can damage the nuts and the bolts.

Tools Amongst other things, the car contains towing eye, jack* and wheel bolt wrench*.

Tread wear indicators. Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless bands across the width of the tread. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow.
Related information
· Tyres - dimensions (p. 322) · Tyres - speed ratings (p. 323) · Tyres - load index (p. 323) · Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 318) · Tyres - maintenance (p. 318)

G021829

Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
Locking wheel bolts* Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both aluminium and steel rims. Under the cargo area floor there is space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel bolts.
Related information
· Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 322)

Located under the cargo area floor are the car's towing eye, jack* and wheel wrench*. There is also space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel bolts.
Related information
· Emergency puncture repair (p. 333) · Towing eye (p. 315) · Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.
324)
· Wheel bolts (p. 320) · Jack* (p. 321)

320 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

09 Wheels and tyres

Jack* A jack is used to raise the car, e.g. when changing the tyres.
The original jack should only be used for changing to the spare wheel. The jack's thread must always be well greased.
Tools - returning into place

Related information
· Warning triangle (p. 329) · Emergency puncture repair (p. 333)

The tools and jack* must be returned to their correct places after use. The jack needs to be cranked together to the correct position in order to have space.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.

Winter tyres

Winter tyres are tyres that are adapted for winter road conditions.

Winter tyres Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels.

NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable.

Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.

Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recommends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 321

09 Wheels and tyres

Using snow chains

Snow chains may only be used on the front

wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).

Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow

chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this

wears out both the snow chains and tyres.

WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to your car and lead to an accident.

Related information
· Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.
324)

Wheel and wheel rim dimensions Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in accordance with the examples in the table below. The car has an approval for the complete vehicle. This means that certain combinations of wheel (wheel rim) and tyre are approved. Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimensions, for example: 7Jx16x50.
7 Rim width in inches J Rim flange profile 16 Rim diameter in inches 50 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface against the hub)
Related information
· Tyres - dimensions (p. 322) · Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 407)

Tyres - dimensions The car's wheels (wheel rims) and tyres have a certain dimension, see the examples in the table below. The car has an approval for the complete vehicle. This means that certain combinations of wheels (wheel rims) and tyres are approved. The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Example of designation: 215/55R16 97W.
215 Tyre width (mm) 55 Ratio between tyre wall height and
tyre width (%) R Radial ply 16 Rim diameter in inches (") 97 Codes for the maximum permitted
tyre load, tyre load index (LI) W Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case 270 km/h.)

322

09 Wheels and tyres

WARNING

Tyres - load index

Tyres - speed ratings

19-inch wheels must never be used on cars that are not equipped with the RDesign or Sport chassis options. The use of 19-inch wheels on cars with standard chassis constitutes a safety risk, with a risk of vehicle damage, and it impairs the car's driving characteristics.

Load index indicates a tyre's ability to carry a certain load. Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres. Minimum permissible index is indicated in the load index table.

Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed and therefore belongs to a particular speed rating (SS - Speed Symbol). Tyre speed class must at least correspond with the car's top speed. Minimum speed rating is indicated in the speed rating table below. The only exception to these regula-

Related information
· Tyres - speed ratings (p. 323) · Tyres - load index (p. 323) · Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 318) · Tyres - maintenance (p. 318) · Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 407) · Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 322)

Related information
· Tyres - dimensions (p. 322) · Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 407) · Tyres - speed ratings (p. 323) · Tyres - maintenance (p. 318)

tions is the winter tyre (p. 321)1, where a lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h). Traffic regulations determine how fast a car can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres.

NOTE

The maximum permitted speed is specified in the table.

Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres) T 190 km/h H 210 km/h V 240 km/h

1 Both metal-studded and studless tyres.

323

09 Wheels and tyres

W 270 km/h

Y 300 km/h

WARNING
The car must be fitted with tyres which have the same or a higher load index (p. 323) (LI) and speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre with too low a load index or speed rating is used, it may overheat.
Related information
· Tyres - dimensions (p. 322) · Tyres - load index (p. 323) · Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 318)

Changing wheels - removing wheels The car's wheels can be changed for e.g. winter wheels/winter tyres.
Spare wheel* The following instructions only apply if a spare wheel has been purchased as an accessory for the car. If the car is not equipped with a spare wheel - see information about Emergency puncture repair (TMK) (p. 333).
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only intended for use temporarily and must be replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as possible. The car's handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The car's ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare wheel must not be repaired.
The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table (p. 407).

IMPORTANT · Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a
spare wheel on the car.
· The car must never be driven fitted
with more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel. The spare wheel is supplied in a bag which must be secured on the cargo area floor using straps.
Cars with four load retaining eyelets. Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag out towards you. Attach the sewn-in tensioning strap hooks in the front load retaining eyelets. Attach the long strap into one of the front load retaining eyelets, run the strap diagonally over the spare wheel and through the upper handle. Tighten the short tensioning strap onto the long one. Attach the rear load retaining eyelet and tighten.

324 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

09 Wheels and tyres

Taking out the spare wheel 1. Loosen the straps, lift out the spare wheel
from the cargo area and remove it from the spare wheel bag.
2. Fold up the cargo area floor.

WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.

4. Cars with steel rims have removable

wheel covers. Use the removal tool to

hook in and pull off any full-wheel wheel

covers. Alternatively, the wheel covers

can be pulled away by hand.

3. Lift the tools and jack out from the foam block.
Removing Set up warning triangle (p. 329) if a wheel is replaced in trafficked location. The car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal surface. 1. Apply the parking brake, (p. 293) and
engage reverse gear, or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox.

NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's label. The label also indicates the jack's maximum lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting height.
2. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and removal tool for wheel covers* located under the cargo floor in the cargo area. If another jack is selected, see Raising the car (p. 341).

3. Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels which will remain on the ground to prevent them from rolling. Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones for example.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

}} 325

09 Wheels and tyres

5. Screw together the towing eye with the

wheel wrench* until the stop position in

accordance with the following figure.

WARNING
Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point.
7. There are two jacking points on each side of the car. There is a recess in the plastic cover at each point. Crank the foot of the jack down so it is pressed squarely on the ground.

Related information
· Changing wheels - fitting (p. 327) · Jack* (p. 321) · Warning triangle (p. 329) · Wheel bolts (p. 320)

IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed into all threads in the wheel bolt wrench.
6. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlockwise with the wheel wrench.

IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and level.
8. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.

326 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

09 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels - fitting

NOTE

It is important that the procedure for fitting the wheel is carried out correctly.
Fitting 1. Clean the contact surfaces between
wheel and hub. 2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.

· After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
· Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.

The car's regular jack is designed only for use occasionally and for a short time, such as when changing a wheel with a punctured tyre, switching between summer tyres and winter tyres, etc. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel,

3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate.

NOTE
The wheel cover outlet for the valve must

use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment.

be positioned over the valve on the wheel

rim during fitting.

Related information

· Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.

WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.

324)
· Jack* (p. 321) · Warning triangle (p. 329)

Passengers must leave the car when it is

· Wheel bolts (p. 320)

raised on the jack.

4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is important that the wheel bolts are tightened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check the torque with a torque wrench.

Park the car such that passengers have the car, or ideally a crash barrier, between themselves and the roadway.

5. Refit any full wheel covers.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 327

09 Wheels and tyres

09 Tyres - air pressure Tyres can have different air pressures which are measured in bar.

Tyre pressure label

Check the air pressure in the tyres The tyre pressures must be checked every month.
· Tyre pressure for the car's recommended
tyre dimension
· ECO pressure2

· Tyres - maintenance (p. 318) · Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 320)

G021830

NOTE
· Check the tyre pressure when the
tyres are cold. "Cold tyres" means that the tyres are at the same temperature as the outdoor temperature. The tyres will heat up and the tyre pressures will increase after driving for a few kilometres.
· Tyre pressures which are too low will
increase fuel consumption, reduce tyre service life and impair the car's handling. Driving with tyre pressures which are too low may lead to the tyres overheating and sustaining damage. Tyre pressures affect ride comfort, road noise and steering.
· Tyre pressure decreases over time,
this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.

The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions. This is also specified in the tyre pressure table, see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 407).
Fuel economy, ECO pressure In order to obtain optimum fuel economy at speeds below 160 km/h an ECO pressure is recommended (applies to both full and light load), see Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 407).
Related information
· Tyres - dimensions (p. 322) · Tyres - speed ratings (p. 323) · Tyres - load index (p. 323)

2 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.

328

Warning triangle The warning triangle is used to warn other road users of a stationary vehicle.
Storage and folding up

09 Wheels and tyres

Lift the floor hatch and take out the warn- First aid kit*

ing triangle.

The first aid box contains first aid equipment.

Take the warning triangle from the case, fold out and assemble the two loose sides.

Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.

Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic.

Ensure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the cargo area after use.

NOTE
If the car has been locked with privacy locking then the boot lid/tailgate and floor hatch cannot be opened, see Privacy locking* (p. 156).

A case with first aid equipment is located under the floor in the cargo area.
NOTE
If the car has been locked with privacy locking then the boot lid/tailgate and floor hatch cannot be opened, see Privacy locking* (p. 156).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 329

09 Wheels and tyres

09 Tyre pressure monitoring*

IMPORTANT

Tyre pressure monitoring* - adjust

Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)3 warns the driver when the pressure is too low in one or more of the car's tyres.

If a fault should arise in the tyre pressure system a warning lamp in the combined instrument panel will illuminate and a message will be shown. This can be for

(recalibration)
Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)4 warns the driver when the pressure is too low in one or

Tyre pressure monitoring uses sensors located inside the air valve in each wheel. When the car is driven at about 40 km/h the

various reasons, e.g. fitting a wheel not equipped with a sensor adapted for Volvo's tyre pressure monitoring system.

more of the car's tyres. TPMS can be adjusted in order to follow Volvo's tyre pressure recommendations (p. 328),

system detects the tyre pressure. If the pressure is too low then a warning lamp in the combined instrument panel illuminates and a message is shown in the information display.
Both factory-fitted and optional wheels can

Related information
· Tyre pressure monitoring* - adjust (recali-
bration) (p. 330)
· Tyre pressure monitoring* - rectifying low
tyre pressure (p. 331)

when driving with a heavy load for example.
NOTE
The engine must not be running when the tyres are calibrated.

be equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves. If wheels without TPMS sensors are used or if a sensor has failed then Tyre press. syst Service required will be shown.

· Tyre pressure monitoring* - activate/
deactivate (p. 331)
· Tyre pressure monitoring* - recommenda-
tions (p. 332)
· Tyre pressure monitoring - driveable

The settings are made with the control in the centre console, see MY CAR (p. 103). 1. Inflate the tyres to the required pressure
and select key position I or II.

Always check the system after changing a

punctured tyres* (p. 332)

2. Select the menu system MY CAR to open

wheel in order to ensure that replacement

the menus for tyre pressure.

wheels work with the system.

3. Select Calibrate tyre pressure.

For information on the correct tyre pressure, see Tyres - air pressure (p. 328). The system does not replace normal tyre maintenance.

4. Press OK. 5. Start the car and drive at least at 40 km/h
for a total of at least 1 minute and check that the message disappears.

> Then the TPMS is recalibrated to the new tyre pressure.

3 Option only in certain markets. 4 Option only in certain markets.
330 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information
· Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 330) · Tyres - air pressure (p. 328)

09 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure monitoring* - rectifying Tyre pressure monitoring* - activate/

low tyre pressure

deactivate

Tyre pressure monitoring TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)5 warns the driver when the pressure is too low in one or more of the car's tyres.

Tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)6 warns the driver when the pressure is too low in one or more of the car's tyres.

If a message for low tyre pressure is shown in the display: 1. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres. 2. Inflate the tyre(s) to the correct pressure. 3. Drive at least at 40 km/h for a total of at
least 1 minute and check that the message disappears.
Related information
· Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 330)

NOTE
The engine must not be running when tyre pressure monitoring is activated/deactivated.
The settings are made with the control in the centre console, see MY CAR (p. 103). 1. Select key position I or II. 2. Select the system MY CAR to open the
menus for tyre pressure. 3. Select Tyre pressure system/Pressure
monitoring and press OK. > An X is shown in the information dis-
play if the system is activated, the option disappears if the system is deactivated.

Related information
· Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 330)

5 Option only in certain markets. 6 Option only in certain markets.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 331

09 Wheels and tyres

09 Tyre pressure monitoring* recommendations Tyre pressure monitoring TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)7 warns the driver when the pressure is too low in one or more of the car's tyres. · Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors are fitted to all wheels on the car. · Volvo recommends that sensors are not moved between different wheels.
WARNING
When inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS, hold the nozzle of the pump directly against the valve to avoid damaging the valve.
Related information
· Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 330)

Tyre pressure monitoring - driveable punctured tyres* If SST (Self Supporting run flat Tires)* is selected, the car is also equipped with TPMS (p. 330).
This type of tyre has a specially reinforced side wall that makes continued driving possible to a limited extent despite the tyre losing all or some of its pressure. These tyres are fitted on a special rim. (Normal tyres can also be fitted to this rim.) If an SST tyre loses tyre pressure then the yellow TPMS lamp in the combined instrument panel illuminates and a message is shown in the information display. If this occurs, reduce speed to max. 80 km/h. The tyre must be replaced as soon as possible. Drive carefully, in some cases it can be difficult to see which tyre is faulty. In order to establish which tyre needs attention, check all four tyres.

WARNING
Only people with knowledge of SST tyres should fit them. SST tyres must only be fitted together with TPMS. After an error message about low tyre pressure has been shown, do not drive faster than 80 km/h. Maximum mileage before tyre replacement is 80 km. Avoid hard driving such as sudden braking or turning. SST tyres must be replaced if they are damaged or punctured.
Related information
· Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 330)

7 Option only in certain markets.
332 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

09 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair Emergency puncture repair, where the emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 407).

IMPORTANT

Emergency puncture repair kit -

If the compressor for emergency puncture repair is connected to one of the two sockets (p. 141) in the tunnel console then no

location Emergency puncture repair kit (TMK Temporary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a

other current consumer may be connected

puncture and check and adjust the tyre pres-

The emergency puncture repair kit (p. 334)

to the other one.

sure (p. 407).

consists of a compressor and a bottle of sealant. The sealing works as a temporary repair.

NOTE

Location of the emergency puncture repair kit

The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced before its expiration date and after use. The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured

The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo.

in the tread.

NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency puncture repair kit if they have larger slits, cracks or similar damage. Connect the compressor to one of the car's 12 V sockets. Choose the socket that is nearest to the punctured tyre.

Related information
· Emergency puncture repair - operation (p.
335)
· Emergency puncture repair - rechecking
(p. 336)
· Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 334)
· Tools (p. 320)

The emergency puncture repair kit is located under the floor in the cargo area. Set up the warning triangle (p. 329) if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location.
NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.

333

09 Wheels and tyres

IMPORTANT

If the compressor for emergency puncture repair is connected to one of the two sockets (p. 141) in the tunnel console then no other current consumer may be connected to the other one.

NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency puncture repair has been tested and approved by Volvo.
Related information
· Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 334)
· Emergency puncture repair kit - sealant
(p. 338)
· Emergency puncture repair (p. 333)

Emergency puncture repair kit overview Emergency puncture repair, where the emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 407).
Label, maximum permitted speed Switch Cable Bottle holder (orange cap) Protective cap Pressure reducing valve Air hose Sealing fluid bottle Pressure gauge

Related information
· Emergency puncture repair kit - location
(p. 333)
· Emergency puncture repair kit - sealant
(p. 338)
· Emergency puncture repair (p. 333)

334

09 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair operation Emergency puncture repair, where the emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 407).
Emergency puncture repair

1. Detach the label for maximum permitted speed (which is fitted on one side of the compressor) and affix it to the steering wheel. WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the case of contact with skin, wash away the fluid with soap and water.

4. Screw the bottle into its holder.

WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Connect the hose from the compressor to the valve.
6. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and start the car.
NOTE
If the compressor is connected to one of the two 12 V sockets, in the tunnel console, no other current consumer must be connected to the other one.

WARNING

2. Check that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and the air hose.

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

For information on the function of the parts, see Emergency puncture repair kit - overview (p. 334).

NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in.
3. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the bottle's stopper.

}} 335

09 Wheels and tyres

7. Flick the switch to position I.

WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.

NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.

8. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

9. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar. (Release air with the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.
10. Switch off the compressor and unplug the cable from the 12 V socket.
11. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit the valve cap.
12. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Related information
· Emergency puncture repair (p. 333) · Emergency puncture repair - rechecking
(p. 336)
· Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 334)

Emergency puncture repair rechecking Emergency puncture repair, where the emergency puncture repair kit (TMK - Temporary Mobility Kit) is used to seal a puncture and check and adjust the tyre pressure (p. 407).
Check tyre pressure 1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge.
· If it is below 1.3 bar8 then the tyre is
insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.
· If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3
bar8, the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure table, see Tyres approved tyre pressures (p. 407). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

8 1 bar = 100 kPa.
336

09 Wheels and tyres

WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
3. Make sure the compressor is switched off. Detach the air hose and cable. Fit the valve cap.
NOTE · After a tyre has been inflated, always
refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
· Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Advise the workshop that the tyre contains

Emergency puncture repair kit -

sealing fluid.

inflating the tyres

WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Related information
· Emergency puncture repair (p. 333) · Emergency puncture repair - operation (p.
335)
· Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 334)

The car's original tyres can be inflated using the compressor in the emergency puncture repair kit (p. 334). 1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and air hose. 2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.

WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that you drive to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre.

3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I.

337

09 Wheels and tyres

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

Emergency puncture repair kit sealant The container (bottle) with the emergency puncture repair kit (p. 334) contains sealant

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in

and it can be replaced.

accordance with the tyre pressure table,

Replace the bottle when the expiration date

Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 407). Release air using the pressure reducing

has passed. Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste.

valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

6. Switch off the compressor Detach the air

WARNING

hose and cable. 7. Refit the dust cap.

The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.

Related information
· Emergency puncture repair (p. 333) · Emergency puncture repair kit - overview
(p. 334)

Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. Store out of the reach of children.

· Emergency puncture repair - rechecking
(p. 336)

Related information
· Emergency puncture repair (p. 333)

338

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

10 Maintenance and service
Volvo service programme To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
10 Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Related information
· Climate control system - fault tracing and
repair (p. 352)
340

Raising the car When raising the car it is important that the jack or lifting arms are fitted in the intended points on the car's underbody.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with the equipment.

10 Maintenance and service
10

}} 341

10 Maintenance and service
||
10
Jacking points (arrows) for the jack that belongs to the car and lifting points (marked in red). If the car is raised with a front workshop jack then it must be positioned under one of the four lifting points furthest in under the car. If the car is raised with a rear workshop jack then it must be positioned under one of the lifting points. Ensure that the workshop jack is positioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always use axle stands or similar. If the car is raised with a two-pillar workshop lift then the front and rear lifting arms can be positioned under the outer lifting points (jacking points). Alternatively, the inner lifting points can be used at the front. Related information
· Changing wheels - removing wheels (p.
324) 342

10 Maintenance and service

Bonnet - opening and closing The bonnet can be opened when the handle in the passenger compartment has been turned clockwise and the lock by the grille has been moved to the left.

Move the catch to the left and open the

Engine compartment - overview

bonnet. (The catch hook is located between the headlamp and grille, see

The overview shows normal checking points.

illustration.)

Engine compartment 4 cyl. 2.0 l1

10
WARNING

Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.

Related information
· Engine compartment - checking (p. 344) · Engine compartment - overview (p. 343)

The handle for bonnet opening is always on the left-hand side.
Turn the handle about 20-25 degrees clockwise. You will hear when the catch releases.

The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on engine variant.
Filling engine oil Coolant expansion tank Radiator Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid (located on the driver's side) Battery Relay and fuse box Filling washer fluid Air filter

1 Does not apply to the B4204T7 engine - see instead the following heading "Engine compartment except 4-cyl. 2.0 l".

343

10 Maintenance and service

|| WARNING

The ignition system has very high voltage

and output. The voltage in the ignition sys-

tem is highly dangerous. The car's electrical system must always be in key position

0 when work is being performed in the

engine compartment; see Key positions -

functions at different levels (p. 70).

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the car's electrical system is in key position II or when the engine is hot.

Engine compartment except 4 cyl. 2.0 l2

Engine oil dipstick3 Radiator Filling engine oil Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid (located on the driver's side) Battery Relay and fuse box Filling washer fluid Air filter

The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Power steering fluid reservoir

WARNING
The ignition system has very high voltage and output. The voltage in the ignition system is highly dangerous. The car's electrical system must always be in key position 0 when work is being performed in the engine compartment; see Key positions functions at different levels (p. 70). Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the car's electrical system is in key position II or when the engine is hot.
Related information
· Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 343) · Engine compartment - checking (p. 344)

2 Also applies to the B4204T7 engine. 3 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick (5-cyl. diesel). 4 However, does apply to the B4204T7 engine.

344

Engine compartment - checking Some oils and fluids should be checked at regular intervals.
Regular checking Check the following oils and fluids at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
· Coolant · Engine oil · Power steering fluid (not cars with 4-cyl.
2.0 litre engine4)
· Washer fluid
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start automatically some after the engine has been switched off. Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
Related information
· Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 343) · Engine compartment - overview (p. 343) · Coolant - level (p. 349) · Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 346)

· Power steering fluid - level (p. 351) · Washer fluid - filling (p. 361)

10 Maintenance and service

Engine oil - general

When driving under adverse conditions, see

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can

Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 395).

be applied.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo recommends:

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Certain engine variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the combined instrument panel's warning symbol for low oil pressure is used. Other variants have an oil level sensor, when the driver is informed via the instru-

ment's warning symbol

and display

345

10 Maintenance and service

texts. Certain variants have both systems.

Engine oil - checking and filling

Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.

The oil level is checked on certain engine vari-

Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord-

ants with the electronic oil level sensor, on

ance with the intervals specified in the Serv-

other engine variants with the oil dipstick.

ice and Warranty Booklet.

Engine with oil dipstick5

Using oil of a higher than specified grade is

permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-

ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a

higher grade; see Engine oil - adverse driving

conditions (p. 395).

G021734 G021737

For filling capacities, see Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 396). Related information
· Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 346)

Dipstick and filler pipe. Checking the oil level in a new car is especially important before the first scheduled oil change.

The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.
Measurement and filling if required 1. Ensure that the car is level. After switch-
ing off the engine it is important to wait 5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back to the sump. 2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick. 3. Re-insert the dipstick.

Volvo recommends checking the oil level every 2 500 km. The most accurate measurements are made on a cold engine before starting. The measurement will be inaccurate if taken immediately after the engine is switched off. The dipstick will indicate that the level is too low because the oil has not had time to flow down into the oil sump.

4. Pull it out and check the level. 5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres
should be added. If the level is significantly below, then an additional amount is required. 6. If required, check the level again, do it after driving a short distance. Then repeat steps 1-4.

5 Does not apply to the 4-cyl. 2.0 litre or 5-cyl. diesel, which have electronic oil level sensor. However, does apply to the B4204T7 engine.

346

10 Maintenance and service

WARNING
Never fill above the MAX mark. The level should never be above MAX or below MIN as this could lead to engine damage.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire. Engine with electronic oil level sensor, 4-cyl. 2.0 l6
Filler pipe.7 You do not need to take action with respect to the engine oil level before a message is shown in the display, see the illustration below.

IMPORTANT

If notified of low oil level, only fill with the volume specified, for example, 0.5 litres.

10
NOTE

Message and graph in the display. The left-hand display shows the digital combined instrument panel and the right-hand the analogue.
Message
Engine oil level

The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must have been driven approx. 30 km and have been stationary for 2 hours with the engine switched off and on level ground before oil level indication is correct.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.

The oil level is checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off, see Menu navigation combined instrument panel (p. 100).

Measuring the oil level, 4-cyl. 2.0 l If the oil level needs to be checked then it should be carried out in accordance with the sequence below.

WARNING If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may be too high.

1. Activate key position II; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 70).

6 Does not apply to the B4204T7 engine - see instead the earlier heading "Engine with oil dipstick". 7 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.

}} 347

10 Maintenance and service

2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand stalk switch to position Oil level.

Engine with electronic oil level sensor, 5-cyl. diesel

> You will then see information displayed

about the engine oil level.

For more information on menu naviga-

tion, see Menu navigation - combined

instrument panel (p. 100).

NOTE
If the right conditions for measuring the oil level are not met (time after engine shutdown, the car's inclination, outside temperature, etc.) then the message Not available will be shown. This does not mean that there is something wrong in the car's systems.

Filler pipe.8 You do not need to take action with respect to the engine oil level before a message is shown in the display, see the illustration below.

Message and graph in the display. The left-hand display shows the digital combined instrument panel and the right-hand the analogue.
Message Engine oil level The oil level is checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off, see Menu navigation combined instrument panel (p. 100).
WARNING If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may be too high.

8 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
348

10 Maintenance and service

IMPORTANT In the event of the message Oil level low Refill 0.5 litre, only fill with 0.5 litres.
NOTE
The oil level is only detected by the system during driving. The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must be driven about 30 km before the oil level display is correct.

2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand

Coolant - level

stalk switch to position Oil level.

The coolant cools the internal combustion

> You will then see information displayed engine to the correct operating temperature.

about the engine oil level.

The heat that is transferred from the engine to

For more information on menu navigation, see Menu navigation - combined

the coolant can be used to heat the passenger compartment.

instrument panel (p. 100).

The coolant level must lie between the MIN

and MAX marks on the expansion tank.

Checking the level and topping up

WARNING
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) appears as shown in the illustration below. The level must never be above MAX or below MIN, as this could lead to engine damage.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
Measuring the oil level, 5-cyl. diesel If the oil level needs to be checked then it should be carried out in accordance with the sequence below. 1. Activate key position II; see Key positions
- functions at different levels (p. 70).

The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recommended filling level is 4. Message and graph in the display. The left-hand display shows the digital combined instrument panel and the righthand the analogue. Related information
· Engine oil - general (p. 345)

When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. It is important that the mixture of coolant concentrate and water is correct for the prevailing weather conditions. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate.

349

10 Maintenance and service

|| WARNING

Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant

requires topping up when the engine is at

operating temperature, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to gently

release the overpressure.

For capacities and for standards regarding water quality; see Coolant - grade and volume (p. 398).
Check the coolant regularly The level must lie between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank. If the system is not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.

IMPORTANT
· A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.
· Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
· Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
· Mix the coolant with approved quality
tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo recommendations.
· When changing coolant/replacing
cooling system components, flush the cooling system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with readymixed coolant.
· The engine must only be run with a
well-filled cooling system. Otherwise, temperatures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head.

Brake and clutch fluid - level Brake and clutch fluid level should be between the reservoir MIN and MAX marks.
Checking the level Brake and clutch fluid have a common reservoir. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir. Check the level regularly. Change the brake fluid every other year or at every other regular service. For capacities and recommended brake fluid grade, see Brake fluid - grade and volume (p. 401). The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent braking, such as driving in mountains or tropical climates with high humidity.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo recommends that the reason for the loss of brake fluid is investigated by an authorised Volvo workshop.

350

Filling

10 Maintenance and service

Power steering fluid - level The power steering fluid level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. The fluid does not need to be changed.
Cars with the 4-cyl. 2.0 litre engine have no oil reservoir for the power steering9.

NOTE

If a fault should arise in the power steering

system, or if the engine is switched off and

must be towed, then the car can still be steered.

The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side. The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover over the cold zone in the engine compartment. The round cover must be removed first before the reservoir cap can be reached.
Turn and open the cover located on the covering. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks, which are located on the inside of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.

IMPORTANT
Keep the area around the power steering fluid reservoir clean when checking. The cover must not be opened.
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not require changing. The fluid level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. For recommended fluid grade, see Power steering fluid - grade (p. 401).

9 However, cars with the B4204T7 engine have an oil reservoir for the power steering.

351

10 Maintenance and service

Climate control system - fault tracing Lamp replacement

and repair

Lamp replacement can be carried out for

The air conditioning system must only be

bulbs. When replacing LED and Xenon lamps,

serviced and repaired by an authorised work-

please refer to a workshop.

shop.

The bulbs are specified (p. 358). The follow-

Troubleshooting and repair

ing list contains locations of bulbs and other

The air conditioning system contains fluores-

light sources that are specialised, such as

cent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light when LED10 lamps, or are unsuitable for changing

looking for leaks.

for some other reason, except at a workshop:

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING

· Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon
lamps)
· Daytime running lights/Position/parking
lamps front

The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.

· Side marker lamps front · Cornering lights · Side direction indicators, door mirrors · Approach lighting, door mirrors

Related information
· Volvo service programme (p. 340)

· Interior lighting apart from Courtesy light-
ing front
· Glovebox lighting

· Position/parking lamps rear/Side marker
lamps rear

· Brake light.

WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the replacement of Xenon lamps must be carried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Working with Xenon lamps demands extreme caution because the headlamp is equipped with a high voltage unit.
WARNING
The car's electrical system must be in key position 0 for bulb replacement; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 70).
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recommend that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.

10 LED (Light Emitting Diode)
352

10 Maintenance and service

NOTE

Lamp replacement - headlamps

Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation

All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the engine compartment. First loosen and remove the whole headlamp. Removing the headlamp

is normally vented out of the lamp housing

Set the car's electrical system in key position

when the lamp has been switched on for a

0, see Key positions - functions at different

time.

levels (p. 70).

Related information
· Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 353) · Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps (p. 357)
· Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 358)
· Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area
(p. 357)
· Lamp replacement - number plate lighting
(p. 357)

Pull out the headlamp's locking pins. Release the headlamp by alternately tilting and pulling it out.

Detach the headlamp connector by pressing down the clip with your thumb. At the same time, guide out the connector with your other hand. 5. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens. 6. Replace the bulb in question.
Securing the headlamp

IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the connector.

353

10 Maintenance and service

|| 1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound
should be heard.

Lamp replacement - cover for main/ dipped beam bulbs

2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins.

Main/dipped beam bulbs are accessed by

The short pin is fitted closest to the grille. Check that they are correctly inserted.

releasing the headlamp's larger cover.

3. Check the lighting.

The headlamp must be mounted and the connector correctly installed before the lighting is switched on or the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch.

· Lamp replacement - main beam (p. 355) · Lamp replacement - extra main beam (p.
355)

Related information
· Lamp replacement (p. 352) · Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs (p. 354)
· Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

Before starting to replace a bulb, see Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 353). 1. Unscrew the cover's four screws using a
Torx tool, size T20 (1). They should not be loosened completely. (3 - 4 turns are sufficient.) 2. Slide the cover to one side. 3. Remove the cover. Reinstall the cover in reverse order.

Related information
· Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 353) · Lamp replacement - dipped beam (p.
355)

354

Lamp replacement - dipped beam The dipped beam bulb is fitted inside the headlamp's larger cover.
NOTE
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

10 Maintenance and service

Lamp replacement - main beam The main beam bulb is fitted inside the headlamp's larger cover.

Lamp replacement - extra main beam The extra main beam bulb is fitted inside the headlamp's larger cover.

NOTE

Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.

Applies to cars with Xenon headlamps*.

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 353). 2. Remove the cover (p. 354). 3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 4. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out. 5. The guide pin on the lamp should be
straight up when it is fitted and a clicking sound should be heard when it clicks into place. Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Related information
· Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 353). 2. Remove the cover (p. 354). 3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise
and then pulling straight out. 4. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It can be secured in one position. Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Related information
· Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 353). 2. Remove the cover (p. 354). 3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise
and then pulling straight out. 4. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It can only be secured in one position. Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Related information
· Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 355

10 Maintenance and service

Lamp replacement - direction indicators front The direction indicator lamp is fitted inside the headlamp's smaller cover.
10

Lamp replacement - rear lamp Rear direction indicators, rear fog lamp and reversing lamp are replaced from inside the cargo area.
Lamp housing, rear

6. Press down the catch when the bulb holder is refitted.
7. Refit the insulation and panel.
Related information
· Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps (p. 357)
· Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

1. Detach the headlamp (p. 353). 2. Detach the cover by pulling it straight out. 3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the
bulb. 4. Press and simultaneously turn the bulb to
detach it. Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Related information
· Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

The bulbs for reversing lamp, fog lamp and direction indicator in the rear lamp cluster are replaced from inside the cargo area. 1. Open the panel. 2. Remove the insulation that is fitted in
front of the bulb holder by pulling it straight out. 3. Press down the catch and pull out the bulb holder. 4. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise. 5. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clockwise.

356

10 Maintenance and service

Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps

Lamp replacement - number plate lighting

Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area

The overview shows the location of the lamps The number plate lighting is located under the The cargo area lighting is located in the tail-

at the rear.

tailgate handle.

gate.

G031942

Brake light (LED) Position/parking lamps (LED)/Side marker lamps (LED) Indicator (p. 356) Brake light (LED) Reversing lamp Rear fog lamp
Related information
· Lamp replacement (p. 352) · Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver. 2. Carefully detach the whole lamp housing
and withdraw it. 3. Replace the bulb. 4. Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it
into place.
Related information
· Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so that the lamp housing comes loose.
2. Replace the bulb. 3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
back the lamp housing.
Related information
· Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

357

10 Maintenance and service

Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting The vanity mirror's lamps are fitted inside the lamp lenses.
10 Removal of lamp lens

Related information
· Lamps - specifications (p. 358)

1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens and gently prize up the lug on the edge.
2. Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp lens.
3. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulb straight out to the side and replace with a new one. Note! - Do not pinch hard with the pliers. Otherwise the lamp lens could then be crushed.
Attaching the lamp lens 1. Refit the lamp lens. 2. Press it into place.
358

Lamps - specifications The specifications apply to bulbs. When replacing LED and Xenon lamps, please refer to a workshop.

Lighting

Dipped beam,

halogen

Main beam, Halo- 65 gen

Extra main beam, 65 ABL

Front direction

indicators

Courtesy lighting 3 front

Glovebox lighting 5

Vanity mirror

1,2

lighting

Cargo area light- 5 ing

Number plate

lighting

Direction indica- 21 tors, rear

Type H7 LL
H9
H9
PY24W
T10 Socket W2.1x9.5d Socket SV8.5 Length 43 mm T5 Socket W2x4.6d Socket SV8.5 Length 43 mm
C5W LL
PY21W LL

10 Maintenance and service

Lighting

Type

Wiper blades

IMPORTANT

Reversing lamp

P21W LL

The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with the washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure visibility for driving.

Before placing the wiper blades in the service position, make sure that they are not frozen down.

Rear fog lamp

H21W LL

A Watt

Related information
· Lamp replacement (p. 352) · Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps (p. 357)
· Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 358)

The windscreen wiper blades must be in service position when they are to be replaced. Service position

1. Place the remote control key in the ignition lock11 and briefly press the START/ STOP ENGINE button to set the car's electrical system to key position I. For detailed information on key positions, see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 70).
2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button again to set the car's electrical system in key position 0.

Wiper blades in service position. In order to make replacement possible, to clean or lift the wiper blades (for scraping off ice from the windscreen, for example), they must be in service position.

3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk switch up and hold it in position for approx. 1 second. > The wipers then move to standing straight up.
The wipers return to their starting position when you briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the car's electrical system to key position I (or when the car is started).

11 Not necessary in cars with Keyless function.

359

10 Maintenance and service

|| IMPORTANT

If the wiper arms in service position have

been folded up from the windscreen, they

must be folded back down onto the windscreen before the wipers are allowed to

return to their starting position. This is to

avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.

Replacing the wiper blades

Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service position. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm. Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard. Check that the blade is firmly installed.
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the windscreen.
The wipers return from service position to their starting position when you briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the car's electrical system to key position I (or when the car is started).

NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the passenger side.
Replacing the wiper blades, rear window

360

10 Maintenance and service

1. Fold out the wiper arm.

Washer fluid - filling

Battery

2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the arrow).
3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end position against the wiper arm as a lever

Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps and windows. Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used during winter.

The service life and function of the battery is

influenced by factors such as the number of

starts, discharging, driving style, driving con-

ditions, climatic conditions etc.

to detach the blade more easily.

The starter battery is a traditional 12 V bat-

4. Press the new wiper blade into position.

tery.

Check that it is firmly installed.

· Never disconnect the battery when the

5. Lower the wiper arm. Cleaning

engine is running.
· Check that the cables to the battery are
correctly connected and properly tight-

For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen,

ened.

see Car washing (p. 379).

WARNING

IMPORTANT

· The battery can generate oxyhydrogen

Check the blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.

The windscreen and headlamp washers share a common reservoir.

gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be

Related information

IMPORTANT

enough for the battery to explode.
· The battery contains sulphuric acid,

· Washer fluid - filling (p. 361)

Use washer fluid with antifreeze during the winter to avoid freezing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.

which can cause serious burns.
· If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with

large quantities of water. If acid

For capacities, see Washer fluid - quality and

splashes into the eyes - seek medical

volume (p. 401).

attention immediately.

Related information
· Wiper blades (p. 359)

IMPORTANT
Only a traditional battery charger should ever be used when charging the battery.

361

10 Maintenance and service

|| IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observed

then the energy saving function for info-

tainment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or the message in the information dis-

play about the main battery's state of

charge may be temporarily inapplicable,

following the connection of an external

battery or battery charger:

· The negative battery terminal on the
car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external battery or battery charger - only the car chassis may be used as the grounding point.

See Jump starting with battery (p. 270) for a description of how the cable clamps must be attached.

NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly. The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and climate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity. To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging. A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life.
Related information
· Battery - symbols (p. 362) · Starter battery - replacement (p. 363) · Battery - Start/Stop (p. 365)

Battery - symbols There are information and warning symbols on the battery. Symbols on the battery
Use protective goggles.
Further information is available in the owner's manual.
Store the battery out of the reach of children.
The battery contains corrosive acid.

362

10 Maintenance and service

Avoid sparks and naked flames.

Starter battery - replacement The starter battery in the car can be replaced without the help of a workshop.

The starter battery is a traditional 12 V bat-

tery.

Risk of explosion. Must be taken for recycling.

Removal First of all: Take the remote control key from the ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutes before any electrical connections are touched - this is because the car's electrical system needs to store the necessary information to control modules.

NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally safe manner as it contains lead.
Related information
· Battery (p. 361)

Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover. Release the rubber moulding so that the rear cover is free.
363

10 Maintenance and service

|| Remove the rear cover by screwing one quarter turn and lifting it away.

WARNING

Connect and remove the positive and neg-

ative cables in the correct order.

Cross-stay on the R-Design*

NOTE
Tighten the screws to 30 Nm. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
Fitting

Detach the black negative cable. Detach the red positive cable. Detach the ventilation hose from the battery. Loosen the screw holding the battery clamp.
Move the battery aside. Lift it up.

Cross-stay and plenum chamber cover. Cars with R-Design have a cross-stay that must be removed before the main battery can be replaced. 1. Remove the plenum chamber covers on
the right and left-hand sides. Prize carefully with a plastic knife or similar. 2. Loosen and remove the screws (one on the right and one on the left-hand side) that hold the cross-stay. 3. Remove the cross-stay. > Now the main battery can be removed
in accordance with the previous section.
· Fitting the cross-stay takes place in the
reverse order.

1. Lower the battery into the battery box. 2. Move the battery inward and to the side
until it reaches the rear edge of the box. 3. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery. 4. Connect the ventilation hose.
> Check that it is correctly connected to both battery and outlet in the body.
5. Connect the red positive cable. 6. Connect the black negative cable. 7. Press in the rear cover. (See earlier sec-
tion "Removal".) 8. Fit the rubber moulding. (See "Removal".) 9. Align the front cover and secure it with
the clips. (See "Removal".)

364 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

For more information on the car's battery Electrical system (p. 410).

10 Maintenance and service

Battery - Start/Stop

IMPORTANT

Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful battery for starting and one support battery that helps during the Start/Stop func-

When replacing batteries in cars with the Start/Stop function, the AGM12 type batteries must be fitted.

tion's starting sequence. For more information on Start/Stop - see Start/Stop* (p. 279). For more information on the car's battery see Jump starting with battery (p. 270) and Starter battery - specification (p. 411).

Battery

Starting Auxiliary

NOTE
· The higher the current take-off in the
car (extra cooling/heating, etc.) the more the batteries must be charged = increased fuel consumption.
· When the capacity of the battery has
fallen below the lowest permissible level then the Start/Stop function is

Cold start

disengaged.

capacityA,

760

CCA (A)

180

Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due

to high current take-off means:

SizeB, L×W×H (mm)

278×175×190 150×90×130

· The engine starts automatically13 without
the driver depressing the clutch pedal (manual gearbox).

Capacity (Ah)

· The engine starts automatically without
the driver lifting his/her foot off the foot

brake pedal (automatic gearbox).

A In accordance with the SAE standard. B Largest possible size.

12 Absorbed Glass Mat 13 Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 365

10 Maintenance and service

|| Location of the batteries 10
A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car. (1) Starter battery14 (2) Support battery. The support battery normally requires no more service than the normal battery used for starting. A workshop should be contacted in the event of questions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed then the Start/Stop function may temporarily cease to work after the connection of an external battery or battery charger:
· The negative battery terminal on the
car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external battery or battery charger - only the car chassis may be used as the grounding point. See Jump starting with battery (p. 270) for a description of how the cable clamps must be attached.

NOTE
If the battery has become so discharged that everything is "black" and in principle the car does not have all the normal electrical functions and the engine is subsequently started using an external battery or battery charger, then the Start/Stop function will be activated. It will then be possible for the engine to be auto-stopped but in the event of an auto-stop the Start/Stop function may fail to auto-start the engine due to inadequate capacity in the battery. The battery must first be charged in order to ensure a successful auto-start after an auto-stop. At an outside temperature of +15 °C the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour. At a lower outside temperature a charging time of 3-4 hours is recommended. The recommendation is that the battery is charged using an external battery charger. If this is not possible then the recommendation is to temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function until the battery has been adequately recharged. For more information on charging the starter battery, see Battery (p. 361).
Related information
· Battery - symbols (p. 362)

14 See Battery (p. 361) for a detailed description of the starter battery.
366

10 Maintenance and service

Fuses - general All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.

Location of central electrical units

· Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 377) 10

If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for checking.

Changing 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the
fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.

Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central electrical units under the glovebox change sides.
Engine compartment Under the glovebox Under the glovebox

WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

Cargo area under the cargo floor
Engine compartment cold zone (only Start/Stop)
Related information
· Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 368) · Fuses - under glovebox (p. 372) · Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 374)
· Fuses - in cargo area (p. 376)

367

10 Maintenance and service
Fuses - in engine compartment Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine and brake functions, amongst other things.
10
368

General fuses, engine compartment On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses. Positions (see preceding illustration)
Engine compartment, upper Engine compartment, front Engine compartment, lower These fuses are all located in the engine compartment box. The fuses in (C) are located under (A). On the inside of the cover is a label that shows the location of the fuses.
· Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi
Fuse" type and must only be replaced by a workshop15.
· Fuses 8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE"
type and should be replaced by a workshop15
· Fuses 16-33 and 35-41 are of the "Mini
Fuse" type.
15 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

10 Maintenance and service

Function

Primary fuse for the central

electronic module (CEM) under

the gloveboxA

Primary fuse for the central

electronic module (CEM) under

the glovebox

Primary fuse for central electri- 60 cal unit in cargo areaA

Primary fuse for relay/fuse box 60 under the gloveboxA

Electric additional heater*A

100

Heated windscreen*, left-hand 40 side

Windscreen wipers

Parking heater*

Ventilation fanA

Heated windscreen*, right-

hand side

Function

ABS pump

ABS valves

Headlamp washer*

Headlamp levelling*; Active

Xenon headlamps - ABL*

Primary fuse for the central

electronic module (CEM) under

the glovebox

ABS

Adjustable steering force*

Engine control module; Trans- 10 mission control module; Airbags

Heated washer nozzles*

Light switches

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

}} 369

10 Maintenance and service

Function

Relay coils

Auxiliary lamps*

Horn

Relay coil in main relay for

engine management system;

Engine control module (4-cyl.

2.0 lB, 5, 6-cyl.)

Transmission control module

Solenoid clutch A/C (not 4-cyl. 15 2.0 lC, not 5-cyl. diesel); Supporting coolant pump (4-cyl. 2.0 l diesel)

Relay coil in relay for solenoid

clutch A/C (not 5-cyl. diesel);

Relay coil in relay for coolant

pump (1.6 l petrol Start/Stop);

Relay coils in central electrical

unit in engine compartment

cold zone (Start/Stop)

Start relayA

Function

Ignition coils (1.6 l petrol,

engine B4204T7); Glow control

module (5-cyl. diesel)

Engine control module (4-cyl.

2.0 lB); Ignition coils (5, 6-cyl.

petrol); Capacitor (6-cyl.)

Engine control module (petrol 10 except 4-cyl. 2.0 lC)

Engine control module (1.6 l

diesel, 5-cyl. diesel)

Engine control module (4-cyl.

2.0 lB)

Function

Valves (1.6 l petrol); mass air

flow sensor (1.6 l, 4-cyl. 2.0 lB);

Thermostat (4-cyl. 2.0 l pet-

rolB); EVAP valve (4-cyl. 2.0 l

petrolB); Cooling valve for cli-

mate control system (4-cyl. 2.0

l diesel); Cooling pump for EGR

(4-cyl. 2.0 l diesel)

Mass air flow sensor (engine D4162T); Control valve, fuel flow (engine D4162T)

Mass air flow sensor (5-cyl.

diesel, 6-cyl.); Control valves

(5-cyl. diesel); Injectors (5, 6-

cyl. petrol); Engine control

module (5-cyl. petrol, 6-cyl.)

370 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Function

Solenoid clutch A/C (5, 6-cyl.); 10 Valves (1.6 l, engine B4204T7; 5-cyl., 6-cyl.); Engine control module (6-cyl.); Solenoids (6cyl. without turbo); Actuator motors, intake manifold (6-cyl. without turbo); Mass air flow sensor (engine B4204T7; 5-cyl. petrol); Oil level sensor (5-cyl. diesel)

Valves (4-cyl. 2.0 lB); Oil pump 15 (4-cyl. 2.0 l petrolB); Lambdasond, centre (4-cyl. 2.0 l petrolB); Lambda-sond, rear (4-cyl. 2.0 l diesel)

Lambda-sonds (1.6 l petrol,

engine B4204T7); Lambda-

sond (5-cyl. diesel); Control

module, radiator roller cover

(1.6 l diesel, 5-cyl. diesel)

Lambda-sond, front (4-cyl.

2.0 lB); Lambda-sond, rear (4-

cyl. 2.0 l petrolB); EVAP valve

(5, 6-cyl. petrol); Lambda-

sonds (5, 6-cyl. petrol)

10 Maintenance and service

Function

Coolant pump (1.6 l petrol

Start/Stop); Crankcase ventila-

tion heater (5-cyl. petrol); Oil

pump automatic gearbox(5-cyl.

petrol Start/Stop)

Cooling fan (1.6 l, 4-cyl. 2.0 l

petrol, 5-cyl. petrol)

Cooling fan (6-cyl., 4-cyl. 2.0 l 80

diesel, 5-cyl. diesel)

Ignition coils (4-cyl. 2.0 l pet-

rolB)

Diesel filter heater

Control module, radiator roller 5 cover (5-cyl. petrol)

Crankcase ventilation heater

(5-cyl. diesel); Oil pump auto-

matic gearbox (5-cyl. diesel

Start/Stop)

Power steering

100

A For cars with the Start/Stop function this fuse location is empty - see instead Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone (p. 377).
B Does not apply to the B4204T7 engine. C However, does apply to the B4204T7 engine.
Related information
· Fuses - under glovebox (p. 372) · Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 374)
· Fuses - in cargo area (p. 376)

Solenoid clutch A/C (4-cyl.

2.0 lB); Glow control module (4-

cyl. 2.0 l diesel); Oil pump (4-

cyl. 2.0 l diesel)

Coolant pump (4-cyl. 2.0 l pet- 50 rolB)

Glow plugs (diesel)

371

10 Maintenance and service
Fuses - under glovebox Fuses under the glovebox protect the infotainment and seat functions, amongst other things.
10

Positions

Function

Primary fuse for audio control

module*; Primary fuse for fuses

16-20: Infotainment

Windscreen washers; Rear win- 25 dow washer

Function

Door handle (Keyless*)

Control panel, driver's door

Control panel, front passenger 20 door

372 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Function

Control panel, rear passenger

door, right

Control panel, rear passenger

door, left

Keyless*

7,5

Power seat driver's side*

Power seat passenger side*

10 Maintenance and service

Function

Parking assistance*; Parking

camera*; Towbar control mod-

Infotainment control module;

ule*

ScreenA

BLIS*

Audio control unit (amplifier)*,

Digital radio*; TV*

AWD control module*

Audio or Control Module Sen- 15

Active chassis - Four-C*

susA

A Certain model variants.

Telematics*; Bluetooth*

Sunroof*; Interior lighting roof;

Climate sensor*; Damper

motors, air intake

12 V socket, tunnel console

Related information
· Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 368) · Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 374)
· Fuses - in cargo area (p. 376) · Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 377)

Seat heating, rear right*

Seat heating, rear left*

Electric additional heater*

Seat heating (passenger side)

Seat heating (driver's side)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 373

10 Maintenance and service

Fuses - in the control module under the glovebox

Fuses in the control module under the glove-

box protect airbag and collision warning sys-

tem functions, amongst other things.

Positions

Function

Rear window wiper

Interior lighting; Driver's door

7,5

control panel, power windows;

Remote controlled garage door

opener*; Power seats, front*

Function

Combined instrument panel

Adaptive cruise control, ACC*; 10 collision warning system*

Interior lighting; Rain sensor

7,5

Steering wheel module

7,5

Central locking system, fuel

filler flap

374 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Function

Heated steering wheel*

Heated windscreen*

Unlocking, tailgate

Folding head restraint*

Fuel pump

10 Maintenance and service

Function

· Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 377)

Movement detector alarm*; Cli- 5 mate panel

Steering lock

Siren*; Data link connector

OBDII

Airbags

Collision warning*

Accelerator pedal sensor; Dim- 7,5 ming interior rearview mirror*; Seat heating, rear* Electric additional heater*

Infotainment control module

(Performance); Audio (Perform-

ance)

Brake lights

Sunroof*

Immobiliser

Related information
· Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 368) · Fuses - under glovebox (p. 372) · Fuses - in cargo area (p. 376)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 375

10 Maintenance and service
Fuses - in cargo area Fuses in the cargo area protect trailer and electric drive functions, amongst other things.
10

Positions

Function

Electric parking brake, left

Electric parking brake, right

Rear window defroster

Trailer socket 2*

12 V socket, cargo area

Function Trailer socket 1*

376 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Related information
· Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 368)

· Fuses - under glovebox (p. 372)

· Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 374)

· Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold

zone (p. 377)

Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone Fuses in the engine compartment's cold zone are fitted in cars with the Start/Stop function.

10 Maintenance and service
10

Location of fuses for the Start/Stop function.
· Fuses A1 and A2 are of the "MEGA Fuse"
type and must only be replaced by a workshop16.
· Fuses 1-11 are of the "Midi Fuse" type
and must only be replaced by a workshop16.
· Fuse 12 is of the "Mini Fuse" type.
For more information on Start/Stop - see Start/Stop* (p. 279).

Positions

Function

Main fuse for central electrical 175 unit in the engine compartment

Main fuse for central electronic 175 module (CEM) under the glovebox, relay/fuse box under the glovebox, central electrical unit in cargo area

Function

Electric additional heater*

100

Primary fuse for the central

electronic module (CEM) under

the glovebox

Primary fuse for relay/fuse box 60 under the glovebox

16 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

}} 377

10 Maintenance and service

Function

Primary fuse for relay/fuse box 60

under the glovebox

Primary fuse for central electri- 60

cal unit in cargo area

Ventilation fan

Start relay

Internal diode

Support battery

Central electronic module

(CEM) - reference voltage sup-

port battery; Charging point

support battery

Related information
· Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 368) · Fuses - under glovebox (p. 372) · Fuses - in the control module under the
glovebox (p. 374)
· Fuses - in cargo area (p. 376)

378

10 Maintenance and service

Car washing The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo.
Washing by hand
· Remove bird droppings from the paint-
work as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discoloration.
· Hose down the underbody. · Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt
has been removed so as to reduce the risk of scratches from washing. Do not spray directly onto the locks.
· If necessary, use cold degreasing agent
on very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the surfaces must not be hot from the sun!
· Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
· Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm
soap solution or car shampoo.
· Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
a water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce the risk of water drying stains which may need to be polished out.

WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example. Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but use water and a non-scratching sponge instead.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time.
Wiper blades Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades. For cleaning: - Set the wiper blades to the service position, see Wiper blades (p. 359).

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen

regularly with lukewarm soap solution or

car shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.

Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car, but it cannot reach everywhere. Handwashing the car is recommended for achieving optimum results.
NOTE
The car must only be washed by hand over the first few months. This is because the paint is more delicate when it is new.

High-pressure washing When using high-pressure washing, use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car (the distance applies to all exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto the locks.

}} 379

10 Maintenance and service

|| Testing the brakes

IMPORTANT

WARNING

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.

Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure

that moisture and corrosion do not attack

the brake linings and reduce braking per-

formance.

Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush. The heat from the friction causes the brake

When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge. Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer. Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

linings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting in very damp or cold weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and

Rims Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated aluminium rims.

care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components, such as glossy trim mouldings. When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully.

Related information
· Polishing and waxing (p. 380) · Cleaning the interior (p. 381) · Water and dirt-repellent coating (p. 381)

Polishing and waxing Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection. The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight. Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork. Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used. Other treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty.
Related information
· Car washing (p. 379)

380

10 Maintenance and service

Water and dirt-repellent coating

Rustproofing

Cleaning the interior

The windows are treated with a surface coa-

The car received a thorough and complete

Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-

ting that improves visibility in difficult weather

rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body

ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly

conditions.

are made of galvanised sheet metal. The

and follow the instructions included with the

Water and dirt-repellent coating* There is natural wear of the waterrepellent coating.

underbody is protected by a wear-resistant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the exposed members, cavities, closed sections

car care product. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.

Maintenance:
· Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as this could ruin their water-repellent properties.
· Take care when cleaning so as not to
damage the glass surface.

and side doors.
Inspection and maintenance Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is important to keep the car clean. The car's rustproofing needs to be checked regularly and touched-up if necessary in order for it to be maintained.

Carpets and cargo area Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lift the mat straight up.

· To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers.
· Treatment with a special finishing agent
available from Volvo dealers is recommended in order to maintain the waterrepellent properties. This should be used first after three years and then each year.
IMPORTANT

Under normal conditions the rustproofing does not require treatment for approximately 12 years. After this period, it should be treated at three-year intervals. Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for assistance if the car needs further treatment. Related information
· Paint damage (p. 383)

Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the bosses in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals.

Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. Use the heating to remove ice from the door mirrors, see Windows and rearview and door mirrors heating (p. 96).

A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor mats should be cleaned with agents recommended by your Volvo dealer.

Related information
· Car washing (p. 379)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 381

10 Maintenance and service

Stains on fabric upholstery and roof

To achieve best results Volvo recommends

upholstery

cleaning and the application of protective

A special fabric cleaning agent, available from cream once to four times per year (or more if

authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to

necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is

avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of

available from your Volvo dealer.

the upholstery.

IMPORTANT

IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.

· Certain items of coloured clothing (for
example, jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery.

Stains on leather upholstery Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to pre-

· Never use strong solvents. Such prod-
ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and leather upholstery.

serve its original appearance.

Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beautiful patina over time. The leather is refined and processed so that it retains its natural characteristics. It is given a protective coating, but regular cleaning is required in order

Washing instructions for leather upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.

to maintain both characteristics and appearance. Volvo offers a comprehensive product for the cleaning and treatment of leather upholstery which, when used in accordance with the instructions, preserves the leather's protective coating. After a period of use the

2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the stain. Do not rub.

natural appearance of the leather will nevertheless emerge, depending more or less on the surface texture of the leather. This is a

4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and allow the leather to dry completely.

natural maturing of the leather and shows

that it is a natural product.

Protective treatment of leather upholstery 1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in a thin layer of cream with gentle circular movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes before use.
The leather has now been given improved protection against stains and improved UV protection.
Washing instructions for the leather steering wheel
· Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-
moistened sponge and neutral soap.
· Leather needs to breathe. Never cover
the leather steering wheel with protective plastic.
· Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care
agents are recommended for best results. If the steering wheel has stains:
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and blood)
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5% ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
1. Same procedure as for group 1.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.

382

10 Maintenance and service

Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)

Paint damage

Colour code

1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt. 2. Same procedure as for group 1.

Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked regularly. The most common types of paint-

Stains on interior plastic parts, metal parts and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly

work damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings, doors and bumpers.

moistened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces.

Touching up minor paintwork damage To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately.

Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers. A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult cleaning.
Seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from your Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.

Materials
· primer17 - a special adhesive primer in a
spray can is available for e.g. plasticcoated bumpers
· basecoat and clearcoat - available in
spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks18
· masking tape · fine sand paper17.

Code for the car's colour It is important that the correct colour is used. For product label location, see Type designations (p. 386).

Related information
· Car washing (p. 379)

17 If required. 18 Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.

383

10 Maintenance and service

|| Repair minor paintwork damage such as stone chips and scratches
10

3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer has dried.
4. For scratches, proceed as above, but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork.

Before work is begun, the car must be clean and dry and at a temperature above 15 °C. 1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint. If the damage is down to the metal, use of a primer is appropriate. In the event of damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer should be used to give better results - spray into the lid of the spray can and brush on thinly. 2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very fine polishing agent may be carried out locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly and left to dry.

G021832

NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint remains in place, fill in with base coat and clear coat as soon as the surface has been cleaned.
Related information
· Rustproofing (p. 381)

384

SPECIFICATIONS

11 Specifications
Type designations Type designation, vehicle identification number, etc., i.e. information unique to the car, can be read on a label in the car.
11
386

Label location

11 Specifications
11

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo

dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories.

Type designation, vehicle identification number, maximum permissible weights, codes for colour and upholstery and type
}} 387

11 Specifications

|| approval number. The label is visible when the right rear door is opened.
Label for parking heater.

Engine code and engine serial number.

Label for engine oil.

Gearbox type designation and serial num-

ber.

Manual gearbox

Automatic gearbox

Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle Identification Number)

Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.

NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car.

Related information
· Weights (p. 390) · Engine specifications (p. 393)

388

Dimensions Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be read in the table.

11 Specifications
11

Dimensions A Wheelbase B Length C Load length, floor, folded rear
seat D Load length, floor E Height F Load height

mm 2776 4635
1749 978
1484 658

Dimensions G Front track
H Rear track
I Load width, floor J Width

mm 1588A 1578B 1585A 1575B 1082 1865

Dimensions K Width including door mirrors L Width including folded-in
door mirrors
A with 16" wheel B with 17" wheel

mm 2097
1899

389

11 Specifications

Weights Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a label in the car.

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full and all fluids.

The weight of passengers and accessories,

and towball load (p. 391) (when a trailer is

hitched) influence the load capacity and are

not included in the kerb weight.

Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight.

WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory. Examples of accessories that reduce loading capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/ Summum equipment levels, as well as other accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Carpets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc. Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular car.

For information on label location, see Type designations (p. 386).
Max. gross vehicle weight Max. train weight (car+trailer) Max. front axle load Max. rear axle load Equipment level Max. load: See registration document. Max. roof load: 75 kg. Related information
· Towing capacity and towball load (p.
391)

390

11 Specifications

Towing capacity and towball load

Towing capacity and towball load for driving with a trailer can be read in the tables.

Max. weight braked trailer Engine Engine codeA

B4164T3

B4164T

T4B

B5204T8

T4F

B4164T2

T4F

B4164T2

B4204T11

T5B

B5204T9

B4204T9

T6 AWD B6304T4

D4162T

D5204T7

D4204T5

Gearbox Manual, MMT6 Automatic, MPS6 Manual, MMT6 Automatic, MPS6 Automatic, TF-80SD Manual, MMT6 Automatic, MPS6 Automatic, TG-81SC Automatic, TF-80SD Automatic, TG-81SC Automatic, TF-80SC Manual, MMT6 Automatic, MPS6 Manual, M66 Automatic, TF-80SD Manual, M66

Max. weight braked trailer (kg) 1600 1600 1600 1600 1800 1600 1600 1600 1800 1800 1800 1300 1300 1600 1600 1800

Max. towball load (kg) 75 75 75 75 90 75 75 75 90 90 90 75 75 75 75 90

11
}} 391

11 Specifications

|| Engine

Engine codeA

Gearbox

Max. weight braked trailer (kg)

Max. towball load (kg)

D4204T5

Automatic, TG-81SC

1800

D4 AWD D5244T12

Automatic, TF-80SC

1800

D4 AWD D5244T17

Automatic, TF-80SC

1800

D5244T11

Manual, M66

1600

D5244T15

Automatic, TF-80SC

1800

D5 AWD D5244T15

Automatic, TF-80SC

1800

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 386). B Only certain markets.

Max. weight unbraked trailer Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg)

Max. towball load (kg)

750

Related information
· Weights (p. 390) · Driving with a trailer (p. 306) · Trailer stabiliser - TSA (p. 312)

392

11 Specifications

Engine specifications Engine specifications (output etc.) for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.

Engine Engine codeA Output Output

Torque

No. of cylin- Bore Stroke Swept vol- Compres-

(kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) (Nm/rpm)

ders

(mm) (mm)

ume

sion ratio

(litres)

B4164T3

110/5700 150/5700 240/16004000

81.4

1,596

10.0:1

B4164T

132/5700 180/5700 240/1600-5000

81.4

1,596

10.0:1

T4B

B5204T8

132/5000 180/5000 300/27004200

81.0

1.984

10.5:1

T4F

B4164T2

132/5700 180/5700 240/1600-5000

81.4

1,596

10.0:1

B4204T11

180/5500 245/5500 350/1500-4800

93.2

1,969

10.8:1

T5B

B5204T9

157/6000 213/6000 300/27005000

81.0

1.984

10.5:1

B4204T9

225/5700 306/5700 400/2100-4500

93.2

1,969

10,3:1

B6304T4

224/5600 304/5600 440/21004200

82.0 93.2

2.953

9.3:1

D4162T

84/3600 115/3600 270/1750-2500

88.3

1.560

16.0:1

D5204T7

100/3500 136/3500 350/1500-2250

81.0

1.984

16.5:1

D4204T5

133/4250 181/4250 400/1750-2500

82.0 93.2

1,969

15.8:1

D4 AWD

D5244T12

133/4000 181/4000 420/15002500

81.0 93.2

2.400

16.5:1

D4 AWD

D5244T17

120/4000 163/4000 420/15002500

81.0 93.2

2.400

16.5:1

}} 393

11 Specifications

|| Engine

Engine codeA

Output (kW/rpm)

Output (hp/rpm)

Torque (Nm/rpm)

No. of cylin- Bore Stroke

ders

(mm) (mm)

Swept volume (litres)

Compression ratio

D5244T11C

158/4000 215/4000 420/15003250

81.0 93.15

2.400

16.5:1

D5244T15D

158/4000 215/4000 440/1500-3000

81.0 93.15

2.400

16.5:1

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 386). B Only certain markets.

C Manual gearbox

D Automatic gearbox

Related information
· Coolant - grade and volume (p. 398) · Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 396)

394

11 Specifications

Engine oil - adverse driving conditions Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions.

Related information
· Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 396) · Engine oil - general (p. 345)

Check the oil level (p. 346) more frequently for long journeys:

· towing a caravan or trailer

· in mountainous regions

· at high speeds

· in temperatures colder than -30 °C or
hotter than +40 °C.

IMPORTANT

The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures. Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine. Volvo recommends:

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

395

11 Specifications
Engine oil - grade and volume Engine oil grade and volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table. Volvo recommends:
11

Engine Engine codeA Oil grade

T6 D4 AWD D4 AWD
D3 D5 D5 D2

B6304T4 D5244T12 D5244T17 D5204T7 D5244T11B D5244T15C
D4162T

Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5 Viscosity: SAE 0W30
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5 Viscosity: SAE 5W30 When driving under adverse conditions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.

Volume, incl. oil filter (litres)
approx 6.8 approx. 5.9 approx. 5.9 approx. 5.9 approx. 5.9 approx. 5.9 approx. 3.8

396

Engine Engine codeA Oil grade

B4164T3

Certified and factory-filled oil: Oil grade WSS-M2C925-A

B4164T

options for service:

Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

T4F

B4164T2

Viscosity: SAE 5W30

T4D

B5204T8

Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

T5D

B5204T9

Viscosity: SAE 0W30

B4204T11

Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or 0w20 VCC RBS0-2AE

B4204T9

D4204T5

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 386). B Manual gearbox C Automatic gearbox D Only certain markets.

Related information
· Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.
395)
· Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 346)

11 Specifications
Volume, incl. oil filter (litres)
approx. 4.1 approx. 4.1
approx. 4.1 11
approx 5.5 approx 5.5 approx. 5.4 approx. 5.4 approx. 5.6

397

11 Specifications

Coolant - grade and volume Approved coolant volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

EngineA

Volume (litres)

Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by

B4164T3C

9.2

Volvo mixed with 50% water2, see the packaging.

B4164TC

T4F

B4164T2C

EngineA

Volume

(litres)

B4164T3D

9.8

D2 D2 T4B T5B T6 D4 AWD D4 AWD D3 D5

D4162TC D4162TD B5204T8 B5204T9 B6304T4 D5244T12 D5244T17 D5204T7 D5244T15

10.5 11.1 8.9

B4164TD

T4F

B4164T2D

B4204T11

8,3 (8,7E)

B4204T9

D4204T5

8,9 (9,2E)

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 386).
B Only certain markets. C Manual gearbox D Automatic gearbox E Applies to cars with fuel-driven heater.

Related information
· Coolant - level (p. 349)

D5244T11

2 Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
398

11 Specifications

Transmission fluid - grade and volume The prescribed transmission fluid and volume for each respective gearbox alternative can be read in the table.

Manual gearbox Manual gearbox

Volume (litres)

MMT6

approx. 1.7

M66

approx. 1.9 (approx. 1.45A)

A Applies to the D4204T5 engine.

NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gearbox oil does not need to be changed during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.

Automatic gearbox Automatic gearbox MPS6 TF-80SC TF-80SD
TG-81SC
A Petrol engines B Diesel engines

Volume (litres) approx. 7.3 approx. 7.0 approx. 7.0 approx. 6.6A approx. 7.5B

Prescribed transmission fluid BOT 350M3
Prescribed transmission fluid BOT 341 AW1 AW1 AW1

11
}} 399

11 Specifications

|| NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gearbox oil does not need to be changed during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.

Related information

· Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p.

395)

· Type designations (p. 386)

400

11 Specifications

Brake fluid - grade and volume The medium in a hydraulic brake system is called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer force from e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, which in turn act on a mechanical brake.
Prescribed grade: DOT 4 Volume: 0.6 litres
Related information
· Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 350)

Power steering fluid - grade Power steering fluid is the denomination of the medium used in the car's power steering system.
Prescribed grade: WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.
Related information
· Power steering fluid - level (p. 351)

Washer fluid - quality and volume Washer fluid is used, together with windscreen and rear window wipers (p. 90) to keep the car's windows and headlamps clean and ensure visibility when driving.

Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recom-

mended by Volvo - with frost protection dur-

ing cold weather and below freezing point.

Volume:

· Cars with headlamp washing: 5.4 litres. · Cars without headlamp washing: 4.0
litres.

Related information
· Washer fluid - filling (p. 361) · Wiper blades (p. 359)

401

11 Specifications

Fuel tank - volume Fuel tank volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

Engine
Petrol engine
Diesel engine 11
Related information
· Filling up with fuel (p. 300) · Engine specifications (p. 393)

Volume (litres) approx 67 approx 67

Prescribed grade Petrol: Fuel - petrol (p. 302) Diesel: Fuel - diesel (p. 302)

402

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions Fuel consumption in a vehicle is measured in litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions in grams per km. Explanation
gram/km
litre/100 km

urban driving extra-urban driving combined driving

11 Specifications
11

V60
T3 (B4164T3) T3 (B4164T3) T4 (B4164T) T4 (B4164T) T4FA (B4164T2) T4FA (B4164T2)

229
229 219 (212B) 229 (218B)

9.9 9.9 9.5 (12.9B) 9.9 (13.3B)

134
134 129 (124B) 132 (128B)

5.8 5.8 5.6 (7.5B) 5.7 (7.8B)

167
167 162 (156B) 167 (161B)

7.2 7.2 7.0 (9.5B) 7.2 (9.8B)

}} 403

11 Specifications
|| V60

T5C (B4204T11)

T5D (B4204T11)

T6 (B4204T9)

T6 AWD (B6304T4)

D2C (D4162T)

D2D (D4162T)

D2C (D4162T)

D2D (D4162T)

D3 (D5204T7)

D4C (D4204T5)

404

346

14.8

175

7,5

237

10.2

137

5.2

109

4.1

119

4,5

121

4.6

101

3.8

108

4.1

134

5.1

111

4.2

119

4,5

125

4.8

102

3.9

110

4.2

138

5.2

108

4.1

119

4,5

159

6.1

112

4.3

129

4.9

11 Specifications

V60

D4D (D4204T5)

D4C (D4204T5) D4D (D4204T5)

D4 AWD (D5244T12)

D4 AWD (D5244T17)

D5 (D5244T11)

148

5.6

104

4.0

120

4.6

D5 (D5244T15)

221

8.5

128

4.9

162

6.2

D5 AWD (D5244T15)

A Flexifuel engines can be driven on both 95 octane unleaded petrol and bioethanol E85. Both fuels are filled in the common fuel tank so that any variations of mixing ratios between these two fuels is possible.
B E85 C Does not apply to the low-emissions variant. D This only applies to the low-emissions variant.

}} 405

11 Specifications

NOTE
If the consumption and emission data is missing then it is included in the enclosed supplement.

Even a combination of the above-mentioned examples can result in significantly improved consumption. For further information, please refer to the regulations referred to3.

Large deviations in fuel consumption may

Fuel consumption and emission values in the

arise in a comparison with the EU driving

table above are based on specific EU cycles3, cycles3 which are used in the certification of

that apply to cars with kerb weight in the

basic version and without extra equipment.

the car and on which the consumption figures in the table are based.

The car's weight may increase depending on equipment. This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and carbon dioxide emissions. There are several reasons for increased fuel consumption compared with the table's val-

NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that could affect the car's performance.

ues. Examples of this are:
· The driver's driving style. · If the customer has specified wheels
larger than those fitted as standard on the model's basic version, then resistance increases.

Related information
· Economical driving (p. 305) · Weights (p. 390)

· High speed results in increased wind
resistance.

· Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.

3 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0 and 120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - A car with T3, D2, D3, D4 or D5 engine and 6-speed manual gearbox is started in 2nd gear. The combined driving value given in the table is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving, in accordance with applicable legislation. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
406

11 Specifications

Tyres - approved tyre pressures Approved tyre pressures for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table.

NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets.

V60 Engine
T3 (B4164T3) T4 (B4164T) T4F (B4164T2) D2 (D4162T)

Tyre size

Speed

Load, 1 - 3 persons

Max. load

ECO pressureA

(km/h)

Front

Rear

Front Rear

Front/rear

(kPa)B

(kPa)

(kPa) (kPa)

(kPa)

205/60 R 16

0 160

230

260

215/55 R 16

205/55 R 17

215/50 R 17

235/45 R 17

160 +

260

240

280

260

235/40 R 18

235/40 R 19

0 160

230

260

235/45 R 17 SST

160 +

260

280

}} 407

11 Specifications

|| V60
Engine

Tyre size

Speed (km/h)

11
T6 (B4204T9) T6 (B6304T4)

215/55 R 16 235/45 R 17
205/60 R 16 215/50 R 17 235/40 R 18 235/40 R 19

0 160 160 + 0 160
160 +

235/45 R 17 SST

0 160 160 +

T4 (B5204T8)C T5 (B5204T9)C T5 (B4204T11) D3 (D5204T7) D4 (D4204T5) D5 (D5244T11) D5 (D5244T15)D

205/60 R 16 215/55 R 16 205/55 R 17 215/50 R 17 235/45 R 17 235/40 R 18 235/40 R 19
235/45 R 17 SST

0 160
160 +
0 160 160 +

Load, 1 - 3 persons

Front (kPa)B

Rear (kPa)

230

280

240

300

240

230

280

230

260

240

230

260

Max. load

Front (kPa)

Rear (kPa)

260

300

260

ECO pressureA Front/rear (kPa)
260
260

320

280

260

300

260

280

260

280

408

11 Specifications

V60 Engine

Tyre size

Speed (km/h)

Load, 1 - 3 persons

Front (kPa)B

Rear (kPa)

Max. load

Front (kPa)

Rear (kPa)

ECO pressureA
Front/rear (kPa)

215/55 R 16

0 160

230

260

235/45 R 17

160 +

260

240

280

260

D4 AWD (D5244T17)

215/50 R 17

0 160

240

260

D4 AWD (D5244T12)

235/40 R 18

D5 AWD (D5244T15)

235/40 R 19

160 +

280

240

300

260

0 160

230

260

235/45 R 17 SST

160 +

260

280

Temporary Spare Tyre

max. 80

420

A Economical driving. B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. C Only certain markets. D FWD

WARNING
19-inch wheels must never be used on cars that are not equipped with the RDesign or Sport chassis options. The use of 19-inch wheels on cars with standard chassis constitutes a safety risk, with a risk of vehicle damage, and it impairs the car's driving characteristics.

Related information
· Tyres - dimensions (p. 322) · Tyres - air pressure (p. 328) · Type designations (p. 386)

409

11 Specifications
Electrical system The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor. The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator. Starter battery capacity is dependent upon the equipment level in the car.
11
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, take care to replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity and reserve capacity as the original battery (see the label on the battery). Related information
· Starter battery - specification (p. 411) · Starter battery - replacement (p. 363) · Battery (p. 361)
410

11 Specifications

Starter battery - specification The starter battery is used to drive the starter motor and other electrical equipment in the car.

Engine

Voltage (V)

Petrol (Ethanol)

Diesel

Petrol/Diesel with Start/Stop function

A Battery type AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) must be used in cars with the Start/Stop function.

Cold start capacity, CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)
520800 700800
760A

IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, take care to replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity and reserve capacity as the original battery (see the label on the battery).

NOTE
· The starter battery's container size
should be consistent with the original battery's dimensions.
· The starter battery's height is different
depending on size.

Related information
· Starter battery - replacement (p. 363) · Battery (p. 361)

Reserve capacity (minutes)

100160

135160

135

411

11 Specifications

Type approval - remote control key system Type approval for the remote control key system can be read in the table.

Lock system, standard Country/Area

EU, China

Country/Area China
Hong Kong

Type approval - tyre pressure monitoring Type approval of the sensors in tyre pressure monitoring - TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)* can be read in the table.
Country/Area Brazil

Keyless lock system (Keyless drive) Country/Area
EU

Related information
· Remote control key with key blade (p.
149)

Related information
· Tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 330)

Korea

412 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Type approval - radar system Type approval for the radar system can be read in the table.

Country/ Area Singapore

Brazil

IDA: Infocomm Development Authority of Singapore.

Europe

Delphi Electronics & Safety hereby declares that L2C0038TR and L2C0049TR are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. This declaration of conformity may, if necessary, be consulted with Delphi Electronics & Safety / One Corporate Center / Kokomo, Indiana 46904-9005 USA.

Related information
· Radar sensor (p. 197)

11 Specifications
11
413

11 Specifications
Type approval - Bluetooth® Type approval for Bluetooth® can be read in the table.
11
414

Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity) Country/ Area
Countries in the EU:
Exporting country: Japan Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics Inc. Type of equipment: Bluetooth® device For further information visit http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/rtte/faq.htm #informing

11 Specifications
11

}} 415

11 Specifications

|| Country/ Area

Czech Republic:

Alpine Electronics, Inc. tímto prohlasuje, ze tento Bluetooth® Module je ve shod se základními pozadavky a dalsími píslusnými ustanoveními smrnice 1999/5/ES.

Denmark:

Undertegnede Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Bluetooth® Module overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Germany: Hiermit erklärt Alpine Electronics, Inc., dass sich das Gerät Bluetooth® Module in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden

Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.

Estonia:

Käesolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics, Inc. seadme Bluetooth® Module vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.

Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc., declares that this Bluetooth® Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other

relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Spain:

Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que el Bluetooth® Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Greece:

Alpine Electronics, Inc. Bluetooth® Module 1999/5/ .

France:

Par la présente Alpine Electronics, Inc. déclare que l'appareil Bluetooth® Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

Italy:

Con la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dichiara che questo Bluetooth® Module è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Latvia:

Ar so Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklar, ka Bluetooth® Module atbilst Direktvas 1999/5/EK btiskajm prasbm un citiem ar to saisttajiem noteikumiem.

Lithuania:

Siuo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklaruoja, kad sis Bluetooth® Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.

416

11 Specifications

Country/ Area

Netherlands:

Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics, Inc. dat het toestel Bluetooth® Module in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.

Malta:

Hawnhekk, Alpine Electronics, Inc., jiddikjara li dan Bluetooth® Module jikkonforma mal-tiijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti orajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.

Hungary:

Alulírott, Alpine Electronics, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a Bluetooth® Module megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az

1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.

Poland:

Niniejszym Alpine Electronics, Inc. owiadcza, e Bluetooth® Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostalymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

Portugal:

Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que este Bluetooth® Module está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Slovenia:

Alpine Electronics, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta Bluetooth® Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi dolocili direktive 1999/5/ES.

Slovakia:

Alpine Electronics, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, ze Bluetooth® Module spa základné poziadavky a vsetky príslusné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.

Finland:

Alpine Electronics, Inc. vakuuttaa täten että Bluetooth® Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.

Sweden:

Härmed intygar Alpine Electronics, Inc. att denna Bluetooth® Module står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

Iceland:

Alpine Electronics, Inc. hereby certifies that this Bluetooth® Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and other relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.

Norway:

Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved at utstyret Bluetooth® Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

}} 417

11 Specifications

|| Country/ Area
China:

2.4 - 2.4835 GHz

(EIRP) 10dBi 100 mW 20 dBm
11 10dBi 20 dBm / MHz(EIRP)

20 ppm

() (±2.5 )
· -36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz) · -33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz) · -40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz) · -40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz) · -30 dBm / 1 MHz ( 1 - 12.75 GHz)

2. ( )

418

11 Specifications

Country/ Area

Taiwan:

}} 419

11 Specifications

|| Country/ Area

South Korea: 11

Volvo Car Korea : KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L3, KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L2 and KCC-CMM-N25-IAM21L1 : Bluetooth Audio Navigation Radio : IAM2.1 : March/2010 Alpine Electronics, Inc Made in Japan

Volvo Car Korea 2 726-173 4 1588-1777 http://www.volvocars.com/kr

420

Country/ Area The United Arab Emirates:
South Africa:

Jamaica: Thailand: Oman

Approved for use in Jamaica SMA EI: IAM2.1 This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement.

11 Specifications
11

421

11 Specifications

Licenses

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

software and associated documentation files

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

(the "Software"), to deal in the Software

Sensus software

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

without restriction, including without limitation

This software uses parts of sources from clib2 and Prex Embedded Real-time OS Source (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994), and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990, 1993), The Regents of the University of California. All or some portions are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. This software uses parts of sources from "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January 26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this

the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/ projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.

422

11 Specifications

This software is based in parts on the work of the FreeType Team. This software uses parts of SSLeay Library: Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved
Combined Instrument Panel Software Open Source Software Notice This product uses certain free / open source and other software originating from third parties, that is subject to the GNU General Public License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/ GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public License version 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType Project License ("FreeType License") and other different and/or additional copyright licenses, disclaimers and notices. The links how to access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3, LGPLv3, and the other open source software licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and notices are provided to you below. Please refer to the exact terms of the relevant License, regarding your rights under said licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers to provide the source code of said free/open source software to you for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution, such as the cost of media, shipping and handling, upon written request. Please contact your nearest Volvo Dealer. This offer is valid for a period of at least three (3) years from the date of the distribution of

this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC offers spare parts or customer support.
Portions of this product uses software copyrighted © v2.4.3/2010 The FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
This product includes software under following licenses:
GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/oldlicenses/gpl-2.0.html
· Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista
2.6.31 kernel and kernel from L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP)
· uBoot (based on v2009.08) · busybox (based on version 1.13.2.)
GCC runtime library exception: http:// www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html
· libgcc_s.so.1
LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/ lgpl.html
· Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1
The FreeType Project License: http:// www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT
· libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3)
Linux software
This product contains software licensed under GNU General Public License (GPL) or

GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.

You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distribution of the source code of the GPL/LGPL software.

You may download Source Code from the

following website at no charge: http://

www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/

download/TVM_8351_013

The website provides the Source Code "As Is" and without warranty of any kind.

By downloading Source Code, you expressly assume all risk and liability associated with downloading and using the Source Code and complying with the user agreements that accompany each Source Code.

Please note that we cannot respond to any inquiries regarding the source code.

DivX®

DivX Certified® to play DivX® video. DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are
}} 423

11 Specifications

registered trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are

ance with the intended end-user functions for about who you are. Additional information is

used under license. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.

this program or this device. You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers for your own personal non-commercial use. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote software or any Gracenote data to any third party. YOU

available on the web page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Gracenote service. The Gracenote software and everything included in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is". Gracenote provides no undertakings or warranties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the Gracenote data contained

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX

AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACE-

in the Gracenote servers. Gracenote reserves

Certified® device must be registered in order

NOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR

the right to delete data from the Gracenote

to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)

GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS

servers or to change data categories for any

content. To generate the registration code,

EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREE-

reason that Gracenote deems sufficient. No

locate the DivX VOD section in the device

MENT.

warranty is provided that the Gracenote soft-

setup menu. Go to http://vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. Covered by one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement This program or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote ("Gracenote software") activates this program to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track and title ("Gracenote data") from online servers or embedded databases (together called "Gracenote servers") and in order to perform other actions. You may only use Gracenote data in accord-

You agree that your non-exclusive right to use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers will be terminated if you violate these restrictions. If your license is terminated you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers. Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote data, all Gracenote software and all Gracenote servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote will under no circumstances have any obligation to pay you for any information you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the company's rights under this agreement against you directly in its own name. The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track enquiries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to enable the Gracenote service to count enquiries without knowing anything

ware or Gracenote servers are fault-free or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote servers will operate without interruption. Gracenote has no obligation to provide you with new, improved or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future, and the company reserves the right to discontinue its services at any time. GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSE-

424

11 Specifications

Symbols in the display

Symbol Specification See

There are a variety of different symbols in the

display in the car. The symbols are divided into warning, indicator and information sym-

Airbags SRS

(p. 27), (p. 65)

bols. Shown below are the most common symbols with their meanings and a reference to where in the manual further information can

Seatbelt reminder (p. 23), (p. 65)

be found.

Alternator not

(p. 65)

- Red warning symbol, illuminates when

charging

a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown in the combined

Fault in brake system

(p. 65), (p. 290)

instrument panel at the same time.

Warning, safety (p. 27), (p.

- Information symbol, illuminates in combination with text in the combined instru-

mode

37), (p. 65), (p. 276)

ment panel, when a deviation in any of the car's systems has occurred. The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

Control symbols in the combined instrument panel
Symbol Specification See

Warning symbols in the combined instrument panel
Symbol Specification See
Low oil pressure (p. 65)

Parking brake applied Parking brake applied, alternative symbol

(p. 65), (p. 293) (p. 65)

ABL fault*

(p. 64), (p. 84)

Emissions system

(p. 64)

ABS fault

(p. 64), (p. 290)

Rear fog lamp on (p. 64), (p. 85)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 425

11 Specifications

|| Symbol Specification See

Stability system, DSTC, Trailer stability assist

(p. 64), (p. 178), (p. 312)

Stability system, (p. 64), (p.

sport mode

178)

Engine preheater (p. 64)

(diesel)

Low level in fuel (p. 64), (p.

tank

132)

Information, read (p. 64) display text

Main beam On

(p. 64), (p. 81)

Left-hand direc- (p. 64) tion indicators

Right-hand direction indicators

(p. 64)

Start/Stop*, engine autostopped

(p. 64), (p. 286)

ECO function* on (p. 64), (p. 288)

Tyre pressure system*

(p. 64), (p. 330)

Information symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol Specification

See

Cruise control*

(p. 185)

Adaptive cruise control*

(p. 200)

Adaptive cruise control*, time interval

(p. 188), (p. 190)

Adaptive cruise control*, Distance Warning* (Distance Alert)

(p. 192), (p. 202)

Radar sensor*

(p. 200), (p. 204), (p. 222)

Speed limiter

(p. 182)

Camera sensor*, Laser sensor*

(p. 211), (p. 222), (p. 227), (p. 232), (p. 238)

426 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Symbol Specification
Auto Brake*, Distance Warning* (Distance Alert), City SafetyTM, Collision warning system*
ABL system*

See (p. 204), (p. 211), (p. 222)
(p. 84)

Driver Alert System*, Time for a break Driver Alert System*, Time for a break Parking brake

(p. 225) (p. 227) (p. 293)

Rain sensor*

(p. 90)

Active high beam, AHB (Active High Beam)* Windscreen sensor* Start/Stop*

(p. 82) (p. 82) (p. 286)

Symbol Specification Start/Stop*

See (p. 286)

Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning (LDW), Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)

(p. 227), (p. 232), (p. 238)

Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning*

(p. 230)

Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning*

(p. 232)

Recorded speed information*

(p. 179)

Engine block and passenger compartment heater* Activated timer*

(p. 132) (p. 132)

Symbol Specification Low battery

See (p. 132)

Fuel filler flap, right-hand side

(p. 300)

Information symbols in the roof console display

Symbol Specification

See

Seatbelt reminder

(p. 26)

Airbag, passenger seat, activated

(p. 30)

Airbag, passenger seat, deactivated

(p. 30)

Related information
· Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 64)
· Combined instrument cluster - meaning
of warning symbols (p. 65)
· Messages - handling (p. 102)

Activated timer*

(p. 132)

11 Specifications
11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 427

12 Alphabetical Index

Additional heater

Alcolock................................................... 259

electric........................................ 134, 135 Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 117

ACC Adaptive cruise control................. 188

fuel-driven........................................... 134

All Wheel Drive, (AWD)............................. 290

Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 84

Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 76

All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 290

Active chassis - FOUR-C......................... 175
Active high beam....................................... 82
Active Park Assist.................................... 247 function............................................... 248 Limitations.......................................... 251 operation............................................. 249 Symbols and messages..................... 252
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 84

Airbag activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 30 driver's side.................................... 28, 36 passenger side......................... 29, 30, 36
AIRBAG ............................................... 28, 29
Airbag system............................................ 28 warning symbol.................................... 27
Air cleaning

Approach lighting.............................. 89, 152
Automatic car washes............................. 379
Automatic gearbox.......................... 273, 276 manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 273 towing and recovery........................... 314 trailer................................................... 308
Automatic relocking................................. 164

Active Yaw Control.................................. 175

material............................................... 118 AWD, All Wheel Drive............................... 290

Adapting driving characteristics...... 175, 257

passenger compartment.... 116, 117, 118

Adaptive Cruise Control........................... 188 change cruise control functionality..... 196

Air conditioning........................................ 124 Air conditioning system

deactivate........................................... 194

repair................................................... 352 Backrest..................................................... 72

fault tracing......................................... 199 Air distribution.......................................... 119

front seat, lowering............................... 72

function............................................... 189 managing speed................................. 191 overtaking........................................... 194 overview.............................................. 190 radar sensor........................................ 197 setting the time interval...................... 192 standby mode..................................... 193 temporary deactivation....................... 193

Recirculation....................................... 126 table.................................................... 127
Air quality system IAQS........................... 118
Alarm........................................ 171, 172, 173 alarm indicator.................................... 172 alarm signals....................................... 173 automatic re-arming........................... 172 checking the alarm............................. 153 reduced alarm level............................ 173

Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 75
Bag holder .............................................. 144
Battery..................................... 298, 361, 411 jump starting....................................... 270 maintenance....................................... 361 overload.............................................. 298 remote control key/PCC..................... 158 specification....................................... 411

remote control key not working.......... 172

428

12 Alphabetical Index

C symbols on the battery....................... 362
warning symbols................................. 362

Child seats................................................. 39 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats... 47

Bioethanol E85........................................ 304 Camera sensor................................ 207, 220

recommended...................................... 40

BLIS................................................. 253, 254 Bonnet, opening...................................... 343

Car care................................................... 379 Car care, leather upholstery.................... 382

size classes for child seats with ISOFIX fixture system................................. 48 types..................................................... 49

Booster seat

Cargo area

upper mounting points for child seats.. 51

lowering................................................ 46 raising................................................... 45 seating position.................................... 44
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 350
Brake fluid

cargo cover......................................... 147 lighting.................................................. 88 mounting points.................................. 143 protective net...................................... 145
Cargo cover............................................. 147

City SafetyTM............................................ 205
Cleaning automatic car wash............................ 379 car washing........................................ 379 rims..................................................... 380

grade and volume............................... 401 Car upholstery......................................... 381

seatbelts............................................. 383

Brake light.................................................. 86 Car washing............................................. 379

upholstery........................................... 381

Brakes.............................................. 290, 291 Anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 291

Catalytic converter................................... 303 Recovery............................................. 314

Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 117 Climate control

brake light............................................. 86 Chassis settings...................................... 175

actual temperature............................. 116

brake system.............................. 290, 291 Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 292 emergency brake lights........................ 86 filling brake fluid.................................. 351 handbrake........................................... 293 symbols in the combined instrument panel................................................... 290
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 353

Checking the engine oil level................... 345
Children child safety locks.................................. 39 child seat and airbag............................ 44 child seats and side airbags................. 32 location in car....................................... 44 safety.............................................. 32, 39
Child safety locks............................ 169, 170

auto-regulation................................... 123 general................................................ 115 personal preferences.......................... 118 sensors............................................... 116 temperature control............................ 124
Clock, adjustment...................................... 68
CO2 emissions......................................... 403
Collision..................................................... 37

Child seat integrated two-stage booster seat....... 44

Collision warning............................. 212, 213

429

12 Alphabetical Index

Collision warning system

resume set speed............................... 187 Distance Warning.................................... 202

function............................................... 213

temporary deactivation....................... 186

Limitations.......................................... 203

general limitations............................... 218 CTA.......................................................... 255

Symbols and messages..................... 204

operation............................................. 217 Pedestrian detection........................... 216 Radar sensor.............................. 197, 205

Cyclist detection...................................... 214 CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 117

Door mirrors............................................... 94 automatic dimming............................... 95
Driveable punctured tyres........................ 332

Collision Warning System with Auto Brake....................................................... 212
D Colour code, paint................................... 383

Driver Alert Control.................................. 224 operation............................................. 225
Driver Alert System.................................. 224

Combined instrument panel................ 59, 60

Daytime running lights............................... 80

Driving...................................................... 299

Compass................................................... 97 calibration............................................. 97

Deadlock.................................................. 168 deactivation........................................ 168

cooling system.................................... 297 with a tailer......................................... 306

Condensation in headlamps.................... 379

temporary deactivation....................... 169

with the tailgate open......................... 298

Controls, lights........................................... 78 Defroster.................................................. 125 Driving in water........................................ 297

Control symbols................................... 60, 62
Coolant volume and grade............................... 398
Coolant, checking and filling................... 349
Cooling system........................................ 297 overheating......................................... 297

Detachable towbar storage................................................ 309
Diesel....................................................... 302 run out of fuel..................................... 302
Diesel particle filter.................................. 305
Dimensions.............................................. 389

Driving with a trailer towball load........................................ 391 towing capacity.................................. 391
E

Cornering lights......................................... 85 Dipstick, electronic.......................... 347, 348 ECC, electronic climate control............... 121

Corner Traction Control........................... 176 Direction indicator..................................... 87 Eco Cruise............................................... 288

Crash, see Collision................................... 37 Direction indicators.................................... 87 EcoGuide................................................... 63

Cruise control.......................................... 185 deactivate........................................... 187 managing speed................................. 186

direction of rotation................................. 318 Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 278 Display lighting.......................................... 79

Ecolabelling, FSC, owner's manual........... 21 Economical driving.................................. 305 ECO pressure.......................................... 407

430

12 Alphabetical Index

Electrical socket...................................... 141 Engine compartment

First aid.................................................... 329

cargo area........................................... 144

coolant................................................ 349 First aid kit............................................... 329

Electrical system...................................... 410
Electric parking brake low battery voltage............................. 293
Electronic climate control - ECC............. 121
Emergency equipment first aid kit........................................... 329 warning triangle.................................. 329
Emergency puncture repair..................... 333 action.................................................. 335 inflating the tyres................................ 337

oil........................................................ 345 overview.............................................. 343 power steering fluid............................ 351
Engine drag control................................. 176
Engine oil......................................... 345, 395 adverse driving conditions.................. 395 filter..................................................... 345 grade and volume............................... 396
Engine specifications............................... 393
Error messages

Flexifuel.................................................... 269 Fluids, capacities............. 398, 399, 401, 402 Fluids and oils.......................... 398, 399, 401 Fog lamp
rear........................................................ 85 Foot brake....................................... 290, 291 FOUR-C - Active chassis......................... 175 FSC, ecolabelling....................................... 21 Fuel.......................................... 301, 302, 304

rechecking.......................................... 336

Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 200

fuel consumption................................ 403

Emergency puncture repair kit location............................................... 333 overview.............................................. 334 sealing fluid......................................... 338

Driver Alert Control............................. 227 Lane Departure Warning..................... 232 LKA..................................................... 238 see Messages and symbols....... 200, 295

fuel economy...................................... 328 fuel filter.............................................. 303
Fuel-driven heater direct start/immediate stop................ 130

Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 403

Error messages in BLIS........................... 257

timer.................................................... 130

Engine

ERS - Remote Start................................. 266 Fuelling

deactivate........................................... 265 exhaust gases, toxic, sucked in.............. 298

filling................................................... 300

overheating......................................... 306 External dimensions................................ 389

fuel cap............................................... 300

start..................................................... 264

fuel filler flap....................................... 300

Start/Stop........................................... 279

fuel filler flap, manual opening............ 300

Engine and passenger compartment heater direct start/immediate stop................ 130 messages........................................... 132 timer.................................................... 130
Engine block heater......................... 129, 269

F
Fan ECC.................................................... 123
Fault tracing for the camera sensor......... 208

Fuel tank volume................................................ 402
Fuse box.................................................. 367
Fuses....................................................... 367 cargo area........................................... 376

431

12 Alphabetical Index

changing............................................. 367 cold zone............................................ 377 engine compartment.......................... 368 General............................................... 367 Start/Stop........................................... 377 under glovebox........................... 372, 374

H
Handbrake............................................... 293 Hazard warning flashers............................ 86 Headlamp control...................................... 78 Headlamp levelling.................................... 79

I
IAQS - Interior Air Quality System........... 118 Immobiliser.............................................. 150 Indicator symbols...................................... 64 Inflatable curtain.................................. 33, 36

Headlamp pattern, adjusting..................... 90 Information button, PCC.......................... 153

Headlamp pattern adjustment................... 90 Information display.............................. 59, 60

Gearbox................................................... 271 automatic.................................... 273, 276 manual................................................ 271

Active Bending Lights .......................... 90 Headlamps............................................... 353 head restraint

Inlaid mats............................................... 140 Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 79 Instrument overview

Gear indicator.......................................... 272 Gear selector inhibitor............................. 278 Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disengagement................................................. 278 Geartronic................................................ 273 Glass

centre seat, rear.................................... 74 lowering.......................................... 75, 76
Heated washer nozzles.............................. 91
Heating rearview and door mirrors.................... 96 rear window.......................................... 96 seats................................................... 122

left-hand drive car................................ 53 right-hand drive car.............................. 56
Instruments and controls..................... 53, 56
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) Air cleaning......................................... 118
Interior lighting, see Lighting..................... 88

laminated/reinforced............................. 21

steering wheel....................................... 77 Interior rearview mirror............................... 96

Glovebox................................................. 140 Heat-reflecting windscreen........................ 17

automatic dimming............................... 97

locking................................................ 167

High engine temperature......................... 306

Intermittent wiping..................................... 90

Gross vehicle weight............................... 390 High-pressure headlamp washing............. 91

GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 272

Hill Start Assist........................................ 279

Home safe light duration........................... 89 Horn........................................................... 77

Jack......................................................... 321 Jacket holder........................................... 139

432

12 Alphabetical Index

Journey statistics..................................... 113 Laser sensor............................................ 209

main beam (cars with active xenon

Jump starting........................................... 270 Leather upholstery, washing instructions 382

headlamps)......................................... 355

Light indications, PCC............................. 153

main beam (cars with halogen headlamps)................................................. 355

Lighting.................................................... 352 Active Xenon headlamps...................... 84

number plate lighting.......................... 357 vanity mirror........................................ 358

Kerb weight.............................................. 390

approach lighting.......................... 89, 152 automatic lighting, passenger com-

LKA - Lane keeping assistant.......... 234, 235

Key........................................... 149, 150, 162

partment............................................... 88 Loading

Key blade......................................... 155, 156 Keyless drive.... 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 264 Keyless - locking..................................... 161

bulbs, specifications........................... 358 controls................................................. 88 cornering lights..................................... 85 daytime running lights.......................... 80

cargo area........................................... 142

General............................................... 142

long load............................................. 143

roof load............................................. 143

Keyless start (keyless drive) 159, 160,

display lighting...................................... 79 Lock

161,

162,

163,

264

headlamp levelling................................ 79

locking................................................ 164

Keyless - unlocking................................. 161

home safe lighting................................ 89

manual locking.................................... 165

Keypad in the steering wheel.................... 77 Key positions............................................. 70

instrument lighting................................ 79 in the passenger compartment............. 88 main/dipped beam............................... 81 position/parking lamps......................... 80 rear fog lamp........................................ 85

unlocking.................................... 164, 165 Lockable wheel bolts............................... 320 Lock confirmation ................................... 150 Lock indicator.......................................... 150

tunnel detection.................................... 81 Locking/unlocking

Labels...................................................... 386 Laminated glass......................................... 21

Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 353 bulb holder rear: direction indicators rear, rear fog lamp and reversing

glovebox............................................. 167 inside.................................................. 165 tailgate................................................ 167

Lamps, see Lighting................................ 352

lamp.................................................... 356

Lane Departure Control................... 229, 230
Lane keeping assistant operation..................... 230, 231, 236, 237
Lane keeping assistant - LKA.......... 234, 235

cargo area........................................... 357 dipped beam (cars with halogen headlamps)................................................. 355 direction indicators, front.................... 356

433

12 Alphabetical Index

Meters

Paintwork

fuel gauge....................................... 59, 61

colour code......................................... 383

Main/dipped beam, see Lighting............... 81

speedometer................................... 59, 61

damage and touch-up........................ 383

Main beam, automatic activation.............. 82

tachometer..................................... 59, 61 Panel lighting............................................. 79

maintenance Rustproofing....................................... 381
Manual gearbox....................................... 271 GSI - Gear selector assistance........... 272 Towing and recovery.......................... 314 trailer................................................... 308

misting attending to the windows................... 115
Misting condensation in headlamps............... 379
Mood lighting............................................. 89
MY CAR................................................... 103

Panic function.......................................... 152
PAP - Active Park Assist.......................... 247
Park Assist............................................... 240 backward............................................ 241 fault indicator...................................... 243 function............................................... 240

Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 273

parking assistance sensors................ 243

Max. roof load.......................................... 390

Park assist camera.................................. 244

O Memory function in seat............................ 73

settings............................................... 246

Menus Combined instrument panel............... 100 menu overview.................................... 101
Messages................................................ 102 Information display............................. 101
Messages and symbols

Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 395, 396 Oil level low.............................................. 345 Output...................................................... 393 outside temperature gauge....................... 67 Overheating............................................. 306

Parking brake........................................... 293
Passenger compartment filter................. 117
Passenger compartment heater.............. 129
PCC Personal Car Communicator functions............................................. 151 range........................................... 154, 159

Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 200 Collision Warning with Auto Brake.......................................... 211, 222 Driver Alert Control............................. 227 Engine block heater and passenger

Owner's manual, ecolabelling.................... 21
P

Pedestrian detection................................ 212 Petrol grade............................................. 302 Pinch protection, sunroof........................ 100 Pocket park assist - PAP......................... 247

compartment heater........................... 132 Lane Departure Warning..................... 232 LKA..................................................... 238
Messages in BLIS.................................... 257

PACOS....................................................... 30 Paddle on the steering wheel.................... 77

Polishing.................................................. 380 Position/parking lamps.............................. 80 Power guide............................................... 63

434

12 Alphabetical Index

Power seat................................................. 73 Rearview and door mirrors

Retractable power door mirrors................. 95

Powershift gearbox.......................... 276, 314 Power steering fluid
grade................................................... 401 Power sunroof........................................... 98 Power windows......................................... 92 Privacy locking......................................... 156

compass............................................... 97 door...................................................... 94 electrically retractable........................... 95 heating.................................................. 96 interior................................................... 96
Rear window, defrosting............................ 96
Recommendations during driving............ 299

Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 272
Road sign information............................. 179 Limitations.......................................... 181 operation............................................. 179
Roof load, max. weight............................ 390
Rustproofing............................................ 381

Protective grille........................................ 146 Recommended child seats

Protective net........................................... 146

table...................................................... 40

Recovery.................................................. 316

Refrigerant............................................... 352 Safety lock

Regeneration........................................... 305

children................................................. 39

Queue Assist............................................ 195

Relay/fuse box, see Fuses....................... 367

Safety mode.............................................. 37 moving the car...................................... 38

Queue Assistant....................................... 195 Remote control immobiliser..................... 151

start attempt......................................... 38

R
Radar sensor........................................... 189 Limitations.......................................... 197
Rain sensor................................................ 90 Rear bulbs
location............................................... 357 Rear seat
Heating............................................... 122

Remote control key......................... 149, 150 battery replacement............................ 158 detachable key blade................. 155, 156 functions............................................. 151 loss..................................................... 149 range........................................... 153, 159
Remote control key system, type approval............................................................ 412
Remote Start - ERS................................. 266
Resetting, trip meter................ 107, 110, 112
Resetting the door mirrors......................... 95

Sealing fluid............................................. 338
Seat, see Seats.......................................... 72
Seatbelt...................................................... 23 loosen................................................... 25 pregnancy............................................. 25 putting on............................................. 24 rear seat................................................ 26 seatbelt reminder.................................. 26 seatbelt tensioner................................. 26
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 26
Seatbelt tensioner................................ 26, 36

Resetting the power windows................... 94

435

12 Alphabetical Index

Seats.......................................................... 72 Spin control............................................. 175

sunscreen............................................. 99

head restraints, rear.............................. 74 Stability and traction control system 175,

ventilation position................................ 99

heating................................................ 122 178

Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 99

Heating............................................... 122 lowering the front backrest................... 72 lowering the rear backrest.................... 75

operation............................................. 176 Stability system....................................... 175

Switching off the engine.......................... 265 Symbols

power.................................................... 73 Stains....................................................... 381

indicator symbols..................... 60, 62, 64

Self Supporting run flat Tyres (SST)........ 332 Start/Stop................................................ 279

warning symbols............................. 60, 62

Sensus....................................................... 68

Function and operation...................... 280 the engine does not stop.................... 282

Symbols and messages Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 200

Service position....................................... 359

Steering force, speed related.................. 257

Collision Warning with Auto

Service programme................................. 340

Steering force level, see Steering force... 257

Set time interval....................................... 202

Steering lock............................................ 265

Side airbag SIPS.................................. 31, 36

Steering wheel........................................... 76

Brake.......................................... 211, 222 Driver Alert Control............................. 227 Lane Departure Warning..................... 232 LKA..................................................... 238

SIPS airbag................................................ 31

heating.................................................. 77 System

Skidding................................................... 299

keypad.................................................. 77

tripping.................................................. 36

slippery driving conditions....................... 299

paddle................................................... 77

Soot filter................................................. 305

steering wheel adjustment.................... 76

SOOT FILTER FULL................................. 305

Stone chips and scratches...................... 383

spare wheel............................................. 324 installation........................................... 327

Storage spaces glovebox............................................. 140 Jacket holder...................................... 139

Tailgate Locking/unlocking.............................. 167

Speed limiter............................................ 182

tunnel console.................................... 139 Temperature

alarm for speed exceeded.................. 184 deactivation........................................ 184 getting started............................ 182, 183

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment.................................................. 137

actual temperature............................. 116 Temperature control................................ 124

temporary deactivation....................... 183 Sunroof

Tools........................................................ 320

Speed ratings, tyres................................. 323

opening and closing............................. 98 pinch protection.................................. 100

Total airing function......................... 115, 166

436

12 Alphabetical Index

Towbar

Trip computer.......... 104, 105, 109, 112, 113 Tyres

detachable, attachment...................... 310 Trip meter.................................................. 68

direction of rotation............................ 318

detachable, removal........................... 311
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 309
Towbar - detachable attachment/removal.................... 310, 311

Trip meter, resetting................ 107, 110, 112
Troubleshooting Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 199
TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 176, 312

maintenance....................................... 318 pressure...................................... 328, 407 puncture repair................................... 333 specifications...................................... 407 tread depth......................................... 321

Towing..................................................... 313 towing eye.......................................... 315

Tunnel console........................................ 139 12 V socket......................................... 141

tread wear indicators.......................... 320 tyre pressure monitoring..................... 330

Towing bracket........................................ 309

cigarette lighter and ashtray............... 139

winter tyres......................................... 321

specifications...................................... 309

Tunnel detection........................................ 81

Towing capacity and towball load........... 391 Towing eye.............................................. 315

Type approval Bluetooth®.......................................... 414

TPMS - Tyre Pressure Monitoring........... 330
Traction control........................................ 175
Trailer....................................................... 306 cable........................................... 306, 307

radar system....................................... 413 remote control key system................. 412 tyre pressure monitoring..................... 412
Type designations................................... 386

Unlocking from the inside.................................... 165 from the outside................................. 164
Unlocking with the key blade................... 162

driving with a trailer............................ 306 Tyre dimension........................................ 322

snaking............................................... 312 Tyre load index........................................ 323

V Trailer stability assist............................... 176 Tyre pressure label.................................. 328

Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 312 Transmission............................................ 271 Transmission oil
volume and grade............................... 399 Transponder.............................................. 17 Tread depth............................................. 321

Tyre pressure monitoring......................... 330 Adjust.................................................. 330 arming................................................. 331 deactivate........................................... 331 driveable punctured tyres (SST)......... 332 low tyre pressure................................ 331 recommendations............................... 332

Vanity mirror...................................... 88, 140 Ventilation................................................ 119 Vibration damper..................................... 309 Volvo Sensus............................................. 68

Tread wear indicators.............................. 320

437

12 Alphabetical Index

W
Warning lamp Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 189 collision warning system.................... 217 stability and traction control system.. 175
Warning lamps Airbags SRS....................................... 65 alternator not charging......................... 65

Waxing..................................................... 380
Weights kerb weight......................................... 390
Wheel bolts.............................................. 320 lockable.............................................. 320
Wheel rim, dimensions............................ 322
Wheel rims cleaning.............................................. 380

Wiper blades............................................ 359 changing............................................. 360 Cleaning.............................................. 361 replacing, rear window....................... 360 Service position.................................. 359
Wipers and washing.................................. 90

Fault in brake system........................... 65 Wheels

Low oil pressure................................... 65

installation........................................... 327

Parking brake applied........................... 65

removal............................................... 324

seatbelt reminder............................ 26, 65

snow chains........................................ 321

Warning................................................ 65 Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 33

Warning sound collision warning system.................... 217

WHIPS child seat/booster cushion................... 34

Warning symbols........................... 60, 62, 65

seating position.................................... 35

Warning triangle....................................... 329

whiplash protection........................ 33, 36

Washer fluid

Windows, rearview and door mirrors. 21, 381

volume................................................ 401 Windscreen

Washer fluid, filling................................... 361

heating................................................ 125

Washer nozzles, heated............................. 91 Windscreen, heating.................................. 96

Washers

Windscreen washing.................................. 91

rear window.......................................... 92 Windscreen wiper...................................... 90

washer fluid, filling.............................. 361

rain sensor............................................ 90

windscreen........................................... 91 Winter driving........................................... 299

Water and dirt-repellent coating.............. 381 Winter tyres.............................................. 321

Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 381

438

Aspose.Pdf for .NET 17.6 Aspose Ltd.